Skip to main content

Full text of "Paugvik : a nineteenth-century native village on Bristol Bay, Alaska"

See other formats


572.05 
FA 

N.S. 

no. 22-27 
1994-96 


FIEI 

pnthropology 


i.s 
10.24 


NEW  SERIES,  NO.  24 


Paugvik:  A  Nineteenth-Century  Native  Village  on 
Bristol  Bay,  Alaska 


Don  E.  Dumond 
James  W.  VanStone 


Published  August  31,  1995 
Publication  1467 


PUBLISHED  BY  1  iJbJLD  MUSEUM  ut  inai 


MPAIGM 

<Q.        Information  for  Contributors  to  Fieldiana 

I    iLil     I'lciU    lV!u^lti■JlH    Stan  ' 

considered  as  space  permi' 

!  "!)6."5.00  per  printed  page  or  fraction  tnereot.  raymcm  or  at  least  .->ij7c  ci  page 
x-essing,  which  reduces  the  publication  time.  Contributions  from  staff,  research 
'  t  regai-dless  of  ability  to  pay  page  charges,  however,  the  t. 

I  ascripts.  Three  complete  copies  of  the  text  (including  ti. 
;act;  and  of  the  illustrations  shoulo  be  submitted  (one  original  copy  plus  two  review  copies  which  may  be 
s).  No  manuscripts  will  be  considered  for  publication  or  submitted  to  reviewers  before  all  Tiaterials  arc 
co;npii  it'  and  in  the  hands  of  the  Scientific  Editor. 

\i  I'M  ,.■'•ir)t'^  slioiiUi  1)(^  submiited  U)  Sricniifif  Fditor.  Fu'IdLina.  Field  Museum  of  Natur.il  Ilisi'. 

Tej-t:  .Marmscnpts  must  be  typCHTittcn  double-spaced  on  standarcl-weigtvt,  Ky?-  t5y  ii-mcn  paper  wan  wiac  margins 
on  all  four  sides.  If  typed  on  an  IBM-compatible  computer  using  MS-DOS,  also  submit  text  on  SVi-inch  diskette 
(WordPerfect  4.1,  4.2,  or  5.0,  Muiii'  '  ^    Wang  PC,  Samna,  Microsoft  Word,  Volksv - 

WordStar  programs  or  ASCII). 

I'or  papers  over  100  manuscript  pages,  authors  are  requested  to  submit  a  Table  of  Contents,"  a  "List  of  Illustrations," 
dJuJ  a  "List  of  Tables"  immediately  following  title  page.  In  most  cases,  the  text  should  be  preceded  by  an  "Abstract"  and 
should  conclude  with  "Acknowledgments"  (if  any)  and  "Literature  Cited." 

All  measurements  should  be  in  the  metric  system  (periods  are  not  used  after  abbreviated  i;c.>su;cnicntsV  T!ic  forina! 
and  style  of  headings  should  follow  that  of  recent  issues  ol Fieldiana 

For  more  detailed  style  information,  see  The  r^>'"'"'  az-^k,,,^/ 
(  licago  Press,  and  also  recent  issues  of  FietSiana. 

References:  In  "Literature  Cited,"  book  and  journal  titles  should  be  given  m  full.  Where  abbreviations  are  desirable 

fc  ;  ,  in  citation  of  synonymies),  authors  consistently  should  follow  Botanico-Periodicum-Hunnanum  and  TL-2  Taxonomic 

•  ■  by  F.  A.  Stafleu  &  R.  S.  Cowan  (1976  ei  seq.)  (botanical  papers)  or  Serial  Sources  for  the  Biosis  Data  Base  (1983) 

,  .      . .  cd  by  the  BioSciences  Information  Service.  Names  of  botanical  authors  should  follow  the  "Draft  Index  of  Author 

Abbreviations.  Rojal  Botanic  Gardens,  Kew,"  1984  edition,  or  7      ' 

References  should  be  typed  in  the  following  form: 

Croat,  T.  B.  1978.  Flora  of  Barro  Colorado  Island.  Stanford  University  Press,  Stanford,  Calif.,  943  pp. 
Grubb,  P.  J.,  J.  R.  Lloyd,  and  T.  D.  Pennington.  1%3,  A  comparison  of  montane  and  lowland  rain  forest  in  1 

1    I  y„-  ("orest  structure,  physiognomy,  and  floristics.  Journal  of  Ecology,  51:  567-601. 
I^ngdor  ;  979.  Yage  among  the  Siona:  Cultural  patterns  in  visions,  pp.  63-80.  In  Browman,  D.  L.,and  R.  A. 

.->ciiwi»r,^,  eds.,  Spirits,  Shamans,  and  Stars.  Mouton  Publishers,  The  Hague,  Netheriands. 
Murra,  J.  1946.  The  historic  tribes  of  Ecuador,  pp.  785-821.  In  Steward,  J.  H.,  ed..  Handbook  of  South  Ameri 

Indians.  Vol.  2,  The  Andean  Civilizations.  Bulletin  143,  Bureau  of  American  Ethnology,  Smithsonian 

Institution,  Washington,  D.C. 
Siob:e,  R.  G.  1981.  Ferns  and  fern  allies  of  Guatemala.  Part  II.  Polypodiaceae.  Fieldiana:  Botany,  n.s.,  6:  1-522. 

Illustrations:  Illustrations  are  referred  to  as  "figures"  in  the  text  (not  as  "plates").  Figures  must  be  accompanied  bv 
V  ime  indication  of  scale,  normally  a  reference  bar.  Statements  in  figure  captions  alone,  such  as  "x  0.8,"  are  not  accepta! 
Qiptions  should  be  typed  double-spaced  and  consecutively.  See  recent  issues  oi  Fieldiana  for  details  o'  ■•"''■ 
All  illustrations  should  be  marked  on  the  reverse  with  author's  name,  figure  number(s),  and  "to 

)mitted  should,  whenever  practicable,  be  8Vi  x  11  inches  (22  x  28  cm),  and  may  not  cxceca  u  •/2  x  io:-^ 

Illustrations  should  be  mounted  on  boards  in  the  arrangement  to  be  obtained  in  the  printed  work.  This 

o  suitable  for  transmission  to  the  printer  as  follows:  Pen  and  ink  drawings  may  be  originals  (preferred) 

(1  drrA-inps  nn;st  be  originals,  but  within  the  size  limitation;  and  photostats  must  be  high-quality,  glossy, 

'  -  inding  author  upon  pi)'- 

ihors  who  wish  to  publish  figu;  quire  costly  special  paper  or  color  reproductior 

lii^rit';  vxiih  th'"  Scipntinr  Fjiitor 

p  correction  systci  ndingauthc 

on  which  dclclion&,  additions,  and  changes  can  be  made  and  queries  answered.  Uniy  one  set  or 
All  desired  corrections  of  t]/pe  must  be  made  on  the  single  set  of  page  proofs  Changes  in  page 
lo  corrections)  are  very  ex,  page  proofs  can  <  ■  the 

ivance  to  pay  for  them. 

0  This  paper  meet*  the  requirements  of  ANSI/NISO  Z39.48*1992  (Permaner)pe  of  Paper). 


FIELDIANA 


Anthropology 


NEW  SERIES,  NO.  24 


Paugvik:  A  Nineteenth-Century  Native  Village  on 
Bristol  Bay,  Alaska 


Don  E.  Dumond 

Professor  Emeritus 
Department  of  Anthropology 
University  of  Oregon 
Eugene,  Oregon  97403-1218 


James  W.  VanStone 

Curator  Emeritus 
Department  of  Anthropology 
Field  Museum  of  Natural  History 
Chicago,  Illinois  60605-2496 


Accepted  October  28,  1994 
Published  August  31,  1995 
Publication  1467 


PUBLISHED  BY  FIELD  MUSEUM  OF  NATURAL  HISTORY 


U" 


©  1995  Field  Museum  of  Natural  History 
Library  of  Congress  Catalog  Card  Number:  95-78799 

ISSN  0071-4739 
PRINTED  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES  OF  AMERICA 


M.S.    . 


.>. 


Table  of  Contents 


1 .  History  of  the  Region 1 

The  Region  and  Its  People  1 

Russian  Explorations 4 

The  Aglurmiut    4 

Russian  Explorers  at  Paugvik    6 

Paugvik  and  the  Fur  Trade    7 

The  Russian  Orthodox  Church   8 

Paugvik  in  the  American  Period 9 

2.  History  of  Archaeological  Research    ..15 

Work  Before  1985    15 

Summary  of  the  1985  Field  Season    18 

Mapping 18 

Excavations   19 

3.  Excavation  Detail  21 

Trench  1  21 

House  1    22 

House  lA 23 

House  2    25 

House  2A 25 

House  3    27 

House  4    27 

House  5    29 

House  6,  Area  6A    29 

Trench  4 30 

Stratification  of  Cultural  Features 31 

4.  Collections    33 

Procurement  Network  33 

Hunting    33 

Fishing    43 

Trapping 44 

Transportation    44 

Maintenance  Network 45 

Tools 45 

Household  Equipment    48 

Personal  Adornment   53 

Smoking  Complex    57 

Toys    57 

Ceremonial  Objects   57 

Miscellaneous    58 

Protective  Network    58 

Clothing   58 

Imported  Building  Materials    59 

Unidentified  Objects    59 

Wood    59 

Antler,  Ivory,  Bone    59 

Miscellaneous  Debris 60 

5.  Paugvik  in  Historical  Context 91 

Subsistence    91 

Mammals 91 

Birds   92 

Fishes    93 


Shellfish    93 

Vegetal  Foods   94 

Conclusion 94 

The  Fur  Trade    95 

Seasonality 95 

Dating 96 

Ceramics    96 

Beads    96 

Metal 97 

Glass  97 

Summary  and  Conclusions 97 

Paugvik  in  the  Russian  Period    98 

Relations  with  Neighbors  99 

Acknowledgments  101 

Literature  Cited   102 

Appendix   106 


List  of  Illustrations 


1.  Map  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula  2 

2.  Map  of  southwest  Alaska  showing  ethnic 
groups   5 

3.  Takhuty  natives  of  the  Naknek  River  re- 
gion      6 

4.  Native  houses  near  Naknek,  1900    10 

5.  Native  houses  and  fish-drying  racks  near 
South  Naknek,  1900    11 

6.  Native  house  and  cache,  1900  12 

7.  Aerial  view  of  the  Paugvik  site  and  en- 
virons      16 

8.  Contour  map  of  the  Paugvik  site    17 

9.  Profile  of  the  major  occupation  area  at 
Paugvik 18 

1 0.  Profile  of  a  portion  of  Trench  1  22 

1 1 .  Plan  and  sections  of  Houses  1  and  1 A  . .  24 

12.  Plan  and  sections  of  Houses  2  and  2 A  . .  26 

13.  Plan  and  sections  of  House  3  28 

14.  Plan  and  profiles  of  House  6    30 

1 5.  Toggle  harpoon  head   40 

16.  Harpoon  parts,  float  parts,  arrowheads, 
bow,  wound  plug    62 

17.  Boat  hook,  end  blades,  arrow  parts,  gun 
part,  fishing  items  63 

1 8.  Kayak  deck  beam,  net  weights,  sled  shoes, 
showshoe  part    64 

19.  Pelt  stretchers    65 

20.  Sled  upright,  umiak  part,  wedges    66 

21.  Sled  runner,  wedges,  sled  stanchion    ....  67 

22.  Maul,  axe  heads,  wedge,  whetstone    ....  68 

23.  Knife  parts,  skin  scraper  blade  blank, 
whetstones,  engraving  tool    69 


lU 


24.  Whetstone    70 

25.  Ulus,  scrapers  or  knives,  awls,  pick  or 
mattock  blade    71 

26.  Pick  or  mattock  blade,  compound  vessel, 
shovel  blade  72 

27.  Snow  beaters,  rake  prong,  ice  pick  or  chis- 
el     73 

28.  Compound  vessel  parts   74 

29.  Spoons,  lamp,  float  and  bag  nozzles,  com- 
pound vessel  part,  lug    75 

30.  Dippers,  spoon,  ladles,  kettle  rim  frag- 
ment      76 

3 1 .  Mat  or  bag  fragment    77 

32.  Mat  or  bag  fragment    77 

33.  Mat  or  bag  fragment    77 

34.  Braided  grass  cordage    78 

35.  Braided  grass  cordage    78 

36.  Lamps   79 

37.  Lamps  80 

38.  Chinaware  fragments   81 

39.  Native  pottery  profiles 82 

40.  Mask,  figurines,  respirator    83 

4 1 .  Skin  and  shoe  fragments,  buttons,  knotted 
sealskin  84 

42.  Unidentified  objects  85 

43.  Unidentified  objects  86 

44.  Harpoon  parts,  knife  blade,  bow  frag- 
ment, arrowhead  87 

45.  Ulu  handle,  kettle  lug,  knife  blade,  mask 
part,  engraving  tool,  brass  box,  spoons, 
kettle  lid,  wedge,  kayak  part 88 


46.  Projectile  point,  bifaces,  end  blades,  stone 
saw,  slate  blanks,  adze  blade,  ulu  blade, 
skin  scraper  blade  89 

47.  Chapel  at  Naknek,  1900    98 


List  of  Tables 


1.  Potentially  time-sensitive  artifacts  from 
Trench  1    23 

2.  Distribution  of  artifacts  and  detritus    ...  34 

3.  Chinaware  sherds  from  1985  excavations 
52 

4.  Glass  beads  from  1985  excavations    ....  54 

5.  Types  and  varieties  of  beads  in  the  1985 
sample 56 

6.  Comaline  d' Aleppo  beads  from  south- 
western Alaskan  sites  56 

7.  Rotation  analysis  of  six  hearths    61    -^ 

8.  Faunal  remains  by  numbers  of  elements 
and  individuals   92 

9.  Birds  and  fishes  identified  from  previous 
work    94 

10.  Proportions  of  mammal  foods  probably 
available  95 

1 1 .  Counts  of  potsherds  from  sites  in  south- 
western Alaska    96 


IV 


Paugvik  village  is  well  represented  in  Russian  records  from 
southwestern  Alaska,  suggesting  that  it  was  an  important 
settlement  in  the  19th  century.  Excavations  in  1985  cleared 
all  or  parts  of  nine  houses,  where  faunal  and  other  evidence 
indicates  participation  in  the  commercial  fur  trade.  Although 
glass  trade  beads  were  present  throughout,  there  were  rela- 
tively few  other  industrial  trade  items  and  a  profusion  of 
objects  of  traditional  native  manufacture.  Collections,  site 
layout,  and  historical  documents  suggest  the  village  was  oc- 
cupied from  after  a.d.  1800  to  about  1870. 


History  of  the  Region 


Herein  we  report  the  results  of  archaeological 
excavations  at  the  1 9th-century  native  set- 
tlement of  Paugvik  on  the  Alaska  Peninsula  in 
southwestern  Alaska.  The  major  fieldwork  was  in 
1985,  when  a  crew  of  six  devoted  two  months  to 
excavations  at  the  settlement.  In  describing  the 
Paugvik  collections,  however,  we  have  added  to 
materials  of  1985  those  recovered  in  abbreviated 
tests  at  the  site  in  1961  and  1973.  Although  our 
aim  is  primarily  to  describe  these  archaeological 
results,  we  also  attempt  in  a  preliminary  way  to 
place  the  people  of  Paugvik  within  their  social  and 
economic  surroundings. 


The  Region  and  Its  People 

The  Alaska  Peninsula  juts  southwestward  from  the 
Alaska  mainland  and,  with  its  partly  submerged 
extension  in  the  long  chain  of  Aleutian  Islands, 
forms  the  boundary  between  the  Bering  Sea  on  the 
north  and  the  Pacific  Ocean  on  the  south  (Fig.  1 ). 
Toward  its  wider,  northeastern  end  the  peninsula 
is  160  km  or  more  in  width.  Throughout  its  length 
its  backbone  is  the  Aleutian  Range  of  volcanic 
mountains,  peaks  of  which  rise  to  elevations  above 
1 800  m  and  form  a  divide  that  in  the  northeast  is 
15-25  km  from  the  abrupt,  fjorded  coast  of  Shel- 
ikof  Strait  on  the  Pacific  but  as  much  as  145  km 
from  the  coast  on  Bristol  Bay  of  the  Bering  Sea. 
Toward  that  coast  the  ground  slopes  as  a  soggy 
plain  built  by  outwash  of  the  Pleistocene  glaciers 
that  carved  the  basins  of  the  lakes  that  now  stretch 
in  series  along  the  northwestern  foot  of  the  moun- 
tains, which  is  the  source  of  meandering  streams 
and  the  spectacular  runs  of  red  or  sockeye  salmon 
for  which  Bristol  Bay  is  famous. 


The  village  of  Paugvik  was  located  on  the  right 
bank  of  the  Naknek  River  1  km  above  its  mouth 
on  Bristol  Bay  and  2  km  below  the  modem  village 
of  Naknek.  Bristol  Bay  forms  the  southeast  comer 
of  the  Bering  Sea,  and  the  flat  peninsula  coastal 
plain  and  shallow  seas  partake  of  the  arctic  climate 
of  the  north.  The  plain  is  treeless  and  tundra  cov- 
ered, save  for  a  few  protected  spots  in  stream  val- 
leys where  pioneer  stands  of  stunted  spruce  ap- 
pear. On  the  bay  there  is  a  substantial  ice  cover 
for  much  of  normal  winters.  Summers  are  punc- 
tuated by  periodic  storms  that  rage  inland  from 
the  unpredictable  Bering  Sea. 

Faunal  food  resources  are  plentiful  in  the  region. 
Although  the  shallow  seas  of  the  upper  bay  dis- 
courage the  approach  of  larger  whales  and  other 
sea  mammals— walrus,  for  instance,  are  found  no 
closer  than  200  km  to  the  west,  where  they  haul 
out  in  summer  on  islands  fronting  Togiak  Bay- 
harbor  seals  are  abundant,  and  beluga  (white 
whales)  inhabit  Bristol  Bay  the  year  around,  cours- 
ing up  the  Naknek  River  in  spring  and  summer 
in  pursuit  of  mns  of  smelt  and  salmon.  Some  clam 
species  are  available  in  the  upper  bay,  with  mussel 
colonies  on  intertidal  rocks  such  as  those  visible 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  at  low  tide.  Seabirds 
and  migratory  waterfowl  are  also  plentiful  in  sea- 
son. 

The  major  Alaska  Peninsula  caribou  herd  calves 
in  spring  in  the  lowlands  of  the  Bering  Sea  plain 
near  Port  Heiden.  In  early  fall  the  herd  drifts 
northeastward  to  winter,  usually  between  the  Uga- 
shik  and  Naknek  rivers,  although  in  the  mid- 19th- 
century  caribou  were  so  numerous  that  they  would 
move  seasonally  across  the  Naknek  and  even  the 
Kvichak  River  (Hemming,  1971,  pp.  39^4).  But 
the  most  dependable  and  major  resource  is  pro- 
vided by  the  five  species  of  Pacific  salmon,  which 


History  of  the  Region         1 


Fig.  1 .    Map  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula. 

are  present  in  great  numbers  in  streams  during 
their  migrations  and  also  available  offshore  in 
Bristol  Bay.  Runs  begin  in  early  June  with  king  or 
Chinook  salmon,  continue  through  July  with  sock- 
eye  (red)  and  chum  (dog)  salmon,  and  last  through 
August  with  pink  and  silver  (coho)  salmon  (UA, 
1974,  pp.  422-440).  Although  all  of  these  species 
occur  in  the  Naknek  River,  red  salmon  are  es- 
pecially plentiful,  with  annual  upstream  escape- 
ments even  under  modem  fishery  pressure  running 
well  over  1  million  fish  (ADFG,  1991);  in  aborig- 
inal times  the  runs  into  the  river  must  have  been 
substantially  larger.  Smelt  also  run  into  the  Nak- 
nek in  spring  or  early  summer,  and  freshwater  fish 
are  abundant,  including  salmonids,  such  as  rain- 
bow trout  and  char,  grayling,  pike,  and  whitefish 
(UA,  1974,  p.  444). 

The  upper  peninsula  lies  within  the  region  of 
aboriginal  Western  Eskimo  or  Yupik  speech. 
Nineteenth-century  Paugvik  itself  was  occupied 
by  people  referred  to  in  the  most  modem  literature 
as  Aglurmiut,  known  to  the  Russians  as  Agleg- 
miut.  Their  nearest  ethnic  and  dialectic  neighbors 
were  the  Aglurmiut  of  settlements  located  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Egegik  River  on  the  peninsula  coast 


to  the  southwest,  and  near  the  mouth  of  the  Nush- 
agak  River  across  Bristol  Bay.  These  Aglurmiut 
were  the  southemmost  speakers  of  the  language 
designated  Central  Yupik  (Krauss,  1982).  They 
were  reported  by  the  early  Russians  to  have  been 
driven  from  the  lower  Kuskokwim  River  vicinity 
in  a  series  of  bloody  battles  of  the  late  1 8th  century, 
known  more  recently  in  Kuskokwim  native  tra- 
dition as  the  "bow  and  arrow  wars"  (see,  for  in- 
stance, Ackerman  &  Ackerman,  1973;  Fienup- 
Riordan,  1990).  Although  some  early  U.S.  sources 
credited  the  Aglurmiut  or  Aglegmiut  with  control 
of  all  of  the  Bering  Sea  slope  of  the  northem  Alaska 
Peninsula  (e.g.,  Petroff,  1881,  1884;  Porter,  1893), 
the  Russians  knew  them  to  have  been  restricted 
to  the  Bristol  Bay  littoral,  from  which  they  had 
displaced  people  called  by  the  Russians  "Sever- 
novtsy  (Northemers)  and  Ugashentzy"  (Wrangell, 
1980,  p.  64).  Although  the  second  of  these  were 
people  of  the  Ugashik  River  located  well  to  the  T 
southwest  of  the  region  of  immediate  interest  here 
(Fig.  2),  the  former  were  people  of  the  upper  por- 
tion of  the  Naknek  River  drainage  and  hence  of 
relevance  to  the  condition  of  Paugvik  and  its 
neighborhood. 

About  1 00  km  above  Paugvik  within  the  Nak- 
nek River  drainage  system,  immediately  above 
Iliuk  Arm  of  Naknek  Lake  and  in  the  geographic 
center  of  the  peninsula,  was  the  multi  village  com- 
munity called  by  the  Americans  Savonoski,  known 
to  the  earlier  Russians  as  the  Sevemovsk  (i.e., 
northemer)  settlements,  with  their  inhabitants  the 
Severnovskie  Aleuty,  or  Sevemovsk  Aleuts.  A  sense 
of  contrast  in  the  identities  of  people  of  these  set- 
tlements is  made  plain  by  records  of  births  entered 
by  the  Alaska  Russian  Church  (ARC,  1 8 1 6-1936, 
Nushagak  mission)  between  the  1840s  and  1895. 
At  Paugvik,  births  were  recorded  as  74%  "Agleg- 
miut," 21%  Kusquqvagmiut  (i.e.,  people  of  the 
Kuskokwim  River  region),  2%  Kiatagmiut  (of  the 
upper  drainage  of  the  Nushagak  River  system  or 
the  vicinity  of  Iliamna  Lake),  and  3%  "Aleut."  In 
the  Sevemovsk  settlements,  92%  were  recorded  as 
"Aleut,"  5%  as  "Aglegmiut,"  and  2%  as  Kiatag- 
miut (see  also  Dumond,  1986,  p.  5). 

There  may  have  been  some  tradition  of  hostility 
between  villages  at  the  two  extremes  of  the  Naknek 
Lake  and  River  system,  as  indicated  by  the  Rus- 
sian accounts  of  Aglurmiut  history.  In  1953  a  Sev- 
emovsk native  alleged  that  in  very  old  days  the 
two  peoples  had  fought  each  other  with  bow  and 
arrow.  In  those  same  olden  days,  he  said,  the  peo- 
ple of  the  lower  Naknek  River  never  went  up- 
stream, and  the  Sevemovsk  people  never  went 


Part  One 


downriver  but  repaired  to  the  Pacific  coast  rather 
than  to  Bristol  Bay  to  hunt  sea  mammals  (Davis, 
1954).  A  similar  course  for  trading  was  reported 
for  the  Sevemovsk  people  in  the  1 880s  by  the  first 
U.S.  census  official  in  the  region,  Ivan  Petroff,  who 
remarked  that 

the  people  of  two  villages  ...  in  the  vicinity  of  lake 
Walker  [his  designation  for  Naknek  Lake]  came  down 
to  Katmai  [on  Shelikof  Strait]  to  do  their  shopping  and 
to  dispose  of  their  furs,  undertaking  a  very  fatiguing 
tramp  over  mountains  and  glaciers  and  across  deep  and 
dangerous  streams  in  preference  to  the  canoe  journey  to 
the  Bristol  Bay  stations.  (Petroff,  1884,  p.  25) 

And  he  reported  a  local  tradition  in  which  hostil- 
ities probably  involving  the  two  Naknek  River 
peoples  are  alluded  to,  when  at  a  feeder  stream  of 
Naknek  Lake  there  was 

a  night  attack  made  by  the  "bloodthirsty"  Aleuts  long 
years  ago,  when  every  soul  in  the  place  was  dispatched 
without  mercy,  with  the  exception  of  one  man,  who  hid 
himself  under  a  waterfall  close  by,  and  thus  survived  to 
tell  the  tale.  (Petroff,  1884,  p.  24) 

In  1912  the  violent  volcanic  eruption  in  the  vi- 
cinity of  Mt.  Katmai,  which  deposited  30  cm  or 
more  of  pumice  and  ash  on  upper  Naknek  Lake, 
caused  the  permanent  abandonment  of  the  two 
Sevemovsk  settlements  then  occupied.  Despite  any 
residual  hostile  feeling  for  the  20th-century  de- 
scendants of  the  Aglurmiut,  most  of  the  survivors 
relocated  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Naknek  River  10 
km  above  Naknek  village.  Not  only  had  the  Sev- 
emovsk people  fled  there  as  the  emption  began, 
but  canneries  on  the  lower  Naknek  promised  oc- 
casional employment,  and  the  Pacific  coastal  set- 
tlements they  had  been  inclined  to  visit  in  earlier 
times  were  totally  destroyed  by  the  emption. 

Unlike  the  people  of  Paugvik  and  their  descen- 
dants, the  social  and  linguistic  affinity  of  the  Sev- 
emovsk people  is  not  clear  in  generally  available 
sources.  However,  the  matter  is  important  to  some 
considerations  stemming  from  the  work  reported 
here  and  will  be  pursued  briefly. 

When  the  Russian  fur  hunters  followed  the  path 
of  Vitus  Bering  to  the  New  World  after  his  unlucky 
voyage  of  1741-1742,  they  applied  their  appel- 
lation "Aleut"  to  native  peoples  of  what  we  now 
know  as  the  Aleutian  Islands— peoples  who  spoke 
one  or  more  languages  that  are  now  called  (after 
the  Russian  innovation)  Aleut  (Fig.  2).  But  as  the 
Russians  moved  eastward  around  the  northem  edge 
of  the  Pacific,  they  applied  the  same  term,  Aleut, 
to  people  they  met  on  Kodiak  Island.  These  were 


a  people  who  spoke  a  language  entirely  unintelli- 
gible to  natives  of  the  Aleutian  Islands.  It  is  now 
recognized  as  the  southemmost  of  the  Yupik  lan- 
guages and  designated  Alutiiq  or  Sugpiaq,  and  the 
people  are  called  Koniag.  The  Russian  fur  hunters 
also  applied  the  designator  "Aleut"  to  the  Eskimo- 
speaking  peoples  they  began  to  meet  on  the  Alaska 
Peninsula  (shown  as  Peninsula  Eskimo  in  Fig.  2). 
This  practice  continued  until  they  had  crossed  the 
peninsula  to  the  Bering  Sea,  where  they  gave  sep- 
arate ethnic  designations  to  the  larger  ethnolin- 
guistic  groups,  such  as  Kusquqvagmiut  of  the  Kus- 
kokwim,  Kiatagmiut  of  the  upper  reaches  of  the 
Nushagak,  Wood,  and  Kvichak  rivers,  and 
"Aglegmiut"  of  the  Bristol  Bay  coast. 

Is  there,  then,  any  affinity  implied  among  those 
Eskimo-speaking  peoples  they  had  designated  as 
Aleuts— a  designation  applied  from  Kodiak  in  the 
south  to  people  of  the  Ugashik  River  and  of  the 
Sevemovsk  settlements  of  the  Naknek  drainage  in 
the  north? 

Certainly  the  native  people  of  the  Pacific  coast 
of  the  Alaska  Peninsula  were  related  to  those  of 
Kodiak.  As  one  traveler  in  the  first  decade  of  the 
19th  century  reported  of  people  of  the  peninsula's 
Kukak  Bay  (as  near  to  the  Sevemovsk  settlements 
as  was  Katmai),  "the  customs,  the  manners,  and 
in  a  great  degree  the  clothing  and  language  . . .  are 
the  same  as  those  of  the  people  of  Kodiak"  (Langs- 
dorff,  1814,  II,  p.  236).  And  in  census  and  vital 
statistics  documents  of  the  Russian  Orthodox 
church  (ARC,  1733-1938,  18 16-1 936),  the  people 
of  that  coast  were  as  often  as  not  referred  to  as 
"Kodiak  Aleuts."  With  regard  to  people  farther 
north  on  the  peninsula,  at  least  one  1 9th-century 
traveler  reported  a  dialectal  difference  between 
Sevemovsk  people  and  those  of  Katmai  (Spurr, 
1900,  pp.  92-93),  although  in  recent  decades  na- 
tive informants  in  Naknek  village  have  reported 
that  natives  of  the  Sevemovsk  villages  spoke  a 
language  essentially  identical  to  that  of  both  Ko- 
diak and  Ugashik  but  differing  in  significant  re- 
spects from  speech  current  around  Naknek  in  the 
earlier  years  of  this  century  (Dumond,  fieldnotes 
of  1974,  1985).  In  1961,  an  account  of  the  1912 
Katmai  emption  was  recorded  in  the  native  speech 
of  one  of  the  few  surviving  members  of  the  original 
Sevemovsk  migrants  to  the  lower  Naknek  River, 
a  woman  who  was  bom  in  a  Sevemovsk  settlement 
in  1 879  according  to  church  records  (ARC,  1816- 
1936,  Nushagak  mission).  This  account  has  been 
recognized  to  be  in  Alutiiq,  although  with  some 
Central  Yupik  elements  (Michael  Krauss,  personal 
communication  to  Dumond,  1979).  Thus  it  seems 


History  of  the  Region 


reasonable  to  conclude  that  the  people  of  both  the 
Sevemovsk  villages  and  Ugashik  (i.e.,  the  Penin- 
sula Eskimo  of  Fig.  2),  like  those  of  Kodiak  (the 
Koniag),  were  native  speakers  of  some  form  of 
Alutiiq.  It  also  seems  reasonable  to  conclude  that 
the  Russian  ethnic  designator  "Aleut,"  when  ap- 
plied to  Eskimo-speaking  peoples,  was  reserved 
for  speakers  of  that  same  language. 

Seen  in  this  way,  the  designation  of  the  upper 
Naknek  community  by  the  Russian  fur  hunters 
and  priests  as  "northerner  settlements"  makes 
considerable  sense.  The  Sevemovsk  people  were 
the  northernmost  of  the  "Aleuts"  or  Alutiiq  speak- 
ers, their  villages  located  directly  north  of  and  ac- 
cessible by  trail  from  the  Russian-controlled  hunt- 
ing station  of  Katmai  on  the  Pacific  coast.  As  Alu- 
tiiq-speaking  southerners,  however,  they  contrast- 
ed with  the  Central  Yupik  Aglurmiut  of  Paugvik, 
who  may  now  be  seen  to  have  occupied  a  beach- 
head in  enemy  territory  until  peace  was  imposed 
by  the  Russians. 


Russian  Explorations 

As  early  as  the  mid- 1 8th  century,  Russian  fur  trad- 
ers began  to  expand  into  areas  north  of  the  Gulf 
of  Alaska.  The  tip  and  the  southern  shore  of  the 
Alaska  Peninsula  were  to  some  extent  within  the 
Russian  sphere  of  influence  by  1 76 1 ,  possibly  even 
earlier.  In  1 799  the  Bristol  Bay-Iliamna  Lake  area 
was  controlled  by  the  Lebedev-Lastochkin  Com- 
pany, and  some  areas  of  Bristol  Bay  probably  were 
explored  during  the  last  two  decades  of  the  1 8th 
century  (Black,  1984,  p.  27). 

Early  in  the  19th  century,  as  the  number  of  fur- 
bearing  animals  declined  in  traditionally  exploited 
regions,  the  Russian-American  Company  focused 
its  attention  on  the  vast  area  of  southwestern  Alas- 
ka north  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula.  There,  they  be- 
lieved, new  profits  could  be  achieved  through  trade 
with  the  Eskimo  and  Indian  inhabitants  for  beaver 
pelts  and  other  furs.  The  company  dispatched  an 
expedition  in  April  1818  under  the  command  of 
Petr  Korsakovskiy  to  explore  part  of  the  Alaska 
Peninsula  and  the  coast  from  uppermost  Bristol 
Bay  to  the  mouth  of  the  Kuskokwim  River.  The 
party  crossed  the  peninsula  at  what  is  now  known 
as  Becharof  Lake  and  moved  down  its  outlet  stream 
to  Bristol  Bay.  In  August,  leaving  some  of  his  party 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Nushagak  River,  Korsakov- 
skiy led  a  detachment  eastward  to  lakes  Iliamna 
and  Clark.  On  Iliamna  Lake  he  met  Eremy  Ro- 


dionov,  a  local  trader,  who  offered  to  lead  a  small 
party  north  into  the  interior,  a  difficult  journey 
during  which  they  may  have  reached  the  Kusko- 
kwim River.  In  the  fall  Korsakovskiy  and  his  men 
returned  to  Kodiak  Island  by  way  of  Iliamna  Lake 
(VanStone,  ed.,  1988). 

In  the  summer  of  1819  Korsakovskiy  led  an- 
other exploring  party  to  Bristol  Bay.  The  party 
planned  to  explore  the  Kuskokwim  River,  but  for 
a  variety  of  reasons  was  not  successful.  The  1819 
expedition  did,  however,  establish  a  trading  post, 
Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt,  at  the  mouth  of  the 
Nushagak  River  at  what  would  become  the  site  of 
the  mission  and  settlement  of  Nushagak  (Fig.  1). 
Fedor  Kolmakov,  a  company  employee  who  had 
accompanied  Korsakovskiy  on  both  his  expedi- 
tions, was  placed  in  charge  (Fedorova,  1973a,  p. 
8;  1973b,  pp.  68-69).  The  two  expeditions  of  Kor- 
sakovskiy and  the  coastal  explorations  undertaken 
by  V.  S.  Khromchenko  and  A.  K.  Etolin  between 
1819  and  1822  (VanStone,  ed.,  1973)  provided 
the  Russian-American  Company  with  its  first  re- 
liable information  concerning  relations  among  na- 
tive groups  in  the  Bristol  Bay  region  and  the  extent 
to  which  they  would  be  inffuenced  by  the  estab- 
lishment of  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt  (Berkh, 
1823a,  pt.  2,  pp.  1-20,  1823b;  RAC/CS,  vol.  3, 
no.  164,  4  May  1823). 


The  Aglurmiut 

The  native  people  whom  Korsakovskiy  and  other 
explorers  encountered  on  the  upper  Alaska  Pen- 
insula and  in  Bristol  Bay  were  the  Central  Yupik- 
speaking  Aglurmiut  or  "Aglegmiut."  Korsakov- 
skiy brieffy  described  the  Aglurmiut  in  his  1818 
journal  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  pp.  29-31),  and  the 
first  published  account  of  subcultural  groups  in  the 
Bristol  Bay  region  was  derived  from  the  explorer's 
1819  journal  as  reported  by  Berkh  ( 1 823b).  In  this 
account  the  coastal  inhabitants  are  referred  to  as 
"Glakmiut"  and  are  said  to  have  been  constantly 
at  war  with  the  Kusquqvagmiut  of  the  Kuskokwim 
River.  V.  S.  Khromchenko,  during  his  coastal  ex- 
plorations of  southwestern  Alaska,  in  1822,  noted 
that  the  Aglurmiut  were  the  most  warlike  people 
along  the  coast  between  Bristol  Bay  and  Norton 
Sound.  His  account  included  a  brief  description 
of  their  culture  and  a  rather  extensive  vocabulary 
(VanStone,  ed.,  1973,  pp.  52-53).  Wrangell  (1970, 
p.  1 7),  Khlebnikov  (Lyapunova  &  Fedorova,  eds., 
1 979,  p.  77),  and  early  reports  of  the  general  man- 


Part  One 


.  ^     ^     y<    ;^    ^-     cv^Tl 


;0  100 

HHH       t^ ^  i!<»W. 

90  <oo 

"  " "  I  =J  wyArf 


Fig.  2.    Map  of  southwest  Alaska  showing  ethnic  group  distribution. 


agers  of  the  Russian-American  Company  (RAC/ 
CS,  vol.  3,  no.  164,  8  May  1823;  vol.  9,  no.  460, 
31  October  1832)  described  how  the  Aglurmiut 
were  displaced  by  warfare  from  the  Kuskokwim 
River,  some  moving  to  Nunivak  Island  and  others 
settling  in  Bristol  Bay. 

Kromchenko  was  apparently  the  first  explorer 
to  make  a  distinction  between  the  coastal  dwelling 
Aglurmiut  and  the  Kiatagmiut,  who  at  the  time 
of  contact  inhabited  the  banks  of  the  Nushagak 
and  Wood  rivers  (VanStone,  ed.,  1 973,  p.  3 1).  The 
Kiatagmiut,  having  recently  moved  from  the  up- 
per Kuskokwim  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  pp.  94,  105), 
were,  like  their  lower  Kuskokwim  River  relatives 
and  presumably  like  the  "Aleuts"  of  the  Alaska 
Peninsula,  at  war  with  the  Aglurmiut.  The  exis- 
tence of  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt  and  the  efforts 
of  Fedor  Kolmakov  were  instrumental  in  stabiliz- 
ing relations  between  the  Aglurmiut  and  their  new 
neighbors,  thus  permitting  the  former  to  hunt  in- 
land for  caribou  without  fear  of  attack.  Although 
the  Aglurmiut  were  experienced  warriors,  constant 
battles  with  these  neighbors  had  greatly  reduced 
their  numbers,  and  they  found  a  refuge  with  Kol- 


makov at  the  trading  post  (Berkh,  1823b,  p.  47; 
VanStone,  ed.,  1973,  p.  52).  Under  these  circum- 
stances, by  1832  the  Aglurmiut  were  already  be- 
coming accustomed  to  the  Russians,  were  learning 
the  Russian  language,  and  were  believed  to  be  as 
useful  to  the  company  as  the  Kodiak  "Aleuts" 
(RAC/CS,  vol.  9,  no.  460,  folios  345-351,  31  Oc- 
tober 1832;  RAC/CR,  vol.  9,  no.  284,  folios  11, 
12,  30  March  1834). 

The  Aglurmiut  population  around  Aleksan- 
drovskiy Redoubt  in  1 8 1 8  was  about  60,  a  number 
that  grew  to  approximately  500  by  1 832,  including 
those  living  at  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River.  In 
1838  and  1839  a  smallpox  epidemic  decimated 
the  population  of  southwestern  Alaska  and,  in  spite 
of  vaccinations  administered  in  February  1838, 
killed  a  reported  522  people  in  Aglurmiut  settle- 
ments near  the  redoubt,  leaving  only  35 1  survivors 
(Sarafian,  1970,  p.  226;  Wrangell,  1970,  p.  14). 
Some  of  the  earlier  population  numbers  may  have 
been  grossly  underestimated,  however,  as  sug- 
gested by  company  reports  of  1847  giving  the 
number  of  Aglurmiut  as  variously  from  850  to 
1,000  (Fedorova,  1973a,  pp.  164-165). 


History  of  the  Region 


,  'Hi  /.\  in/i  &/ 

./^HIKi'   111    II  •  hi  hll     •NtlhHi'lii       ,-l.l   ■  '  I'l.  Itlfl  .1 1  l.\'.ll  'I  III 


Fig.  3.  Takhuty  natives  of  the  Naknek  River  region.  Watercolor  by  Pavel  Mikhailov,  1828,  State  Historical 
Museum  of  Estonia  (Tallinn);  photo  by  L.  A.  Shur.  Reproduced  through  the  courtesy  of  Richard  A.  Pierce,  with 
permission  of  Alaska  Northwest  Publishing  Co. 


Russian  Explorers  at  Paugvik 

The  primary  Aglurmiut  village  on  the  Alaska  Pen- 
insula was  Paugvik  on  the  right  (north)  bank  of 
the  Naknek  River  just  above  its  mouth.  It  was 
visited  by  Korsakovskiy  in  1818  and  appears  on 
I,  Ya.  Vasilev's  map  of  his  explorations  in  south- 
west Alaska  of  1829  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  p.  76). 
The  earliest  known  depictions  of  Naknek  River 
people  date  from  1828  (Fig.  3). 

Korsakovskiy  was  almost  certainly  not  the  first 
Russian  to  visit  Paugvik,  however.  In  1791  Dmi- 
try Bocharov  crossed  the  Alaska  Peninsula  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  lake  that  now  (in  slightly  modified 
form)  bears  his  name,  and  he  may  have  visited 
the  settlement  (Efimov,  1 964,  map  1 80).  Further- 
more, it  is  apparent  from  Korsakovskiy's  1818 
journal  that  at  the  time  of  his  visit,  natives  of  the 
Naknek  River  region  had  been  in  contact  with 
Russian  traders  for  some  time.  Sevemovsk  toyons 


(i.e.,  men  recognized  by  the  Russians  as  com- 
munity leaders)  were  mentioned  as  present  on  Ko- 
diak  at  the  time  of  his  departure,  and  on  his  arrival 
at  the  Shelikof  Strait  hunting  station  of  Katmai  an 
"Aglegmiut"  girl  was  referred  to  (VanStone,  ed., 
1 988,  p.  1 8).  In  describing  his  departure  from  Kat- 
mai on  1 9  May  (OS),  the  explorer  mentioned  that 
his  party  was  accompanied  by  "an  Indian  [Sev- 
emovsk?] toyon  who  acted  as  Kolmakov's  guide 
to  the  Aglegmiut  Indian  settlement  [probably 
Paugvik]  and  was  used  to  taking  fur  goods  to  Kat- 
mai." This  native  was  said  to  have  worked  for  the 
company  for  many  years  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  p. 
22).  Korsakovskiy's  comment  may  be  taken  to 
suggest  that  at  that  time,  Paugvik  maintained  re- 
lations with  the  Russian-American  Company 
through  the  fur  hunting  and  fishing  artel  at  Katmai 
on  the  southern  shore  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula,  but 
possibly  not  with  Sevemovsk  people  as  interme- 
diaries, for  Korsakovskiy's  party  was  led  not  over 


Part  One 


Katmai  Pass  and  the  route  along  the  Naknek  Riv- 
er, but  rather  across  the  more  southerly  Becharov 
Lake  and  down  its  outlet  stream  to  Bristol  Bay. 

On  2  June  1818,  Korsakovskiy's  party  entered 
the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River: 

At  the  mouth,  on  the  left  bank  there  was  an  Aglegmiut 
settlement.  At  once  our  toyon  with  an  interpreter  went 
ashore,  then  all  our  baydarkas  and,  on  command,  we 
saluted  by  firing  blank  cartridges  from  our  pistols.  The 
local  Indians  greeted  us  joyfully  and  thanked  us  for  pay- 
ing them  a  visit.  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  p.  28) 

Paugvik  is  on  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  and  al- 
though there  was  a  village  directly  opposite  on  the 
left  bank,  designated  "Kougumik"  on  Vasilev's 
map  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  p.  76),  it  seems  clear 
that  Korsakovskiy  was  referring  to  the  bank  that 
was  on  his  left  hand  as  he  entered  the  river  mouth. 
The  following  day  Paugvik  natives  brought  Kor- 
sakovskiy's party  food  and  received  in  return 
"Chinese  pearls,  seed  beads,  and  large  beads." 
Three  local  men  promised  to  accompany  the  ex- 
pedition and  were  given  clothing  and  beads.  A 
dance  was  held  on  5  June,  with  at  least  400  natives 
present  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  p.  28),  a  number 
that  may  have  included  visitors  from  other  vil- 
lages. In  any  event,  the  earliest  population  figures 
for  Paugvik  are  Russian  Church  confessional  reg- 
isters that  list  1 59  inhabitants  in  1 850  (ARC,  1 733- 
1938,  Nushagak  confessional  registers,  1850),  but 
comparison  with  registers  of  later  years  makes  it 
clear  that  this  is  less  than  the  total  population, 
which  one  projection  would  estimate  at  twice  that 
number  or  more,  for  the  early  19th  century  (Du- 
mond,  1986,  Tables  5,  26). 


Paugvik  and  the  Fur  Trade 

Despite  the  establishment  of  Aleksandrovskiy  Re- 
doubt in  1819,  the  Paugvik  natives  may  have  con- 
tinued to  trade  their  furs  at  Katmai  and  may  have 
done  so  as  late  as  1832  (RAC/CS,  vol.  9,  no.  460, 
folios  345-351,  31  October  1832).  Not  until  1851 
was  there  a  documented  relationship  between  the 
settlement  and  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt.  In  that 
year  the  general  manager  of  the  company,  M.  D. 
Tebenkov,  in  a  communication  to  the  Kodiak  of- 
fice noted  with  apparent  disgust  that  the  Aglurmiut 
were  complaining  about  the  prices  paid  for  furs. 
He  also  commented  on  their  failure  to  provide 
men  for  service  to  the  company  baydarshchik  at 
Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt,  which  had  by  then  been 


reduced  to  an  odinochka,  a  post  under  a  single 
Russian  or  Creole  official.  Tebenkov  threatened 
to  "drive  away  all  the  Aglegmiuts  from  Naknek 
[River]  and  from  the  mouth  of  this  river,  namely 
from  Pagvyk,  to  their  old  places  of  habitation  in 
the  neighborhood  of  the  Kuskokvims"  (RAC/CS, 
vol.  32,  no.  278,  folios  132,  133,  20  April  1851). 

Although  specific  information  on  the  fur  trade 
at  Paugvik  is  lacking,  the  records  of  the  Russian- 
American  Company  contain  some  information 
concerning  the  methods  by  which  the  manager  at 
Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt  dealt  with  natives  of  the 
surrounding  areas  for  furs.  When  new  contacts  were 
made  with  villages  like  Paugvik,  the  manager  at- 
tempted to  determine  the  toyons.  These  individ- 
uals were  given  silver  medals  called  "United  Rus- 
sia," with  the  Tsar's  picture  on  one  side,  a  certif- 
icate designating  the  leader  as  a  person  of  authority 
recognized  by  the  company,  and  occasional  incen- 
tive gifts.  The  post  manager  was  warned  against 
handing  out  medals  indiscriminately,  was  charged 
with  keeping  a  careful  account  of  those  medals  he 
did  distribute,  and  was  encouraged  to  retrieve  them 
from  the  families  of  toyons  who  died,  so  that  they 
might  be  awarded  to  others.  The  toyons  were  sup- 
posed to  be  individuals  who  were  respected  by 
their  fellow  villagers  and  whose  friendly  relations 
with  the  Russians  would  benefit  the  company.  A 
toyon  encouraged  his  fellow  villagers  to  hunt  and 
bring  their  furs  to  the  redoubt.  Probably  the  toyons 
never  had  as  much  authority  in  their  communities 
as  the  company's  officials  believed,  but  in  one  way 
or  another  a  faithful  toyon  could  often  encourage 
hunters  in  his  village  to  expend  more  energy  in 
the  company's  behalf  than  they  might  otherwise 
have  been  inclined  to  do  (RAC/CS,  vol.  8,  no. 
322,  folio  247,  23  May  1831;  vol.  9,  no.  460,  folio 
350,  3  October  1832;  vol.  16,  no.  467,  folios  178, 
179,  31  October  1838;  vol.  17,  nos.  387,  388,  fo- 
lios 370-372,  4  June  1839). 

Although  this  was  the  traditional  manner  of 
dealing  for  furs  with  inhabitants  of  Bristol  Bay  and 
adjacent  regions,  the  Russians  also  sent  out  hunt- 
ing parties.  In  the  summer  of  1839,  for  example, 
a  party  of  Eskimos  was  sent  from  Aleksandrovskiy 
Redoubt  to  hunt  for  beavers.  The  hunters  were 
paid  a  specific  wage,  and  all  furs  taken  belonged 
to  the  company.  This  particular  hunt  was  highly 
successful,  and  the  natives  seemed  to  approve  of 
the  arrangement  (RAC/CS,  vol.  1 8,  no.  335,  folios 
314-317,  25  May  1840). 

The  most  popular  trade  goods  of  the  period  were 
tobacco,  various  kinds  of  dry  goods,  and  beads  of 
various  sizes  and  colors.  Other  goods  bartered  by 


History  of  the  Region 


the  Russians  in  western  Alaska  and  likely  to  have 
been  included  in  the  trading  inventories  at  Alek- 
sandrovskiy  Redoubt  at  one  time  or  another  were 
knives,  iron  spears,  steel  for  striking  a  fire,  needles, 
combs,  pipes,  cooking  pots,  large  cups,  mirrors, 
copper  rings,  earrings,  bracelets  of  copper  and  iron, 
leather  pouches,  pestles  and  mortars,  small  bells, 
navy  buttons,  flannel  blankets,  objects  referred  to 
as  "Aleutian  axes,"  and  items  of  European  cloth- 
ing (Zagoskin,  1967,  pp.  161-162). 

Although  not  explicitly  stated  in  the  sources,  it 
is  likely  that  the  Aglurmiut  of  Paugvik,  like  natives 
elsewhere  in  Alaska,  were  encouraged  to  become 
indebted  to  the  company  to  ensure  that  they  would 
have  to  trade  with  or  work  for  the  local  post.  The 
more  closely  natives  were  bound  to  the  company 
and  the  more  heavily  they  relied  on  the  trader  for 
supplies  and  items  of  European  manufacture,  the 
less  likely  they  were  to  pursue  traditional  subsis- 
tence activities  to  the  exclusion  of  trapping.  Cer- 
tainly many  traditional  hunting  techniques  began 
to  be  forgotten  at  this  time.  The  company  assumed 
a  paternal  role,  controlling  goods  that  the  natives 
could  obtain  and  carefully  regulating  how  much 
they  were  to  receive.  Aside  from  these  generalities, 
however,  no  details  are  known  of  the  mechanics 
of  the  fur  trade  at  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt,  such 
as  relations  between  traders  and  natives,  formal- 
ities of  trading  procedures,  inventories  of  trade 
goods,  or  relative  values  of  furs  and  trade  goods. 

In  1840,  A.  K.  Etolin,  the  general  manager  of 
the  Russian-American  Company,  proposed  to  re- 
duce the  company's  expenditures  by  consolidating 
a  number  of  the  most  remote  posts.  Aleksandrov- 
skiy Redoubt  would  be  reduced  to  an  odinochka, 
under  a  single  baydarshchik  and  two  or  three 
"Aleut"  assistants.  These  men  would  be  subor- 
dinated to  Nikolaevskiy  Redoubt  on  Cook  Inlet 
from  where  they  would  be  supplied  with  food  and 
trade  goods  by  way  of  a  small  post  on  Iliamna 
Lake  (RAC/CS,  vol.  23,  no.  703,  folio  554,  23 
December  1844;  DRHA,  1936-1938,  vol.  1,  pp. 
365-366).  Although  this  new  arrangement  must 
have  affected  the  trade  at  Paugvik,  the  precise  na- 
ture of  these  effects  unfortunately  cannot  be  de- 
termined. 

After  an  initial  short  period  of  importance  as 
the  only  company  post  north  of  the  Alaska  Pen- 
insula, Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt  lapsed  into  rel- 
ative obscurity  with  the  emergence  of  other  posts 
and  the  establishment  of  better  lines  of  commu- 
nication throughout  southwest  Alaska.  The  stra- 
tegic location  of  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt  and  the 
efforts  of  Fedor  Kolmakov  brought  about,  within 


a  period  of  little  more  than  20  years,  extensive 
exposure  of  the  natives  of  southwestern  Alaska  to 
the  fur  trade.  Acculturation  was  most  rapid  among 
the  Aglurmiut  who  lived  closest  to  the  post,  in- 
cluding the  inhabitants  of  Paugvik. 


The  Russian  Orthodox  Church 

During  the  10  years  following  the  establishment 
of  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt,  there  is  evidence  that 
Fedor  Kolmakov  baptized  a  small  number  of  na- 
tives, probably  Aglurmiut,  who  were  employees 
of  the  Russian-American  Company  (Barsukov, 
1886-1888,  vol.  2,  p.  36).  In  the  spring  of  1829 
Bishop  Ivan  Veniaminov  arrived  at  the  redoubt 
to  visit  the  few  Christians  living  there.  When  he 
made  a  second  visit  three  years  later  he  learned 
that  Kolmakov  had  baptized  70  Eskimos  from  -^' 
several  villages.  A  small  chapel  was  constructed 
at  the  post  in  the  same  year  (Barsukov,  1886- 
1888,  vol.  2,  pp.  37^8). 

The  first  reference  to  the  Naknek  region  in  sur- 
viving church  records  appears  to  be  in  1841,  when 
the  Kodiak  mission  recorded  in  their  vital  statis- 
tics notations  a  visit  to  the  peninsula  in  which  57  -, 
people  were  baptized  at  Katmai  and  an  additional 
46  (24  males  and  2 1  females,  ages  1-67)  were  bap- 
tized in  the  Sevemovsk  settlements  (ARC,  1816- 
1936,  Kodiak,  1841);  there  is  no  indication  that 
the  trip  extended  to  Paugvik,  however.  In  1842 
the  first  missionary  was  assigned  to  the  Nushagak 
mission  (RAC/CS,  vol.  21,  nos.  28-30,  folios  24- 
27,  1 1  February  1842;  no.  249,  folios  183,  184,  9 
May  1842;  DRHA,  1936-1938,  vol.  1,  pp.  385- 
386).  At  that  time.  Christians  at  the  redoubt  num- 
bered about  200,  and  during  the  next  three  years 
as  many  as  400  additional  natives  were  baptized. 
The  priest  began  making  trips  into  the  interior  and 
perhaps  to  Paugvik.  Apparently  the  Nushagak 
mission  district  included  Paugvik  from  the  mis- 
sion's founding,  but  it  was  three  years  later,  in 
1 844,  that  the  Sevemovsk  settlements  and  those  . 
of  Ugashik  were  transferred  to  that  mission  from 
Kodiak  (ARC,  1733-1938,  Nushagak,  Bishop  of 
Kamchatka  to  Missionary  of  Nushagak  Church, 
1 4  July  1 844).  Thereafter  vital  statistics  and  reg- 
isters of  communicants  began  to  be  maintained  at 
Nushagak  for  both  Paugvik  and  the  Sevemovsk 
settlements,  although  whether  these  were  uniform- 
ly the  results  of  annual  visits  of  the  priest  or  wheth- 
er they  involved  visits  of  the  Naknek  people  to 
Nushagak  is  not  known. 


Part  One 


In  the  1840s,  when  Aleksandrovskiy  Redoubt 
was  reduced  to  an  odinochka  and  subordinated  to 
Nikolaevskiy  Redoubt  on  Cook  Inlet,  manager 
Etolin  wanted  the  priest  at  Nikolaevskiy  to  take 
charge  of  the  church  at  Nushagak.  When  Bishop 
Veniaminov  received  this  information  he  imme- 
diately instructed  the  missionary  at  Nikolaevskiy 
to  make  a  trip  to  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River 
"to  learn  in  detail  all  local  conditions  regarding 
communications  with  Nushagak"  (DRHA,  1936- 
1938,  vol.  1,  pp.  364-366).  This  instruction  sug- 
gests that  the  Bishop  was  concerned  particularly 
about  the  Christians  at  Paugvik  and  whether  they 
could  be  served  adequately  when  the  missionary 
was  withdrawn  from  Nushagak.  The  church  au- 
thorities, however,  in  spite  of  suggestions  of  Etolin 
for  consolidating  mission  activity  in  the  region, 
decided  after  a  brief  interval  to  maintain  a  priest 
at  the  Nushagak  mission. 

By  1848  there  were  1,080  parishioners  in  the 
Nushagak  region  and  the  Aglurmiut  were  consid- 
ered to  be  the  most  faithful,  sometimes  traveling 
great  distances  to  attend  services  (RAC/CS,  vol. 
34,  no.  382,  folio  130,  6  June  1853;  Barsukov, 
1 897-1 90 1 ,  vol.  1 ,  p.  407).  By  1 864  all  the  natives 
in  the  villages  that  the  Nushagak  missionary  was 
able  to  visit  were  said  to  have  been  baptized 
(DRHA,  1936-1938,  vol.  1,  p.  149).  On  1  July 
1865,  the  priest  visited  Paugvik  (DRHA,  1936- 
1938,  vol.  1,  p.  149),  the  first  clearly  documented 
visit  of  a  churchman  to  the  settlement,  but  from 
the  regularity  with  which  confessional  registers  for 
that  settlement  were  maintained  after  1850,  it 
seems  evident  that  such  visits  had  taken  place  in 
the  past,  even  though  a  chapel  was  not  constructed 
until  the  1870s  (ARC,  1733-1938,  Nushagak, 
Church/Clergy  Registers,  Sts.  Peter  and  Paul 
Church,  and  Confessional  Lists). 


Paugvik  in  the  American  Period 

In  1 867,  following  purchase  of  Alaska  by  the  Unit- 
ed States,  the  San  Francisco  firm  of  Hutchison, 
Kohl  and  Company  purchased  the  assets  of  the 
Russian-American  Company.  This  firm,  which 
operated  the  Nushagak  post  under  its  original  name 
for  one  or  possibly  two  years,  was  soon  reorgan- 
ized to  form  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company. 
Like  other  American  firms,  it  was  not  as  generous 
with  credit  as  its  predecessor.  On  Kodiak  Island, 
for  example,  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company 
and  other  traders,  after  following  a  credit  policy 


similar  to  that  of  the  Russian-American  Compa- 
ny, suddenly  shifted  to  an  exchange  business  and 
attempted  to  collect  outstanding  debts  (DRHA, 
1 936-1 938,  vol.  2,  pp.  1 86-1 87).  Their  native  cus- 
tomers thus  found  themselves  billed  for  accounts 
that  they  could  not  possibly  pay  for  years.  Because 
the  Alaska  Commercial  Company  never  had  any 
serious  competition  in  the  Nushagak  River  region, 
they  probably  also  abandoned  the  paternalistic 
policies  of  the  Russian-American  Company  in  that 
region  and  refused  to  allow  their  patrons  to  run 
up  large  debts.  Whatever  the  effect  of  this  on  the 
people  at  Paugvik  and  other  Nushagak-region  vil- 
lages, the  Alaska  Commercial  Company  post  at 
Nushagak  maintained  a  moderately  flourishing 
trade  at  least  through  the  remainder  of  the  1 9th 
century.  At  various  times  between  1 880  and  1 890, 
the  post  maintained  outposts  at  Ugashik  and  To- 
giak,  and  there  could  well  have  been  one  at  Paug- 
vik. 

Charles  Bryant,  who  visited  Nushagak  in  1868, 
noted  that  beaver  was  the  principal  fur  and  that 
more  than  2,000  skins  were  taken  in  by  the  post 
annually  (Bryant  &  Mclntyre,  1 869,  p.  36).  During 
the  1 870s  beaver,  muskrat,  land  otter,  and  red  fox 
seem  to  have  been  the  most  important  fur-bearing 
animals  in  the  Nushagak  region.  There  was  also  a 
small  trade  in  swansdown,  and  caribou  skins  were 
dried  and  traded  (Elliott,  1875,  p.  40).  Muskrats 
seem  to  have  been  taken  in  increasing  numbers 
even  though  their  value  was  low,  and  the  traders 
were  compelled  to  accept  these  pelts  in  order  to 
be  able  to  buy  more  valuable  furs  (Elliott,  1886, 
p.  399). 

A  commercial  development  in  Bristol  Bay  that 
had  a  greater  and  more  lasting  effect  on  the  natives 
of  the  region  than  the  fur  trade  was  the  salmon 
fishing  industry.  All  five  species  of  Pacific  salmon 
make  spawning  runs  into  the  rivers  of  Bristol  Bay, 
and  of  them  red  or  sockeye  salmon,  which  spawn 
only  in  systems  with  freshwater  lakes,  are  the  most 
important  species  commercially.  Most  of  the  riv- 
ers flowing  into  Bristol  Bay  have  numerous  lakes 
at  their  headwaters. 

The  earliest  commercial  fishing  in  the  Bay  was 
carried  out  by  the  Alaska  Commercial  Company, 
and  the  first  cannery  was  established  at  Nushagak 
in  1883  by  the  Arctic  Packing  Company.  By  1903 
there  were  10  canneries  in  Nushagak  Bay  alone 
(VanStone,  1 967,  pp.  67-72).  In  the  Naknek  River 
region  commercial  fishing  began  in  1890,  when 
salteries  were  established  a  short  distance  above 
the  river's  mouth,  on  the  left  bank  by  the  Arctic 
Packing  Company  and  on  the  right,  about  2  km 


History  of  the  Region 


AlbatroBS  -Alaska-lOOO 

Bristol  Bay  Dist . 


uAt-iLLoi/  /Crc^'.L^yi 


Fig.  4. 
Archives. 


Native  houses  near  Naknek,  1 900.  U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service  photo  no.  22-FFA-2546,  U.S.  National 


above  Paugvik,  by  L.  A.  Pederson.  In  1893  the 
Arctic  Packing  Company  saltery  was  sold  to  the 
Alaska  Packers  Association,  and  the  following  year 
a  cannery  was  constructed  at  the  same  location. 
In  1893  the  Naknek  Packing  Company  absorbed 
the  Pederson  saltery  and  erected  a  cannery  near  it 
(Moser,  1902,  pp.  209-21 1). 

From  the  beginning,  operators  of  salmon  can- 
neries in  Bristol  Bay  made  little  effort  to  utilize 
the  local  labor  supply.  Most  of  the  actual  fishing 
was  by  Euro-Americans  who  came  to  Alaska  for 
the  fishing  season  and  returned  home  when  the 
runs  were  over  and  the  canneries  had  completed 
their  packs.  The  actual  canning  was  done  by  im- 
ported Chinese  laborers,  with  supervisory  posi- 
tions held  by  Euro- Americans.  As  late  as  1891 
only  an  occasional  native  was  employed  by  the 
canneries,  the  Chinese  being  considered  more  re- 
liable and  methodical  (VanStone,  1967,  p.  73). 


In  1 900  the  cannery  of  the  Alaska  Packers  As- 
sociation on  the  Naknek  River  employed  58  Euro- 
American  fishermen  and  54  Euro-American  can- 
nery workers,  trap  and  beach  men,  and  salters;  20 
employees  were  local  natives  and  140  were  Chi- 
nese. In  the  same  year  the  Naknek  Packing  Com- 
pany across  the  river  employed  60  Euro- American 
fishermen  and  beach  hands,  while  1 2  Euro-Amer- 
icans, 1 1  natives,  and  1 3 1  Chinese  worked  in  the 
cannery  (Moser,  1902,  pp.  210-211).  Although 
relatively  few  native  people  were  actually  em- 
ployed, the  canneries  attracted  large  numbers  of 
them  during  the  fishing  season.  Board  was  sup- 
plied to  all  natives  employed,  and  this  they  cer- 
tainly shared  with  their  unemployed  relatives. 
Some  of  them  also  found  it  easier  to  harvest  the 
waste  of  the  canneries  than  to  make  their  own  fish 
traps.  Missionaries  and  some  government  em- 
ployees deplored  the  influence  of  the  canneries  on 


10 


Part  One 


Albatross  -  Alaska-1000 
Bristol  B»y  Di»t  • 


'^j 


■^,. ,;  .„../^  ^^-  ..ri  itjij-iFiiuiiiTTi^"'  '"^-^  ■ 


Fig.  5.     Native  houses  and  fish-drying  racks  near  South  Naknek,  1900.  U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service  photo  no. 
22-FFA-2542,  U.S.  National  Archives. 


the  natives,  particularly  the  drinking  and  gambling 
that  were  characteristic  of  the  Chinese  laborers 
(VanStone,  1967,  pp.  73-77). 

Since  the  cannery  of  the  Naknek  Packing  Com- 
pany was  only  a  short  distance  upstream  from 
Paugvik,  it  is  certain  to  have  had  some  effect  on 
the  choice  of  locations  for  villagers'  houses.  Native 
houses  were  certainly  present  on  the  hill  west  of 
the  cannery  in  1 900  when  photographs  were  taken 
by  U.S.  Fish  Commission  employees  (Fig.  4).  Here, 
as  across  the  river  near  the  Alaska  Packers  As- 
sociation cannery,  native  settlements  previously 
located  downstream  would  have  begun  to  coalesce 
around  the  new  industrial  establishments  (Figs.  5, 
6),  creating  a  permanent  change  in  local  patterns 
of  settlement.  As  indicated  in  Part  5,  however, 
there  is  evidence  that  the  shift  upstream  in  fact 
predated  the  establishment  of  any  commercial  fish 
processing  station. 

Following  the  sale  of  Alaska,  the  Russian  Or- 


thodox Church  had  acted  immediately  to  reduce 
the  number  of  its  clergymen  in  the  new  American 
territory,  a  move  prompted  by  fear  that  the  mis- 
sions could  not  be  effectively  supplied  after  the 
local  demise  of  the  Russian-American  Company. 
In  1868  the  priest  at  Nushagak  was  withdrawn, 
and  the  mission  was  left  in  the  care  of  a  lay  reader 
(DRHA,  1936-1938,  vol.  1,  pp.  153-251).  But 
within  1 0  years  a  priest  had  been  reassigned  (RAC/ 
CS,  vol.  42,  no.  445,  foHo  166,  19  September  1860), 
and  during  the  priestless  interval  church  mem- 
bership in  the  Bristol  Bay  region  continued  to  in- 
crease. By  1878-1879  communicants  appear  to 
have  numbered  nearly  2,400,  making  Nushagak 
the  second  largest  of  the  nine  missions  in  the  Alas- 
ka diocese  (DRHA,  1936-1938,  vol.  1,  p.  116). 
But  in  1 884  the  Moravian  Church  entered  the  mis- 
sion field  in  southwestern  Alaska  and  three  years 
later  established  a  school  and  mission,  called  Car- 
mel,  a  few  miles  above  the  Nushagak  Orthodox 


History  of  the  Region        1 1 


AlbatroBT  -Alapka-lOOO 
Bristol  Bay  Diet  . 


t  '  - 


^^i-^. 


Fig.  6.    Native  house  and  cache  near  South  Naknek,  1900.  U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service  photo  no.  22-FPA- 
2543,  U.S.  National  Archives. 


mission.  The  era  when  the  Russian  Orthodox 
Church  had  a  clear  field  in  Alaska  had  come  to  an 
end  (VanStone,  1967,  pp.  37^8). 

During  the  last  decades  of  the  19th  century,  the 
Russian  Orthodox  priest  at  Nushagak  continued 
to  visit  the  settlements  under  his  jurisdiction,  in- 
cluding those  of  the  Naknek  region.  In  1876  the 
first  chapel  was  under  construction  at  Paugvik 
(ARC,  1733-1938,  Nushagak,  Church/Clergy 
Registers,  Sts.  Peter  and  Paul  Church,  1876).  In 
January  1883,  there  is  a  record  of  a  five-day  visit 
to  Paugvik  for  "preaching  and  officiating"  (DRHA, 
1936-1938,  vol.  2,  pp.  144-145). 

It  appears  impossible  to  determine  with  abso- 
lute certainty  the  date  of  abandonment  of  Paugvik. 
Withdrawal  of  the  population  probably  was  the 
result  of  a  gradual  shift  upstream,  toward  the  lo- 
cation of  present  Naknek  and  the  first  canneries, 
although  this  shift  must  have  predated  the  estab- 
lishment of  salteries  or  canneries.  H.  W.  Elliott 


(1886,  p.  400),  writing  on  the  basis  of  a  visit  in 
the  early  1870s,  noted  that 

[a]n  old  deserted  settlement— ruins  of  Paugwik— marked 
by  the  outlines  of  its  cemetery,  still  is  visible  at  the  de- 
bouchure of  the  Nakneck.  With  a  strange  disrespect  for 
the  departed,  those  natives  who  live  at  an  adjoining  vil- 
lage come  over  here  to  excavate  salmon-holes  in  the 
ancient  graveyard,  so  that  a  process  of  moist  rotting  shall 
take  place  prior  to  eating  them. 

Elliott  may  well  have  been  describing  two  parts  of 
Paugvik,  one  of  which  was  no  longer  occupied 
even  in  the  early  1870s.  Although  evidence  for 
two  separate  parts  of  the  village  known  as  Paugvik 
is  not  as  direct  as  might  be  wished,  such  a  situation 
seems  to  accord  well  with  known  facts. 

On  the  one  hand,  a  village  of  Paugvik  (or  of 
some  recognizable  variation  of  that  name)  was 
recorded  in  the  10th  U.S.  census  of  1880  (said  to 
include  two  settlements  but  possibly  meaning  on 


12 


Part  One 


different  sides  of  the  river)  with  a  total  population 
of  192  (Petrolf,  1884,  p.  17);  in  the  1 1th  census  of 
1890  as  a  single  village  entry,  population  93,  in- 
cluding one  white  male  (Porter,  1893,  p.  5);  in  the 
12th  census  of  1900  as  population  94,  including 
two  Norwegian  males  (U.S.  Census,  1 900);  and  in 
the  13th  census  of  1910  as  population  74,  includ- 
ing one  Norwegian  male  (U.S.  Census,  1910).  On 
this  basis,  Paugvik  would  seem  to  have  existed  at 
least  until  1910. 

On  the  other  hand,  when  the  archaeologist  Helge 
Larsen  was  conducting  a  reconnaissance  in  south- 
western Alaska  in  the  summer  of  1 948  and  stopped 
in  Naknek,  he  reportedly  was  told  by  the  local 
postmaster,  who  said  he  had  lived  in  the  village 


since  1895,  that  the  site  Larsen— and  later  we— 
excavated  had  been  abandoned  20  years  before  his 
own  arrival  in  Naknek  (Larsen,  1950,  pp.  177- 
178).  Furthermore,  the  very  postmaster  from 
whom  that  statement  is  reported  is  listed  in  the 
1910  census  enumeration  sheets  as  living  in  Paug- 
vik (U.S.  Census,  1910,  "Bugorwik"  sheets,  family 
entry  79). 

Considering  all  these  circumstances,  it  seems 
not  only  possible  but  likely  that  the  Paugvik  of  the 
U.S.  census  enumerators,  at  least  of  the  later  ones, 
was  not  the  19th-century  Paugvik  in  which  our 
excavations  were  focused.  This  interpretation  is 
entirely  in  accord  with  some  of  the  results  of  those 
excavations. 


History  of  the  Region        13 


History  of  Archaeological  Research 


Work  Before  1985 

The  Paugvik  site  was  first  examined  from  an  an- 
thropological viewpoint  in  1931,  when  Ales 
Hrdlicka  of  the  Smithsonian  Institution  exhumed 
a  number  of  skeletons  in  the  vicinity.  His  pho- 
tographs of  the  site  show  it  to  be  without  any 
identifiable  structures,  covered  with  grass  like  that 
to  be  seen  today,  but  flanked  by  a  single  large  pond 
where  there  are  now  two  smaller  ones  (Hrdlicka, 
1943,  Fig.  224;  see  present  Figs.  7,  8).  He  reported 
that  the  bluff"  on  which  the  site  was  situated  was 
subject  to  active  tidal  erosion.  He  also  noted  the 
presence  of  burials  on  two  small  ridges  behind  the 
site  (Hrdlicka,  1943,  p.  351).  Hrdlicka  recovered 
undecorated  pottery  and  large  quantities  of  clam 
and  mussel  shells  but  noted  that  worked  stone  was 
rare.  He  excavated  a  number  of  graves  and  ob- 
served that  the  site  covered  at  least  two  acres, 
having  been  once  much  larger.  Indeed,  he  indi- 
cated belief  that  "on  the  whole  the  Russian  influ- 
ence appears  to  have  been  late  and  superficial,  [for] 
the  settlement  has  plainly  existed  from  long  be- 
fore" (Hrdlicka,  1943,  pp.  386-388).  Although  he 
apparently  left  no  record  of  the  exact  location  of 
his  excavations,  his  catalog  of  crania  in  the  U.S. 
National  Museum  lists  seven  males  and  eight  fe- 
males from  Paugvik,  or  Pawik,  in  his  rendering 
(Hrdlicka,  1944,  pp.  30-33). 

In  1 948  the  site  was  visited  for  a  few  days  by 
the  Danish  archaeologist  Helge  Larsen,  who  re- 
ported briefly  on  his  limited  excavations  in  the 
site  he  referred  to  as  Pavik  (Larsen,  1 950).  In  1 96 1 
Paugvik  was  tested  by  a  party  from  the  University 
of  Oregon  that  mapped  the  major  habitation  por- 
tion of  the  site  (the  map  was  reproduced  with  mod- 
ifications by  Dumond,  1981,  Fig.  4.2).  The  exca- 
vations of  that  year  were  limited  to  a  1  x  lO-m 


trench  no  more  than  1  m  in  depth,  where  it  en- 
countered sterile  clay  and  silt  of  the  glacial  out- 
wash  that  underlies  the  entire  low-lying  region  along 
Bristol  Bay.  Results  were  reported  at  the  time  in 
abbreviated  narratives  (Dumond,  1962a,  pp.  70- 
71;  1962b,  p.  17)  but  were  incorporated  in  later 
more  complete  descriptions  (Dumond,  198 1).  Us- 
ing the  terminology  employed  by  Larsen  (1950) 
the  historic-period  archaeological  component  was 
in  1961  formally  designated  the  Pavik  phase  of 
local  culture,  and  this  designation  will  continue  to 
be  used  for  the  defined  archaeological  phase,  al- 
though the  name  of  the  site  itself  is  given  as  Paug- 
vik, the  spelling  shown  on  the  earliest  maps  of  the 
upper  Alaska  Peninsula. 

Although  Hrdlicka  (1943)  had  indicated  his  be- 
lief that  the  site  was  largely  prehistoric,  the  Rus- 
sian Church  records  and  the  results  of  both  1 948 
and  1 96 1  excavations  indicated  the  former  settle- 
ment to  have  been  largely  if  not  entirely  of  the 
19th  century.  In  1961,  however,  three  (of  356) 
potsherds  recovered  from  deposits  containing 
postcontact  trade  materials  and  Pavik  phase  ar- 
tifacts were  of  a  thick,  gravel-tempered  ceramic 
type  (now  termed  Naknek  thick  plain)  that  was 
characteristic  of  the  prehistoric  Brooks  River  Camp 
phase  of  culture  of  the  Naknek  region,  which  is 
known  to  date  between  about  a.d.  1 100  and  1450 
(Dumond,  1981).  This  finding  suggested  that  there 
were  at  least  some  prehistoric  occupation  remains 
to  be  found  in  the  Paugvik  vicinity,  and  in  1973, 
when  the  University  of  Oregon  was  conducting  an 
archaeological  survey  and  limited  excavations 
along  the  lower  Naknek  River,  it  seemed  appro- 
priate to  test  the  site  once  again  in  search  of  more 
definitive  evidence  of  earlier  occupation. 

In  1973  a  trench  1  x  18  m  in  extent  was  laid 
out  on  the  western  side  of  the  major  rise  of  ground 


History  of  Archaeological  Research        1 5 


■*"  i  U.UuiU^5(aSI!« 


Fig.  7.  Aerial  view  of  the  Paugvik  site  and  environs.  Cannery  buildings  are  in  left  foreground;  lower  Naknek 
River  is  on  the  left,  with  Bristol  Bay  visible  in  right  background.  The  site  is  on  the  high  j>ortion  of  the  river  bluff 
seen  in  middle  background  above  the  pond  to  the  left.  Photo  by  James  Thompson,  1985. 


in  the  main  part  of  the  Paugvik  site,  in  an  area 
that  examination  of  the  eroding  river  bluff  indi- 
cated contained  thick  deposits  of  midden  but  in 
which  there  were  no  recognizable  house  depres- 
sions. Two  detached  1  x  2-m  pits  extended  the 
excavation  line  an  additional  8  m  to  the  east  (Du- 
mond,  1981,  Fig.  4.2;  present  Fig.  9).  In  the  trench 
and  its  extensions,  characteristic  postcontact  Pa- 
vik  phase  artifacts  were  found  in  heavily  streaked 
brown  midden  soil  in  which  layers  of  peaty  sod 
marked  former  ground  surfaces.  Beneath  the 
heaviest  of  these  old  sod  layers  in  the  continuous 
trench,  in  places  undisturbed  by  intrusions  from 
overlying  Pavik  levels,  there  was  a  layer  of  white 
volcanic  ash  about  1  cm  thick.  This  was  thought 
to  be  an  ash  that  had  been  fairly  securely  dated  to 
about  A.D.  1450  in  the  upper  Naknek  River  drain- 
age, where  it  immediately  overlies  cultural  depos- 
its of  the  Brooks  River  Camp  phase. 

In  the  lower,  southwestern  end  of  the  trench  the 
excavation  of  1973  was  carried  less  than  1  m,  at 
which  point  sterile  glacial  outwash  was  encoun- 
tered. There  the  upper  surface  of  the  glacial  clays 
was  capped  by  a  stratum  of  peat  some  50  cm  thick 


that  tapered  upslope  to  the  northeastward  and 
vanished  entirely  about  12  m  along  the  trench 
(Dumond,  1981,  Fig.  4.3).  This  peat  was  inter- 
preted as  the  remains  of  vegetation  at  the  edge  of 
the  kettle  lake  that  once  covered  what  is  now  the 
dissected  basin  west  of  the  hill,  a  counterpart  of 
the  ponds  that  still  remain  east  of  it  (Dumond, 
1981,  Fig.  4.2;  present  Fig.  9).  In  the  higher,  north- 
eastern end  and  in  the  detached  pits,  sterile  out- 
wash  was  not  reached  by  the  end  of  the  field  sea- 
son, with  excavations  carried  to  about  1.5  m  below 
the  surface.  The  nature  of  the  artifact-rich  deposits 
in  the  northeastern  section  of  the  continuous  trench 
strongly  suggested  the  presence  of  a  habitation  noit 
visible  from  the  surface.  A  deeper  test  in  a  limited 
area  of  the  section  revealed  a  trace  of  the  white 
volcanic  ash  only  a  few  centimeters  lower  than  the 
trench  floor. 

Again,  scattered  potsherds  of  Brooks  River  Camp 
phase  type— now  1 5  in  number  (in  a  total  of  356)— 
were  recovered,  half  of  them  from  otherwise  Pavik 
phase  deposits  and  half  from  the  underlying  peaty 
layer  at  the  western  end  of  the  trench.  No  datable 
charcoal  was  recovered  with  the  sherds,  most  of 


16 


Part  Two 


History  of  Archaeological  Research        1 7 


indistinct  depression 

outline  of  excavation  or  clearly  defined  depression 

projected  outline 


House  4 


Houses 


20  meters 


Fig.  9.     Plot  of  the  major  occupation  area  at  Paugvik. 


which  could  represent  items  lost  or  discarded  near 
the  edge  of  the  former  pond  at  a  time  well  before 
the  establishment  of  the  known  historic  Paugvik 
settlement.  Surveillance  of  the  eroding  river  bluff 
at  the  Paugvik  site  was  maintained  during  the  en- 
suing 1974  field  season,  and  a  thin  band  of  white 
volcanic  ash  was  discovered  above  scattered  ar- 
tifacts in  the  bluff  immediately  opposite  the  1973 
trench.  A  small  excavation  carried  below  the  vol- 
canic ash  at  that  point  yielded  14  Brooks  River 
Camp  phase  potsherds  next  to  charcoal  that  pro- 
duced a  radiocarbon  date  of  about  a.d  1255  (695 
±  65,  SI-2070),  finally  providing  some  confir- 
mation of  prehistoric  occupation  at  the  site  and 
contributing  to  the  identification  of  the  white  vol- 
canic ash  (Dumond,  1981,  pp.  65-67).  Neverthe- 
less, it  seemed  clear  that  very  few  remains  of  any 
such  earlier  occupation  remained,  presumably 
having  been  erased  by  the  heavy  tidal  erosion  that 
as  late  as  the  1 970s  was  taking  its  toll  on  the  bluff 
in  the  area  of  heaviest  19th-century  occupation. 

In  none  of  this  work,  however,  had  any  attempt 
been  made  systematically  to  sample  the  habitation 
area  of  the  site  to  determine  its  extent,  nor  had 
any  attempt  been  made  to  examine  the  surround- 
ing area  carefully  to  determine  the  probable  lo- 
cation of  Hrdlicka's  excavations.  The  need  for  some 


such  attempt  became  evident  in  1 983,  when  a  road 
was  constructed  immediately  north  of  the  site  to 
connect  the  modem  village  of  Naknek  with  a  new 
municipal  sewage  facility.  Thus,  in  1985,  with  fi- 
nancial support  from  the  Alaska  Historic  Preser- 
vation Office,  it  was  possible  to  expand  the  ex- 
cavation program  sufficiently  to  permit  such  ad- 
ditional mapping  and  testing  to  be  accomplished. 


Summary  of  the  1985  Field  Season 

Mapping 

Although  major  effort  in  1985  was  directed  to  the 
excavation  of  houses  and  middens,  a  new  contour 
map  of  the  Paugvik  site  also  was  plotted  by  alidade 
and  planetable,  supplemented  by  the  use  of  three 
datum  points  at  the  same  elevation— assigned  an 
arbitrary  value  of  100  m— from  which  triangula- 
tions  were  made  and  elevations  were  measured 
(Fig.  8).  For  outlying  areas  some  elevations  were 
estimated  by  handlevel.  In  the  actual  area  of  the 
10  well-defined  house  depressions,  horizontal  po- 
sitions were  pinpointed  by  extension  of  a  single 
metric  grid  system  over  the  entire  site,  laid  out 


18 


Part  Two 


with  reference  to  the  hne  that  had  been  established 
for  the  trench  of  1973  (Fig.  9). 

To  determine  the  area  of  actual  major  occupa- 
tion, a  soil  sampling  device  with  a  1-inch  barrel 
was  used  where  soil  conditions  permitted.  Because 
the  underlying  sterile  layer  in  the  entire  area  is  a 
greenish,  clay-laden  till  that  is  unmistakable  even 
in  modest  amounts,  this  small  sampler  was  en- 
tirely adequate  where  frost  did  not  impede  pene- 
tration. Shovel  tests  were  used  where  a  larger  ex- 
posure was  necessary.  In  the  habitation  area  in 
particular,  the  peaty  soil  was  consistently  frozen 
beneath  the  thick  layer  of  overlying  sod  (of  Cal- 
amagrostis  canadensis  [Canadian  bluejoint]).  Here 
it  was  necessary  to  first  cut  away  the  sod  to  give 
the  underlying  soil  a  chance  to  thaw  enough  that 
either  the  shovel  or  the  soil  sampler  could  be  used. 

The  southern  edge  of  the  site  is  on  the  bluff  of 
the  Naknek  River,  which  was  actively  eroding  un- 
til only  recently,  and  on  the  face  of  that  bluff  the 
signs  of  occupation  could  be  traced  in  profile  until 
they  disappeared  both  to  the  east  and  to  the  west. 
North  of  the  bluff  and  outside  of  the  area  marked 
by  surface  depressions  (in  which  the  presence  of 
occupation  was  obvious),  tests  were  made  at  ap- 
proximately 10-m  intervals  as  far  north  as  the 
westernmost  of  the  two  small  ponds  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 8.  Tests  were  made  at  about  double  this  in- 
terval in  the  area  through  the  swale  just  west  of 
the  obvious  habitation  area  and  also  on  the  rela- 
tively high  ground  east  of  the  easternmost  pond. 
Both  of  these  last  areas  were  essentially  devoid  of 
any  trace  of  occupation  debris,  with  glacial  ma- 
terial appearing  within  about  40  cm  of  the  surface. 

In  the  higher  ground  surrounding  the  habitation 
area,  a  search  was  made  for  traces  of  earlier  ex- 
cavations. A  total  of  1 0  fairly  clearly  defined  holes, 
obviously  dug  a  number  of  years  ago,  each  about 
30  X  1 20  cm  in  extent  and  30  cm  in  depth,  were 
located  in  the  area  marked  with  the  bold  dashed 
rectangle  in  Figure  8.  In  one  of  these  a  fragment 
of  tooth  enamel  gave  evidence  of  the  almost  cer- 
tain presence  at  one  time  of  a  buried  human,  sug- 
gesting strongly  that  this  was  the  place  of  Hrd- 
licka's  burial  excavations.  In  the  same  area,  seven 
other  depressions,  smaller  and  less  clearly  delin- 
eated, were  also  counted,  but  higher  up  the  rising 
ground  to  the  west  no  additional  depressions  were 
noted,  and  the  soil  testing  revealed  no  burials  that 
could  be  identified. 

Within  the  habitation  area,  the  limit  of  signifi- 
cant occupation  debris  is  bounded  by  the  95-m 
contour  that  appears  as  a  thick  line  in  Figure  8. 
Within  that  area  the  location  of  debris  was  some- 


what irregular,  with  occupation  fill  anywhere  from 
20  cm  to  2  m  in  depth  above  the  irregular  surface 
of  the  underlying  glacial  till.  As  a  general  rule,  the 
midden  deposits  appeared  to  be  deepest  between 
the  97-  and  99-m  contours,  although  there  were 
exceptions:  for  instance,  the  knoll  that  lies  between 
the  concentration  of  visible  houses  and  the  eastern 
pond  was  almost  devoid  of  midden  on  its  summit. 
The  area  of  heaviest  occupation  trash  was  not  sole- 
ly confined  to  the  immediate  vicinity  of  visible 
house  depressions. 


Excavations 

Although  no  formal  grid  had  been  established  in 
1973,  when  the  trench  of  that  year  was  backfilled 
the  key  stakes  were  driven  completely  into  the 
ground  to  permit  relocation  of  the  trench  if  de- 
sired. In  1985  these  were  used  to  orient  the  ex- 
cavation grid,  which  was  labeled  according  to  car- 
dinal directions,  although  in  fact  the  nominal  grid 
north  was  oriented  4 1  degrees  west  of  magnetic 
north,  or  about  20  degrees  west  of  true.  Unless 
specifically  indicated  otherwise,  the  nominal  ori- 
entation will  be  used  in  the  site  descriptions  here- 
inafter. 

Three  houses  were  excavated  completely,  two 
more  were  tested,  and  likely  midden  areas  were 
trenched.  Traces  were  found  of  at  least  five  and 
possibly  six  additional  houses  that  were  not  rec- 
ognized on  the  surface.  Because  frost  hampered 
excavations  throughout  the  season,  the  major  ex- 
cavation units  were  attacked  for  short  periods  at 
a  time,  rotating  from  one  to  another  as  thawing 
permitted. 

Trench  1  of  1985  was  20  m  in  length,  its  (nom- 
inal) south  edge  lying  along  the  coordinate  desig- 
nated NIO,  which  was  just  2  m  north  of  the  south 
edge  of  the  1973  trench,  and  its  west  end  (coor- 
dinate E20)  coinciding  with  the  east  end  of  the 
continuous  portion  of  that  1973  trench  (Fig.  9). 
Frozen  ground  was  encountered  a  short  way  under 
the  sod. 

House  1  was  located  at  the  highest  point  of  the 
knob  on  which  the  remains  of  the  village  were 
discerned.  Definition  of  the  relatively  shallow  house 
was  clear  except  for  the  south  comer,  where  an 
earlier  disturbance  was  encountered,  the  cause  of 
which  was  only  later  understood.  Concurrent  with 
this  excavation,  sod  was  removed  from  House  2 
and  House  3,  which  were  selected  because  they 
were  apparently  completely  undisturbed  by  loot- 


History  of  Archaeological  Research        19 


ers'  pits  and  because  initial  shovel  tests  showed 
each  of  them  to  have  well-defined  floors  in  the 
vicinity  of  substantial  rock-lined  central  fireplaces. 
The  amount  of  frost  remaining  in  all  but  the  cen- 
tral areas  of  their  floors,  however,  dictated  some 
delay  before  excavations  could  begin  in  earnest. 

As  frost  permitted,  work  in  Trench  1  was  con- 
tinued until  Pleistocene-age  glacial  till  was  en- 
countered throughout,  at  depths  varying  from  1 .0 
to  more  than  9  m.  At  its  western  end,  the  trench 
penetrated  the  floor  of  a  house,  including  a  rock- 
lined  fireplace,  that  apparently  had  been  perma- 
nently frozen  in  its  position  beneath  1  m  or  more 
of  peaty  overburden.  In  the  course  of  the  summer 
a  small  area  to  the  south  of  Trench  1  was  opened 
up  to  expose  the  hearth,  and  a  larger  expansion  of 
2  X  6  m  was  opened  to  the  north,  which  was  field- 
designated  Trench  2.  At  its  opposite  or  eastern 
end.  Trench  1  penetrated  a  heavy  deposit  of  wood 
ash  that  suggested  the  presence  of  a  house  floor 
underlying  a  portion  of  House  1  and  might  have 
been  responsible  for  the  difficulty  encountered  in 
defining  one  comer  of  that  house.  A  2  x  2-m  area 
was  opened  up  in  this  vicinity  to  test  this  suppo- 
sition; this  small  unit  was  then  designated  Trench  3. 

Meanwhile,  thawing  had  proceeded  rapidly 
enough  in  Houses  2  and  3  to  permit  a  shift  of  the 
crew  to  those  units,  while  the  newly  opened  trench- 
es were  allowed  to  thaw.  The  initial  promise  of 
rapid  clearance  of  the  new  houses,  with  their  par- 
ticularly well-marked  floors,  was  not  realized, 
however. 

House  2,  in  particular,  had  been  excavated  over 
an  earlier  habitation  (designated  House  2A),  which 
had  its  subterranean  entrance  lying  squarely  be- 
neath the  stone-lined  fireplace  and  its  floor  be- 
neath the  rear  bench  of  House  2.  House  2  itself 
was  both  deeper  and  larger  than  expected,  and  the 
complexity  introduced  by  the  underlying  structure 
caused  considerable  delay. 

The  excavation  of  House  3  also  began  decep- 
tively, with  the  structure  promising  to  be  rather 


small  and  shallow,  although  with  some  weU-pre- 
served  structural  members  and  a  fairly  clear  floor 
deposit.  Complexity  arose  particularly  with  the 
discovery  that  the  edges  of  Houses  2  and  3  had 
either  coincided  or  overlapped  slightly.  Further- 
more, in  the  vicinity  of  their  conjunction  there 
was  also  the  buried  entranceway  to  an  earlier  house, 
the  floor  of  which  was  never  discovered.  In  ad- 
dition, the  northernmost  comer  of  House  3  had 
been  cut  away  by  a  still  later  house  or  other  stmc- 
ture,  which  was  so  faintly  indicated  on  the  surface 
as  to  have  been  imperceptible  during  our  earlier 
examinations. 

Because  of  these  complications,  progress  was 
sufficiently  delayed  that  full-scale  excavations  of 
additional  houses  could  not  be  undertaken.  Trench 
2  was  cleared  to  underlying  glacial  till,  exposing 
about  one  third  of  the  frozen  floor  of  the  buried 
house,  which  is  now  designated  House  6.  The  yield 
of  artifacts  of  organic  material— wood,  bone,  fur, 
baleen,  etc.— was  especially  good  from  this  house 
floor  and  the  adjacent  area.  Trench  3  was  shallow, 
but  the  excavation  cleared  the  stone-lined  fireplace 
that  had  clearly  pertained  to  the  earlier  house  (now 
House  lA)  that  underlay  portions  of  House  1. 
Trench  4  was  de-sodded  to  provide  some  sample 
of  the  midden  near  the  entries  of  Houses  2  and  3. 

By  this  time  the  season  was  nearly  over,  and 
additional  sampling  of  the  northeastem  portion  of 
the  site,  in  which  we  had  intended  to  completely 
excavate  at  least  one  relatively  undisturbed  house, 
was  perforce  confined  to  the  testing  of  two  house 
depressions  (Houses  4  and  5).  Both  had  only  weak- 
ly defined  floors,  although  both  also  revealed  the 
large  rock-lined  fireplaces  that  were  now  recog- 
nized as  characteristic  of  the  site.  In  Trench  4  an 
area  of  1  x  6  m,  less  than  that  originally  opened, 
was  carried  to  a  depth  of  about  1  m,  at  which  time 
sterile  till  had  not  been  encountered,  and  the  sea- 
son was  brought  to  an  official  close.  AU  excava- 
tions were  completely  backfilled. 


20 


Part  Two 


Excavation  Detail 


Trench  1 


In  1973  the  main  trench,  which  was  1  m  wide, 
had  been  laid  out  parallel  to  the  bluff  with  its 
nominal  western  end  beginning  at  the  base  of  the 
western  side  of  the  hill  on  which  the  main  house 
remains  of  Paugvik  could  be  discerned.  The  west- 
ernmost 1 8-m  section  was  opened  as  a  continuous 
trench,  the  2-m  segments  of  which  were  simply 
designated  sections  1  through  9,  beginning  at  the 
low  western  end.  East  of  this,  the  trench  was  con- 
tinued as  two  detached  2-m  sections,  which  were 
designated  sections  1 1  and  1 3  (Fig.  9),  but  neither 
was  carried  to  the  sterile  layer  because  of  ham- 
pering frost.  When  the  trench  was  backfilled  at  the 
close  of  the  season,  some  key  stakes  were  pounded 
into  the  ground  to  make  relocation  of  the  trench 
possible  if  desired. 

In  1985  Trench  1  was  laid  out  with  its  nominal 
southern  edge  (on  the  coordinate  designated  NIO 
in  the  arbitrary  grid  of  that  year)  exactly  2  m  north 
of  the  southern  edge  of  the  1 973  trench,  its  western 
end  (at  coordinate  E20)  coinciding  with  the  eastern 
end  of  section  9  of  the  1 973  trench  (Fig.  9).  Twenty 
meters  to  the  east  (at  E40)  the  trench  ended  almost 
exactly  1  m  short  of  the  edge  of  the  depression  at 
the  top  of  the  hill  that  was  designated  House  1 . 
Through  intermittent  excavation  as  permitted  by 
thawing,  excavation  of  the  trench  was  carried  to 
sterile  glacial  silt  and  till  throughout  its  length;  a 
total  of  27  m^  of  material  was  removed. 

As  with  all  of  the  units  excavated  in  1985,  the 
trench  was  everywhere  overlain  by  the  pinkish 
streak  of  volcanic  ash  marking  the  1912  eruption 
from  the  vicinity  of  Mount  Katmai.  The  eastern 
end  of  the  trench  was  shallow,  with  glacial  till, 
clays,  and  loess  encountered  within  50  cm  of  the 


surface  in  most  of  the  area  east  of  E36,  although 
in  the  southern  wall  of  the  easternmost  meter  of 
the  trench  there  was  clear  evidence  of  charcoal  and 
wood  ash  less  than  20  cm  below  sod  that  marked 
the  northern  edge  of  a  hearth  that  pertained  to  the 
house  designated  House  lA. 

At  the  opposite  or  nominal  western  end  of  the 
trench,  where  midden  overlay  the  glacial  material 
1  m  or  more  in  depth,  a  stone-lined  hearth  was 
encountered  that  was  considered  probably  a  fea- 
ture of  the  house  that  had  been  suspected  to  lie 
beneath  the  eastern  end  of  the  1973  trench,  and 
evidence  of  a  vertical  aboriginal  cut  4  m  to  the 
east  of  that  hearth  in  Trench  1  was  considered  the 
edge  of  the  same  house.  This  area  of  Trench  1  was 
solidly  frozen  but  slowly  yielded  plentiful  scraps 
of  wood  and  twigs  at  the  presumed  house-floor 
level.  This  excavation  led  to  the  opening  of  a  2  x 
6-m  section  north  of  the  east  end  of  Trench  1 , 
which  was  designated  Trench  2  in  the  field.  This 
new  area  was  cleared  to  reveal  additional  portions 
of  what  is  here  designated  House  6. 

In  the  4.5-m  section  east  of  the  eastern  edge  of 
House  6,  two  more  aboriginal  cuts  were  found 
(Fig.  10).  The  easternmost  of  these  almost  cer- 
tainly represented  a  cut  for  the  tunnel  of  a  house 
entrance,  for  at  that  point  frozen  remains  of  struc- 
tural members  were  found  slumped  into  a  trench 
of  aboriginal  date  that  crossed  Trench  1  at  about 
right  angles;  to  the  west  and  stratigraphically  later 
was  evidence  of  a  second  deep  cut  suspected  of 
having  been  a  part  of  yet  another  house  that  had 
in  turn  been  partly  obliterated  when  House  6  was 
constructed  (Fig.  10;  some  of  the  area  designated 
House  6A  almost  certainly  pertained  to  this  house, 
although  the  jumbled  logs  and  sticks  of  House  6  A 
did  not  reveal  any  clearly  decipherable  pattern). 
Thus  there  appeared  to  be  three  generations  of 


Excavation  Detail 


21 


-  97  00 


,t?^d  Silt  and  till 


Fig.  10.     Profile  of  a  portion  of  the  south  face  of  Trench  1  (grid  in  meters). 


Structures,  all  of  Pavik  phase  age,  represented  in 
the  western  portion  of  Trench  1 . 

We  had  hoped  that  the  lengthy  expanse  of  the 
trench  would  lead  to  discovery  of  an  undisturbed 
deposit  of  the  gray  volcanic  ash  that  in  the  1970s 
had  been  determined  to  separate  materials  of  the 
historic  Pavik  phase  from  those  of  the  earlier 
Brooks  River  Camp  phase  and  thus  to  mark  the 
location  of  some  significant  quantity  of  the  earlier 
material.  However,  in  most  of  the  trench  the  ash 
was  nonexistent,  evidently  (as  with  all  the  houses 
excavated)  eradicated  entirely  by  Pavik  phase  oc- 
cupants of  the  site.  But  in  the  4  m  of  Trench  1 
east  of  E30,  and  coinciding  with  the  easternmost 
portion  of  the  deepest  part  of  the  trench,  discon- 
tinuous traces  of  the  ash  were  noted  at  the  trench's 
southern  edge.  The  overall  deposit  in  that  area 
appeared  simply  as  midden,  rather  than  as  a  house 
cut  or  other  aboriginal  excavation,  and  because  it 
was  relatively  undisturbed  beneath  the  remnant 
ash,  it  was  thought  to  promise  the  recovery  of 
some  Camp  phase  materials  (Fig.  10).  Unfortu- 
nately, the  yield  from  that  section  was  the  lightest 
from  anywhere  in  the  trench. 

Potentially  diagnostic  artifacts  from  the  trench 
section  E30  to  E34  are  listed  in  Table  1.  Unfor- 
tunately, the  edge  of  the  cut  for  the  apparent  house 
entrance  (Fig.  10)  was  not  clearly  identified  in  the 
generally  mixed  fill  until  excavation  of  that  2-m 
section  of  the  trench  (E30-E32)  was  nearly  com- 
plete. With  few  exceptions  artifacts  were  recorded 
only  by  level  and  2-m  section;  it  is  therefore  not 
surprising  if  the  sample  from  the  section  is  mixed. 
In  the  2-m  section  to  the  east  (E32-E34),  however, 
there  was  no  such  disturbance.  The  distribution 
of  artifacts  there  might  at  first  be  construed  to 
suggest  the  presence  of  at  least  a  trace  of  a  lower 


component  in  that  area.  That  is,  the  lower  portions 
of  the  section  yielded  no  glass  beads  and  a  single 
thick  sherd  of  a  type  characteristic  of  the  earlier 
Brooks  River  Camp  phase  (Table  1).  However, 
the  presence  of  four  sawed  slate  pieces  (generally 
rare  in  materials  of  the  Camp  phase,  a  time  when 
slate  was  almost  universally  chipped  to  shape) 
seems  to  indicate  with  equal  strength  that  the  en- 
tire deposit  was  predominantly  Pavik  in  age.  In 
any  event,  given  the  paltry  scale  of  this  uncertain 
evidence  and  the  small  overall  proportion  of  thick- 
paste  sherds  from  the  entire  excavation  (46  of 
930)— where  many  of  the  thick  fragments  may  well 
be  from  Pavik  phase  lamps  rather  than  Brooks 
River  Camp  phase  pots— there  seems  no  reason 
to  suppose  that  the  Pavik  collection  overall  is  se- 
riously contaminated  by  earlier  materials. 


House  1 

The  surface  depression  marking  the  location  of 
this  house  was  visible  enough  that  the  collapsed 
structure  was  confidently  desodded  in  its  entirety, 
only  to  encounter  frost  a  short  distance  below  sod. 
As  thawing  permitted  work  to  resume,  the  abo- 
riginal floor,  with  a  fireplace  in  a  shallow  pit  un- 
lined  by  stones,  was  revealed  1 0  cm  below  modem 
ground  surface  at  the  center  of  the  depression. 

Altogether,  an  area  of  about  35  m^  was  opened, 
from  which  some  1 2  m^  of  fill  was  removed  by 
season's  end.  The  house  had  evidently  been  con- 
structed with  horizontal  logs  outlining  the  base  of 
the  walls,  and  on  the  northeastern  side  and  along 
the  eastern  side  of  the  front  and  the  eastern  portion 
of  the  rear  the  limits  were  defined  with  some  ease 


22 


Part  Three 


Table  1 .     Potentially  time-sensitive  artifacts  from  two  sections  of  Trench  1 ,  Paugvik. 


Artifact^ 


No. 


Label 


E32-E34 


E30-E32 


Upper 


Lower 


Upper 


Lower 


Total 


Trade  objects 

21.  bullet  mold  half 

1 

62.  metal  ulu 

1 

107.  glass  bead 

12 

133.  nail 

1 

Stone  artifacts 

15.  slate  end  blade,  type  1 

1 

55.  whetstone,  type  1 

56.  whetstone,  type  2         ~ 

60.  stone  saw 

63.  stone  ulu  blade 

1 

64.  untyijed  ulu  fragment 

1 

77.  misc.  sawed  slate  pieces 

2 

78.  misc.  jKjlished  stone 

2 

140.  slate  chips  and  chunks 

Naknek  ware  potsherds 

100.  thin  plain,  variety  unknown 

101.  thin  plain,  Pavik  variety 
105.  thick  plain,  variety  unknown 


1 

2 

21 

1 

2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
6 
5 
6 

7 
1 

1 


"  Number  and  label  refer  to  descriptions  in  Table  2. 


by  the  telltale  channel  and  adjacent  cut  in  the 
greenish  glacial  till.  In  much  of  this  area  where  the 
edges  were  so  clearly  defined  it  was  also  possible 
to  estimate  the  height  of  aboriginal  ground  surface 
(Fig.  11).  In  sections  of  the  western  side  and  to- 
ward the  northwestern  rear  comer  of  the  house, 
however,  the  till  surface  dipped  below  the  floor  of 
the  house  and  the  definition  of  floor  limits  was 
less  certain.  A  similar  cut  in  the  till  was  located 
in  parts  of  the  right  (southwestern)  front  comer, 
but  in  other  parts  of  the  same  comer  the  till  had 
been  dug  out  by  an  earlier  disturbance.  As  the 
tunnel  entrance  of  the  house  was  cleared,  it  became 
clear  that  the  disturbed  area  extended  to  the  tunnel 
side.  At  first  suspected  to  mark  a  side  chamber, 
excavation  showed  that  the  disturbance  had  pre- 
dated the  constmction  of  House  1 ,  for  the  buried 
rock  pile  that  was  a  major  part  of  the  disturbed 
area,  which  penetrated  about  as  deeply  as  the  floor 
of  the  entrance,  had  been  cut  cleanly  by  the  House 
1  tunnel  edge.  The  disturbance  was  explored  only 
to  the  limits  indicated  in  Figure  1 1 . 

House  1  was  the  smallest  and  shallowest  of  the 
four  houses  in  which  substantial  excavations  were 
made,  and  it  departed  from  all  of  the  others  in  the 
discemible  outline  of  its  base  logs  and  in  the  ab- 
sence of  a  barricade  of  stones  around  the  centrally 
located  fire.  The  tunnel,  too,  was  unusually  stubby 
and  extended  an  uncharacteristically  short  dis- 
tance into  the  house  floor.  Although  deteriorated 


posts  and  horizontal  wood  fragments  were  plen- 
tiful, and  although  some  of  these  and  some  shallow 
depressions  without  traces  of  wood  (Fig.  1 1)  could 
be  imagined  to  be  at  strategic  locations  on  the 
floor,  it  was  not  possible  to  identify  the  locations 
of  major  roof  support  posts  with  confidence.  The 
total  area  of  the  actual  house  floor  was  about  25 
m\ 


House  lA 

Excavations  in  the  eastern  end  of  Trench  1  had 
revealed  a  heavy  deposit  of  ash  on  the  south  wall, 
and  toward  the  end  of  the  season  the  trench  was 
expanded  south  by  a  2  x  2-m  cut  designated  in 
the  field  as  Trench  3.  In  a  rather  hasty  excavation, 
the  expansion  uncovered  a  large  stone-lined  hearth 
that  was  almost  certainly— to  judge  from  the  other 
houses  excavated— the  central  feature  of  a  dwell- 
ing, designated  House  1 A  (Fig.  1 1).  The  excava- 
tion was  carried  somewhat  below  the  level  of  the 
supposed  house  floor,  and  its  relation  to  the  floor 
of  House  1  is  shown  in  Figure  1 1 ,  section  C-C. 

When  the  House  1 A  fireplace  was  first  exposed 
to  confirm  the  existence  of  the  house  itself,  it  was 
thought  likely  that  the  House  1 A  entry  tunnel  was 
the  cause  of  the  disturbed  fill  at  the  front  of  House 
1.  Although  this  possibility  cannot  be  ruled  out 


Excavation  Detail 


23 


modem  sod 
aboriginal  surface 

rock 

wood 

post 

cliarcoai,  wood  ash 

projected  edge 

pit  or  depression 


2  meters 


SECTION  A  -  A 


SECTION  B  -  B  1/ 


SECTION  C  -  C 


Fig.  1 1.     Plan  and  sections  of  House  1  and  excavated  portion  of  House  lA. 


24        Part  Three 


entirely,  a  careful  examination  of  the  modem  sur- 
face south  of  the  House  1 A  excavation  revealed  a 
slight  but  abrupt  depression,  and  the  adjacent  bluff 
showed  what  seemed  to  be  a  section  of  truncated 
entrance  tunnel,  suggesting  rather  that  the  en- 
trance had  opened  more  directly  toward  what  is 
now  the  river  bluff  (as  projected  in  Fig.  9).  This 
orientation  is  more  likely,  as  indicated  by  a  surface 
of  uncut  glacial  till  that  rose  some  1 0  cm  above 
the  floor  of  House  1  at  its  western  edge  (Fig.  1 1 , 
sect.  B-B,  C-C).  Because  the  till  remnant  rose  even 
higher  above  the  level  of  the  floor  of  House  1 A 
and  yet  was  within  75  cm  of  the  House  1 A  hearth, 
its  presence  seems  explicable  only  by  the  existence 
of  a  low  earthen  bench  in  House  1 A  immediately 
behind  (i.e.,  north  or  northeast  of)  its  central  fire, 
a  bench  high  enough  to  lie  completely  above  the 
till  at  that  point. 

Whatever  its  precise  orientation.  House  1 A  must 
have  predated  House  1 .  First,  the  position  of  House 
lA  was  almost  impossible  to  discern  by  any  sur- 
face indication,  whereas  House  1  was  clearly  vis- 
ible. Second,  nothing  in  the  fill  of  House  1  indi- 
cated any  overlying  disturbance  such  as  would  be 
caused  by  a  later  structure.  Finally,  if  the  distur- 
bance at  the  front  of  House  1  was  in  any  way 
related  to  House  1  A,  the  excavation  evidence  was 
clear  that  the  House  1  entrance  postdated  it.  In 
any  event,  there  were  clearly  two  generations  of 
houses  located  at  what  we  called  House  1 . 


House  2 

The  central,  rock-lined  hearth  of  House  2  was  en- 
countered in  the  initial  test  pit  at  a  depth  of  about 
30  cm.  As  thawing  permitted  the  hearth  area  to 
be  exposed,  the  surrounding  floor  was  found  to  be 
fairly  distinct  but  not  cleanly  overlying  sterile  till 
as  hoped.  A  transverse  trench  40  cm  wide  was 
then  laid  out  along  the  north-south  excavation 
grid  and  excavated  slowly  into  and  through  the 
floor.  What  it  revealed  was  that  the  hearth  and  the 
center  of  the  house  covered  earlier  excavations  of 
considerable  size.  Comparable  complexity  was 
found  over  much  of  the  floor,  little  of  which  over- 
lay the  recognizable  greenish  glacial  clay;  indeed, 
only  a  portion  of  the  south  wall  and  the  southwest 
comer  were  clearly  defined  where  the  position  of 
the  major  comer  post  was  circled  by  a  shallow  cut 
in  a  small  bed  of  remnant  till.  The  southeastern 
comer  had  been  entirely  eradicated  by  the  deep 
house  lying  immediately  to  the  south  of  House  2. 


That  house  had  been  passed  over  in  choosing  the 
excavation  sample  both  because  of  its  depth  and 
because  of  all  the  1 0  house  depressions  visible  on 
the  site  it  had  suffered  the  most  serious  damage 
through  pot  hunting. 

The  positions  of  the  other  walls  of  House  2  were 
defined  only  with  some  difficulty;  there  was  no 
evidence  remaining  of  any  horizontal  base  logs, 
but  the  two  northern  comers  were  marked  by  fairly 
substantial  post  remnants.  Efforts  to  positively  lo- 
cate the  front  wall  included  a  fairly  expansive  but 
shallow  cut— the  limits  of  which  are  shown  in  Fig- 
ure 12— that  produced  a  few  timbers  and  rocks 
that  seemed  at  first  to  mark  the  existence  of  some 
kind  of  storm  shed  at  the  outer  end  of  the  sunken 
entrance,  but  when  the  cut  was  completed  there 
was  no  clear  evidence  of  any  such  stmcture.  Like 
the  other  two  houses  with  completely  excavated 
entries,  the  entrance  tunnel  of  this  one  seemed  to 
open  directly  to  the  outside. 

Whereas  the  transverse  trench,  which  crossed 
the  house  diagonally,  provided  evidence  that  the 
southeastern  comer  had  been  eradicated  by  a  later 
structure,  it  also  yielded  evidence  of  some  under- 
lying structural  remnants  at  the  north,  above  which 
the  floor  of  House  2  was  traced.  The  biggest  sur- 
prise came  upon  clearing  the  deep  disturbance  be- 
neath the  hearth,  which  the  trench  had  also  re- 
vealed. This  disturbance  was  the  entrance  of  an 
earlier  house,  the  front  part  of  the  floor  of  which 
was  hopelessly  confused  with  what  had  been  taken 
to  be  a  slightly  raised  bench  at  the  back  of  House 
2.  As  the  final  result,  it  was  not  entirely  clear 
whether  the  piles  of  firecracked  rock  and  the  area 
of  charcoal  and  ash  found  on  what  was  first  thought 
to  be  the  back  bench  (Fig.  1 2)  were,  in  fact,  features 
of  House  2  or  of  the  house  underlying  it. 


House  2A 

With  clearance  of  the  earlier  entrance  to  a  point 
slightly  west  of  the  back  wall  of  House  2,  charcoal 
and  ash  appeared  that  invited  an  extension  west- 
ward by  an  arbitrary  cut  to  reveal  the  rock-filled 
hearth  of  what  is  now  designated  House  2A,  clearly 
the  major  structure  underlying  House  2.  No  at- 
tempt was  made  to  carry  the  clearance  beyond  that 
area  shown  in  Figure  1 2.  On  the  south,  the  original 
cut  for  the  House  2A  floor  had  not  eradicated  the 
till  now  remaining  at  the  comer  of  House  2.  Al- 
though the  actual  northern  and  southern  edges  of 
the  House  2A  floor  were  not  identified,  its  width 


Excavation  Detail        25 


secnoN  D-D 


FiG.  12.    Plan  and  sectioiis  of  House  2  and  excavated  portions  of  House  2A. 


appears  to  have  been  some^iiliat  less  than  that  of 
the  later  House  2.  The  separation  of  arti£u:ts  per- 
taining to  Houses  2  and  2A  is  provisional  only. 

Altogether,  some  55  m*  was  opened  to  uncover 
the  total  House  2  complex,  in  which  the  lai^ge  House 
2  itself  was  well  over  30  m^  in  floor  area.  In  this 
complex,  three  generations  of  houses  are  indicat- 
ed: House  2A,  overlain  by  House  2,  which  then 
had  one  firont  comer  obliterated  by  construction 
of  the  (unnumbered)  house  immediately  south  of 


it  In  addition,  the  structure  thought  to  lie  beneath 
the  floor  within  a  cut  in  the  till  on  the  north  side 
(Fig.  12),  which  for  lack  of  time  was  not  cleared 
when  it  was  concluded  to  be  unassociated  with  the 
floor  of  House  2,  could  have  been  contemporary 
with  House  2A.  When  it  became  clear  that  the 
base  of  the  joint  feature  of  Houses  2  and  2A  was 
reached  and  glacial  till  appeared  in  patchwork 
&shion  around  the  floor,  work  was  ended  without 
attempting  to  clear  all  underlying  pockets  of  mid- 


26        Part  Three 


den  and  other  disturbed  material  below  the  house 
and  without  carrying  the  excavation  everywhere 
to  sterile  ground. 


House  3 

Although  more  deeply  buried  than  House  1 ,  House 
3  was  not  so  deeply  covered  as  House  2  and  upon 
testing  promised  a  substantial  floor  under  only 
some  20  cm  of  fill  at  the  stone-lined  fireplace. 
Unfortunately,  as  in  House  2  there  were  no  rec- 
ognizable base  logs.  About  40  m^  was  finally 
opened,  from  which  at  least  1 5  m'  of  material  was 
removed,  although  this  amount  was  insufficient  to 
expose  the  entire  floor. 

Complexity  arose  with  the  discovery  that  the 
edge  of  House  2  had  either  coincided  with  or  very 
slightly  overlapped  that  of  House  3  (of  which  the 
limit  shown  in  Fig.  1 3  is  the  best  approximation). 
From  the  relatively  greater  clarity  of  the  side  of 
House  2,  which  we  actually  excavated  concur- 
rently with  House  3,  it  was  evident  that  House  2 
was  built  later. 

Furthermore,  near  the  conjunction  of  houses, 
the  underlying  log  structure  that  had  been  found 
within  the  northern  edge  of  House  2  (Fig.  1 2)  ex- 
tended beneath  the  floor  of  House  3.  There,  at  the 
northern  end  of  the  set  of  short  parallel  logs  (Fig. 
1 3),  the  pile  of  fire-cracked  rocks  continued  down 
below  those  logs;  both  logs  and  rocks  were  located 
within  a  cut  in  the  till.  This  structural  arrangement 
was  thought  immediately  to  be  remains  of  a  sunk- 
en house  entrance,  but  because  the  floors  of  both 
Houses  2  and  3  completely  overlay  it  and  because 
of  the  persistence  of  frost  in  the  hole  and  the  rapid 
passage  of  the  excavation  season,  this  structural 
arrangement  was  never  explored  to  its  base.  What- 
ever it  was,  it  probably  was  not  a  passageway  con- 
necting Houses  2  and  3. 

In  addition,  the  northernmost  comer  of  House 
3  had  been  eradicated  by  a  still  later  house  or  other 
structure  lying  north  of  it  but  so  faintly  indicated 
on  the  modem  surface  as  to  have  been  missed 
completely  upon  earlier  examination.  This  area  is 
now  labeled  simply  "disturbance"  (Fig.  1 3).  The 
northern  edge  of  House  3  was  perforce  left  unex- 
cavated  as  the  season  drew  to  a  close,  and  the  floor 
was  found  to  extend  farther  in  that  direction  than 
anticipated  and  into  frozen  ground  under  a  very 
large  pile  of  backdirt. 

Although,  with  the  exceptions  noted,  the  floor 
was  clearly  defined,  there  was  nothing  to  con- 


vincingly mark  the  location  of  aboriginal  ground 
surface,  although  it  is  presumed  to  have  lain  no 
more  than  1 0  cm  below  the  top  of  modem  sod 
and  only  a  few  centimeters  below  the  telltale  streak 
of  Katmai  volcanic  ash.  Apparently  the  house  was 
in  most  places  excavated  between  40  and  70  cm 
into  the  contemporary  surface  of  the  ground.  As 
is  often  the  case,  the  entranceway,  thoroughly  fro- 
zen before  it  began  to  be  uncovered,  yielded  a 
substantial  portion  of  the  organic  artifacts  recov- 
ered from  the  house. 

Added  to  evidence  from  House  2,  the  excava- 
tion of  House  3  suggested  that  not  three  but  four 
generations  of  stmctures  could  be  traced  at  Paug- 
vik:  ( 1 )  the  entry  or  other  stmcture  underlying  both 
Houses  2  and  3,  (2)  House  3,  (3)  House  2,  and  (4) 
the  unnumbered  house  south  of  House  2.  House 
2A  was  a  feature  of  either  the  first  or  second  of 
these  stages,  whereas  the  northern  comer  "distur- 
bance" of  House  3  was  a  feature  of  either  the  third 
or  fourth  stage. 


House  4 

As  the  end  of  the  excavation  season  approached 
it  was  clear  that  time  remaining  was  not  sufficient 
to  allow  complete  clearance  of  any  of  the  houses 
that  showed  clearly  on  the  surface  of  the  remaining 
eastem  end  of  the  site.  Two  were  selected  for  lim- 
ited tests. 

The  surface  depression  designated  House  4  was 
about  5  X  5  m,  with  an  evident  entrance  channel 
pointing  toward  the  bluff"  above  the  river  (Fig.  9). 
A  2-m-square  cut  was  made  in  the  center  of  the 
visible  depression,  but  although  the  floor  was  ev- 
ident within  20  cm  of  surface,  no  hearth  appeared; 
rather,  as  the  floor  stain  was  traced  through  ex- 
pansion of  the  pit  southeastward,  a  substantial 
hearth  appeared  in  what  would  have  been  the  ex- 
treme southeastem  comer  of  the  house  if  the  sur- 
face depression  were  taken  as  an  accurate  indi- 
cation of  the  actual  house  location  (which  it  was 
concluded  not  to  be).  The  apparently  elliptical  rock- 
ringed  hearth,  only  one  side  of  which  was  exposed, 
was  90  cm  north-south,  thus  apparently  virtually 
identical  in  size  and  shape  to  those  of  all  the  other 
houses  except  House  1.  In  all,  9.5  m^  was  cleared 
to  the  relatively  shallow  floor  of  the  house,  below 
which  appeared  no  indication  of  earlier  occupa- 
tion fill.  The  conclusion,  therefore,  was  that  later 
disturbances  had  modified  the  visible  surface  de- 
pression of  a  house  originally  constructed  over 


Excavation  Detail        27 


...... ,. -\B 

••■''  «»"^  ■**  "'"  ^"^  "<«»"  around/ 


SECTION  A  -  A 


SECTION  D-D 


Hc 


2  meters 


modern  sod 
^  ^^3     rock 
wood 
©  post 
..rt^j^jg^       charcoal 
--     projected 

(J";       pit 

O         post  hole 


Fig.  1 3.     Plan  and  sections  of  House  3. 


28        Part  Three 


undisturbed  ground,  to  give  an  erroneous  picture 
of  the  house's  true  orientation:  what  seemed  to  be 
backdirt  from  the  excavation  of  the  next  house  to 
the  east,  designated  House  5,  overlay  much  of  the 
House  4  hearth. 


House  5 

Unhke  House  4,  here  a  3  x  3-m  excavation  re- 
vealed the  substantial  rock-lined  hearth,  about  1 .0 
X  0.7  m  in  plan  size,  with  its  long  depression 
north-south,  to  be  in  the  center  of  the  visible  sur- 
face depression.  Like  House  4,  the  relatively  shal- 
low overburden,  the  modest  overall  size  (about  5 
X  5  m),  and  the  lack  of  evidence  of  any  structure 
beneath  the  hearth  and  center  of  the  floor  indicated 
that  we  would  have  done  well  to  begin  the  season 
by  excavating  these  outliers,  which  might  have 
provided  a  simpler  introduction  to  the  archae- 
ology of  the  Paugvik  houses  than  did  the  habita- 
tions we  actually  chose  to  begin  with.  The  most 
unusual  find  from  House  5  was  the  single  gun  part 
recovered  from  the  Paugvik  site. 

Together,  Houses  4  and  5  appeared  to  represent 
two  generations  of  structures  in  the  eastern  edge 
of  the  remnant  Paugvik  site. 


House  6,  Area  6A 

The  eastern  end  of  the  continuous  portion  of  the 
1973  trench  was  suspected  of  having  penetrated  a 
habitation  of  some  kind,  although  there  was  no 
sign  of  a  house  on  the  existing  surface.  It  was  partly 
the  hope  of  exploring  this  possibility  further  that 
dictated  the  placement  of  Trench  1  of  1985  next 
to  the  eastern  end  of  the  1973  cut.  The  lower  por- 
tions of  Trench  1  were  uniformly  frozen,  but  when 
the  base  of  occupation  material  was  finally  reached 
at  its  western  end,  the  suspicion  of  1973  was  con- 
firmed by  the  presence  of  the  substantial  rock- 
lined  hearth  that,  on  the  basis  of  evidence  from 
other  houses  being  uncovered,  was  supposed  to 
mark  the  approximate  center  of  a  semisubterra- 
nean  structure  (Fig.  14).  Accordingly,  a  3  x  6-m 
cut  was  laid  out  north  of  Trench  1  to  open  more 
of  the  presumed  house,  although  the  degree  of  frost 
encountered  at  the  base  of  Trench  1  made  it  clear 
that  excavation  of  the  new  section  would  not  be 
speedy.  This  northern  cut  was  designated  Trench 
2  in  the  field,  but  for  present  purposes  the  house 


revealed  by  Trench  2  and  the  western  5  m  of  Trench 
1  is  designated  House  6,  which  is  described  here 
as  a  unit. 

The  eastern  edge  of  the  house  was  discernible 
in  the  wall  profiles  of  both  northern  and  southern 
edges  of  the  cut  (Fig.  14,  profiles  NIO,  N13),  and 
the  limit  of  the  floor  within  the  trenches  was 
thought  to  be  located  accurately,  although  a  jum- 
ble of  preserved  logs  and  sticks,  probably  collapsed 
from  a  wall  or  roof,  tended  to  obscure  portions  of 
the  actual  floor  edge.  For  present  purposes  the 
section  judged  to  be  outside  of  the  house  within 
Trench  2  and  the  western  5  m  of  Trench  1  is  des- 
ignated Area  6  A,  probably  but  not  certainly  a  hab- 
itation; the  lower  20  cm  in  the  appropriate  areas 
is  taken  to  be  floor  deposit  of  House  6  and  Area 
6  A.  As  suggested  by  the  number  of  organic  items, 
preservation  of  the  House  6  and  Area  6A  floors 
and  of  the  excavated  portion  of  the  House  6  en- 
trance tunnel  was  excellent,  yielding  grass  cordage, 
much  of  the  hair  collected  from  the  site,  and  wood- 
en artifacts,  including  mask  parts  and  five  clear 
examples  of  flat  wooden  pelt  stretchers. 

In  Area  6A,  evidently  predating  House  6,  there 
were  three  fairly  well-defined  pits,  on  an  apparent 
(house?)  floor  at  the  approximate  level  of  the  floor 
of  House  6,  the  easternmost  of  which  (Fig.  14) 
yielded  a  number  of  flat  sections  of  worked  wood 
that  at  first  were  thought  to  be  remnants  of  skin 
stretchers  such  as  were  found  on  the  floor  of  House 
6  itself,  although  examination  in  the  laboratory 
cast  doubt  on  this  initial  interpretation.  The  sec- 
ond pit  yielded  major  fragments  of  twined  netting, 
thought  to  be  a  fishbag,  and  the  third  produced  an 
evident  cache  of  leafstalks  of  the  spreading  wood 
fern  {Dryopteris  expansa  (Presl)  Fraser-Jenkins  &. 
Jermy),  a  native  foodstuff'of  the  region.  It  is  likely, 
although  not  clearly  demonstrable  from  the  1985 
evidence,  that  this  section  of  floor  represented  the 
still  earlier  house  betrayed  by  the  westernmost  ab- 
original cut  indicated  in  Figure  10,  which  was  part- 
ly destroyed  in  the  construction  of  House  6.  Thus, 
despite  the  nicely  frozen  condition  of  House  6,  its 
invisibility  from  the  modem  surface,  and  the  ab- 
sence of  occupation  debris  immediately  beneath 
it,  that  house  was  almost  certainly  not  the  earliest 
habitation  in  its  part  of  the  site  but  was  rather  at 
least  a  second-  and  probably  a  third-generation 
structure  in  that  vicinity,  to  judge  by  profiles  of 
Trench  I  (Figs.  10,  14). 

Unfortunately,  the  slowness  of  thaw  in  the  deep 
overburden,  which  totaled  about  1  m,  ruled  out 
further  extensive  expansions  of  excavations  in 
House  6  in  the  time  available.  But  in  the  last  days 


Excavation  Detail 


29 


E20 


E22 


E24 


E26 


modem  sod 

<^  (^3  rock 

c2iI^S3)  wood 

®  post  '«»-  ^__,^^ 

«v^«Sjp»^  charcoal  P    ~— ^  ^®j___2;0rganic 

projected 

( ~'  pit 


N13  — 


N11  — 


N10  — 


—  96.00 


L^^Lj 


layers 
PROFILE  AT  N13 


fish  bag 


0(t\ 

®    V^^organic  layers^ 


96.00 


PROFILE  AT  N10 


Fig.  14.    Plan  and  profiles  of  excavated  portion  of  House  6  (grid  in  meters). 


of  the  season  a  1  x  1.5-m  southward  extension  at 
the  west  end  of  Trench  1  permitted  the  complete 
exposure  of  the  House  6  hearth.  For  purposes  of 
artifact  provenience  both  the  eastern  2  m  of  the 
continuous  section  of  the  1973  trench  (sect.  9)  and 
the  first  detached  segment  of  the  trench  to  the  east 
(sect.  1 1)  were  counted  as  portions  of  House  6. 


Trench  4 

As  excavations  of  Houses  2  and  3  progressed,  it 
was  speculated  that  the  relatively  flat  area  near 
their  entrances  might  produce  an  informative 
sample  of  midden  material  associated  with  one  or 
both  houses.  Accordingly,  a  2  x  6-m  trench  was 


30 


Part  Three 


laid  out  at  that  place,  oriented  north-south  on  the 
site  grid,  and  was  desodded  to  permit  thawing.  As 
the  season  wore  on,  however,  it  became  clear  that 
not  all  excavations  projected  could  be  completed, 
and  so  the  area  finally  excavated  was  reduced  to 
1  X  6  m  (Fig.  9).  Work  came  to  a  hurried  close 
as  at  least  some  glacial  till  showed  throughout  the 
length  of  the  trench  at  depths  of  1.0-1.4  m  below 
the  modem  surface.  Materials  recovered  did  ap- 
pear to  represent  the  midden  expected;  the  matrix 
was  jumbled  and  without  definable  strata.  The  sec- 
tion of  the  trench  almost  immediately  in  front  of 
the  entrance  to  House  3,  in  particular,  yielded 
plentiful  bone  remains  that  appeared  to  represent 
largely  animals  of  fur-bearing  species  that  were 
mostly  articulated  at  the  time  of  deposition,  pre- 
sumably skinned  carcasses  thrown  out  in  front  of 
the  house. 


With  cessation  of  excavation  of  Trench  4,  the 
summer's  work  was  brought  to  an  end.  All  units 
were  backfilled. 


Stratification  of  Cultural  Features 

All  major  units  of  excavation  revealed  evidence 
of  a  sequence  of  construction  at  the  Paugvik  site 
and  within  the  relatively  brief  temporal  limits  of 
the  historic  Pavik  phase.  There  are  indications  of 
two  generations  of  house  structures  both  at  House 
1  and  at  combined  Houses  4  and  5,  of  apparently 
three  generations  of  construction  in  combined 
Trench  1  and  House  6,  and  of  at  least  three  and 
probably  four  generations  of  structures  represent- 
ed at  combined  Houses  3  and  4. 


Excavation  Detail        3 1 


4 


Collections 


In  the  following  discussion,  artifacts  from  the 
Paugvik  site  excavated  in  1961,  1973,  and  1985 
are  described  under  three  headings:  procurement 
network,  maintenance  network,  and  protective 
network.  Within  these  three  broad  categories,  fur- 
ther subdivision  was  made  on  the  basis  of  the 
activity  for  which  the  artifacts  were  intended.  Al- 
though no  exhaustive  comparative  treatment  is 
attempted,  some  comparative  data  derived  from 
Nelson  (1983)  and  from  published  and  unpub- 
lished reports  dealing  with  sites  closest  to  Paugvik, 
both  spatially  and  temporally,  are  included  with 
the  descriptions  when  relevant.  Numbers  in  pa- 
rentheses refer  to  numbered  items  in  Table  2. 


Procurement  Network 

Hunting 

Recovered  objects  associated  with  sea  and  land 
hunting  reflect  the  diversity  but  not  the  complexity 
of  early  historic  Eskimo  weaponry.  The  toggle  har- 
poon head  ( 1 )  is  represented  by  a  single  antler  spec- 
imen, an  antler  spur  fragment,  and  an  ivory  frag- 
ment. The  complete  head  has  a  blade  slit  parallel 
to  the  round  line  hole,  a  closed  socket  (which  is 
broken)  and  a  single  spur.  Incised  lines  on  the  spur 
below  the  line  hole  depict  a  human  face  when  the 
head  is  held  upside  down.  A  single  incised  line 
extends  along  one  side  to  the  tip  of  the  blade  slit 
(Figs.  1 5, 44h;  Dumond,  198 1 ,  PI.  XVII,  Ab).  Small 
harpoon  heads  like  this  one  were  probably  used 
with  a  light  sealing  harpoon  thrown  with  the  aid 
of  a  throwing  board.  A  similar  head  was  recovered 
from  the  Old  Togiak  site  on  Togiak  Bay  (Kowta, 
1963,  pp.  68,  71,  PI.  5c).  The  spur  fragment  in- 
cludes the  lower  half  of  a  grooved  line  hole  from 


which  a  straight  incised  line  extends  to  near  the 
end  of  the  basal  spur.  The  ivory  fragment  includes 
one  side  of  the  blade  slit. 

There  are  eight  harpoon  dart  heads  of  antler  in 
the  collection,  seven  of  which  are  complete  or 
nearly  so.  Six  of  the  complete  heads  and  the  in- 
complete specimen,  here  designated  type  1  (2),  are 
identified  as  having  been  used  with  a  light  sealing 
harpoon  (Nelson,  1983,  Pis.  XIV,  LV  1-5).  They 
are  symmetrically  or  asymmetrically  barbed  bi- 
laterally, with  a  centrally  located,  triangular  line 
hole.  The  complete  heads  have  sharp  or  sloping 
shoulders  and  plain  conical  tangs  (Figs.  1 6h,  44i- 
k;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Ah-k).  Similar  har- 
poon dart  heads  have  been  recovered  from  a  num- 
ber of  late  prehistoric  and  historic  sites  in  south- 
western Alaska,  including  Hooper  Bay  village  in 
the  Yukon  delta  (Oswalt,  1952a,  p.  49,  PI.  1,  2- 
5),  Old  Togiak  (Kowta,  1963,  pp.  78-79,  PI.  7), 
and  House  15  at  Chagvan  Bay  (Staley,  1990,  p. 
239,  Fig.  50e,f),  and  from  earlier  excavations  at 
the  Paugvik  site  (Larsen,  1950,  Fig.  55 A,  2).  The 
eighth  dart  head,  designated  type  2  (3),  is  heavier 
and  may  have  been  used  for  taking  salmon;  barbs 
are  on  one  side  only,  and  the  round  line  hole  is 
off"-center;  the  shoulders  slope  to  a  wedge-shaped 
tang  (Fig.  1 6f).  This  style  of  harpoon  dart  head 
has  been  previously  reported  from  Old  Togiak 
(Kowta,  1963,  pp.  132-136,  PI.  19),  Platinum 
South  Spit  on  Goodnews  Bay  (Larsen,  1950,  Fig. 
55B,  3),  the  Tikchik  site  on  the  Nushagak  River 
(VanStone,  1968,  p.  58,  PI.  8,  5-9,  12),  and  late 
prehistoric  sites  of  the  upper  Naknek  River  drain- 
age (Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Ad-j). 

The  collection  contains  two  harpoon  foreshafts 
(4),  one  of  antler  and  the  other  of  ivory.  The  antler 
specimen  is  broken  at  the  proximal  end  but  prob- 
ably had  a  wedge-shaped  base.  There  is  a  centrally 


Collections        33 


Table  2.     Distribution  of  artifacts  and  detritus  from  Paugvik." 


HI 


H2 


H2A 


Description 


A  B  HIA  A  B  A  B 


Procurement  network 
Hunting 

1 .  toggle  harpoon  head 

2.  harpoon  dart  head,  type  1 

3.  harpoon  head,  type  2 

4.  harpoon  foreshaft 

5.  harpoon  socket  piece 

6.  float  mouthpiece 

7.  bladder  float  plug 

8.  harpoon  ice  pick 

9.  wound  plug 

10.  lance  blade  sheath 

1 1 .  bow  fragment 

12.  arrowhead 

13.  blunt  arrowhead 

14.  metal  end  blade 

15.  slate  end  blade,  type  1 

16.  slate  end  blade,  type  2 

17.  slate  end  blade,  unclassified 

18.  chipped  proj.  point 

19.  arrow  shaft 

20.  gun  side  plate 

21.  bullet  mold  half 

22.  boat  or  meat  hook 

Fishing 

23.  lurehook 

24.  lurehook  shank 

25.  barbless  antler  point 

26.  leister  prong 

27.  fish  spear  point 

28.  net  weight 

29.  net  float 

30.  net  mesh  gauge 

3 1 .  fish  scaler 

Trapping 

32.  pelt  stretcher 
Transportation 

33.  kayak  deck  beam 

34.  kayak  keel  protector 

35.  umiak  rib  or  riser 

36.  sled  stanchion 

37.  sled  upright 

38.  sled  runner 

39.  sled  shoe 

40.  snowshoe  crosspiece 

Maintenance  network 
Tools  and  manufacturing 

4 1 .  antler  splitting  wedge 

42.  steel  wedge 

43.  wooden  maul 

44.  metal  axe  head 

45.  stone  adze  blade 

46.  stone  skin  scraper  blade 

47.  skin  scraper  blade  blank 

48.  crooked  knife  handle 

49.  crooked  knife  blade 


1  2 


34 


Part  Four 


Table  2.    Extended. 


H3 


H4 


H5 


H6 


H6A 


Tl 


T4         73T        61T 


Total 


1 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

1 

9 

7 

3 

1 

14 
3 


3 

7 

1 

2 

17 

2 

1 

3 

1 

2 

2 

10 

2 

7 

93 

17 

19 

I 

3 

1 
1 


1 
5 
8 

13 
1 

20 
3 
1 
1 


1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
30 
I 


30 
8 
1 
2 
2 
1 
1 
1 


Collections        35 


Table  2.    Continued. 


HI 


H2 


H2A 


Description 


HIA 


50.  composite  knife  handle 

5 1 .  end-bladed  knife  blade 

52.  rodent  incisor  knife 

53.  engraving  tool 

54.  metal  knife  or  engraver 

55.  whetstone,  type  1 

56.  whetstone,  type  2 

57.  whetstone,  type  3 

58.  whetstone,  type  4 

59.  whetstone,  type  5 

60.  stone  saw 

6 1 .  metal  bladed  ulu 

62.  metal  ulu  blade 

63.  stone  ulu  blade 

64.  untyped  ulu  fragment 

65.  ulu  handle 

66.  metal  scissors 

67.  awl 

68.  stone  scraper  or  knife 

69.  bottle  glass  scraper 

70.  pick  or  mattock  blade 

7 1 .  shovel  blade 

72.  rake  prong 

73.  ice  pick  or  chisel 

74.  snow  beater 

75.  unidentified  metal  object 

76.  sawed  slate  blanks 

77.  misc.  sawed  slate  pieces 

78.  misc.  polished  stone 

79.  chipped  bifaces 

80.  ochre  anvil 

81.  hammerstone 

Household  equipment 

82.  compound  vessel 

83.  vessel  side  fragment 

84.  vessel  bottom  fragment  (2  types) 

85.  spoon 

86.  ladle 

87.  dipper 

88.  water  bag  nozzle 

89.  nozzle  or  float  part 

90.  large  bag  fragment 

9 1 .  mat  or  bag  fragment 

92.  grass  cordage 

93.  birch  bark  basket 

94.  metal  kettle  parts 

95.  brass  box 

96.  pottery  lamp 

97.  stone  lamp 

98.  bottle  glass 

99.  chinaware  fragments 

Naknek  ware  potsherds 

1 00.  thin  plain,  variety  unknown 

101.  thin  plain,  Pavik  var. 

102.  thin  plain.  Camp  var. 

103.  thin  plain,  Brooks  R.  var. 

104.  thin  plain,  exterior  ridged 

105.  thick  plain,  variety  unknown 

106.  thick  plain.  Camp  var. 


13 


4 

2 

3 

8 

2 

5 

1 

146 

26 

20 

1 

7 

9 

6 

5 

1 

3 

2 

3 

1 

3 

1 

4 

1 

36 


Part  Four 


Table  2.    Extended.  Continued. 


H3 

H4 

H5 

H6 

H6A 

Tl 

T4 

73T 

61T 

A     B 

A 

B 

A     B 

Total 

1 

2 

3 
2 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 
2 
2  / 

2 

._ 

1 

1 

1 

4 
3 

1 

1 

1 

1 

8 
8 
3 
1 
1 
3 

1 

2 

1 

3 
1 
3 

1 

2 

1 

2 

3 

1 

10 

1 
I 
5 

1 

1 

3 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
3 
3 

2     1 

1 

3 

9 

9  -   2 

11 

2 

IS 

2 

68 

1     1 

8 

9 

12 

33 

2 

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 
2 

10 
2 

1 
1 
4 

18 

1 
8 

3 

f 

4 

2      1 

7 

3 

3 

2      1 

1 

3 

1 

17 

1      1 

2 

2 

3 

1 

11 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

5 
2 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

2 

2 

1 

2 

2 

7 

1 

3 

2 

1 

1 

1 

8 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

4 
1 

1 

1 

3 

2 
2 

11 

,  4'^ 
6 

.    6     3 

4 

2 

2 

5 

2 

6 

48 

135    147 

5 

9 

63 

41 

30      4 

60 

28 

127 

305 

1163 

29     28 

1 

49 
6 

69 

2 

5 

14 

40 
8 

250 

14 

il 

A 

1     6 

10 

2     1 

6 

2 

14 

2 

57 

2 

1 

2 

1 

1 

7 

Collections        37 


Table  2.     Continued. 


HI 


H2 


H2A 


Description 


B  HIA 


Personal  adornment 
107.  glass  bead 


35 


108. 
109. 
110. 
111. 
112. 


native  bead 
ring 

bracelet 

necklace  segment 
hair  comb 


Smoking  equipment 

113.  snuffbox  (?) 

1 14.  birch  fungus 

Toy 

115.  bow 
Ceremonial  objects 

1 1 6.  mask,  unfinished 

1 1 7.  mask  appendage 

118.  figurine 

Miscellaneous 

1 1 9.  sweatbath  respirator 

Protective  network 
Clothing 

1 20.  mukluk  sole  fragment 

121.  skin  garment  fragment 

122.  skin  patch 

123.  gut  raincoat  (?)  fragment 

124.  button 

125.  shoe  fragment 

1 26.  sewn  skin  fragment 

1 27.  cut  skin  fragment 

128.  uncut  skin  fragment 

1 29.  knotted  sealskin  line 

1 30.  knotted  baleen 

131.  wool  cloth  fragment 

Imported  building  material 

1 32.  window  glass  fragment 

133.  nail 

134.  screw 

135.  mica  fragment 

136.  brick  fragment 

Unidentified  objects 
Wood 

137.  stake 

138.  unidentified 

Antler,  ivory,  bone 

139.  unidentified 
Debris 

1 40.  slate  chips  and  chunks 

141.  chert,  quartzite  chips 

142.  pumice  pieces 

143.  bone  fragments 

144.  ivory  fragments 

145.  antler  fragments 

146.  iron  fragments 


55  12 

1 

1 
1 


11 


5 

1 

1 

1 

7 

1 

1 

3 

3 

7 

2 

2 

6 

2 

21 

8 

5 

3 

1 

1 

1     -. 

9 
I 

3 

1 

1 

I 

3 

2 

1 

3 

2 

5 

1 

3 

4 

1 

2 

1 

12 

8 

3 

3 

2 
4 

1 
1 

38 


Part  Four 


Table  2.    Extended.  Continued. 


H3 


H4 


H5 


H6 


H6A 


Tl 


T4         73T        61T         Total 


85 


30 


49 


20 


32 


193 


44 


281 


36 


909 
1 

2/ 
1 
1 
1 


12 
S 
4 


1 

13 

1 

14 

5 

8 

4 

1 

1 

2 

6 

3 

3 
2 
1 
5 

1 

2 

2 

4 

3 

48 

18 

3 

64 

1       c 

7 

AS 
2 

1 

1 

3 

1 

13 

1 

11 

1 

2 

1 

2 

1 
1 

1 

_ 

2 

8 
9 

5 

3 

1 

3 

11 


21 


3 

5 

3 

1 

1 

3 

1 

11 


11 


30 


107 


7 

1  1  4  3  27 

2  2  1  18 

4  3  29  11  101 

6  5  8  10  70 


Collections 


39 


Table  2.    Continued. 


Description 


HI 


H2 


H2A 


HIA 


147.  brass,  copper  fragments 

148.  cut  baleen 

149.  mammoth  tusk,  tooth 

Hair  (no.  samples) 

1 50.  Canis  (dog,  wolf,  fox) 

151.  Cos/or  (beaver) 

1 52.  Homo  sapiens 

153.  <9rt^a/ra  (muskrat) 

1 54.  Phoca  (harbor  seal) 

155.  Rangifer  (caribou) 

1 56.  Urst4s  (bear) 


"  H  =  house;  T  =  trench.  73  =  trench  dug  in  1973;  61  =  trench  dug  in  1961. 
Level  A  includes  everything  above  the  basal  floor;  level  B  is  the  lowest  floor  deposit. 


located,  elongated  line  slot  with  incised  lines  ex- 
tending from  each  end;  the  specimen  is  round  in 
cross  section  at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  1 6i).  The  ivory 
foreshaft,  much  larger  and  heavier,  has  an  asym- 
metrical tang  and  an  oval  line  hole  from  which 
extends  a  pronounced  line  groove  on  each  side 
(Fig.  44m;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Al). 

Seventeen  objects  are  identified  as  harpoon 
socketpieces  (5),  only  six  of  which  are  complete  or 
nearly  so.  Four  are  similar  in  form,  being  drilled 


Fig.  15.    Toggle  harpoon  head  (point  is  downward). 


at  the  distal  end  to  receive  the  dart  head  and  hav- 
ing sharp  shoulders  and  plain  conical  tangs  (Fig. 
1 6a,  c,  d);  on  one  specimen  the  tang  is  asymmet- 
rical (Fig.  16c).  Three  are  made  of  ivory,  and  one, 
which  is  not  drilled  at  the  distal  end,  is  made  of 
walrus  penis  bone.  One  of  the  ivory  socketpieces 
has  a  projecting  piece  in  the  center  of  the  drilled 
hole  that  presumably  served  to  wedge  the  tang  of 
the  dart  head  in  place  (Fig.  16d).  An  ivory  sock- 
etpiece  is  blunt  and  heavy  with  sharp  shoulders 
and  a  rectangular  tang  (Fig.  44a;  Dumond,  1981, 
PI.  XVII,  Bj);  a  badly  weathered  specimen  of  wal- 
rus penis  bone  has  sloping  shoulders  and  a  plain, 
conical  tang  (Fig.  44d;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII, 
Bi).  These  socketpieces  would  appear  to  have  been 
used  with  a  thrusting  harpoon  having  a  float  of 
seal  intestine  similar  to  a  "sea  otter  harpoon"  col- 
lected in  Bristol  Bay  in  1 88 1-1 883  by  C.  L.  McKay 
(described  and  illustrated  by  Mason,  1902,  p.  293, 
PI.  1 2).  A  similar  socketpiece  from  House  1 5  at 
Chagvan  Bay  was  described  and  illustrated  by 
Staley  (1990,  pp.  245-246,  Fig.  52b). 

A  single  unfinished  harpoon  socketpiece  is  made 
of  ivory  and  has  a  long  bifurcated  tang.  It  is  rough- 
ly worked  and  not  drilled  at  the  distal  end  (Fig. 
16e).  Another  incomplete  specimen  of  antler  ap- 
parently had  a  wedge-shaped  tang  (Fig.  1 6b).  Four 
ivory  socketpieces  are  so  badly  weathered  that  their 
form  when  complete  cannot  be  determined  with 
certainty.  One  of  these  contains,  in  the  drilled  end, 
a  wooden  plug  that  permitted  a  more  secure  seat- 
ing of  the  dart  head.  Two  socketpiece  tang  frag- 
ments, one  of  bone  and  the  other  of  ivory,  have 
sharp  shoulders  and  are  asymmetrical  with  pro- 
nounced knobs  near  the  tip  (Fig.  44e;  Dumond, 
1981,P1.  XVII,  Dc). 


40        Part  Four 


Table  2.    Extended.  Continued. 


H3 


H6 


H6A 


A  B  H4  H5 


Tl 


T4 


73T        61T 


Total 


3        y 


1 

5  4 

4  1 

2 

8  1 


4 

1 

1 

1 

21 

1 

6 

4 

17 

3 

2 

2 

12^ 

4 

1 

6 

2 

2 
2 

1 

1 
10 

The  remaining  three  socketpiece  fragments,  one 
of  ivory  and  two  of  bone,  were  apparently  used 
with  much  Ughter  implements,  possibly  feathered 
harpoons  thrown  from  a  kayak  with  the  aid  of  a 
throwing  board  (Nelson,  1983,  PI.  LIV).  These  are 
basal  fragments  with  wedge-shaped  tangs;  one  has 
a  slight  projection  near  the  tip  (Fig.  16k,l).  Sock- 
etpieces  similar  to  all  the  forms  from  Paugvik  were 
recovered  from  the  Old  Togiak  site  and  were  de- 
scribed and  illustrated  by  Kowta  (1963,  pp.  73- 
78,  PI.  6). 

The  collection  contains  two  ivory  float  mouth- 
pieces (6),  one  of  which  is  incomplete.  The  com- 
plete specimen  has  an  enlarged  lip  and  a  projecting 
spur  with  a  drilled  hole  at  the  proximal  end  (Fig. 
1 6g).  The  incomplete  mouthpiece  is  for  a  smaller 
float  of  the  type  that  is  attached  to  the  shaft  of  a 
harpoon  (Fig.  16j).  There  is  a  projection  at  the 
proximal  end  that  is  pierced  for  the  attachment  of 
a  line  to  bind  the  mouthpiece  to  the  harpoon  shaft 
(Nelson,  1983,  p.  142,  PI.  XVI  top,  17,  21,  25).  A 
similar  mouthpiece  was  recovered  at  Paugvik  by 
Larsen  (1950,  Fig.  55 A,  9). 

A  very  small,  round  ivory  object  0.8  cm  in  di- 
ameter and  deeply  grooved  for  lashing  may  be  a 
bladder  float  plug  (7). 

A  probable  harpoon  ice  pick  (8)  of  antler  tapers 
to  a  point  at  the  distal  end  and  has  a  drilled  line 
hole  approximately  in  the  center  (Fig.  1 6m).  This 
implement  may  have  been  simply  hafted  to  a  shaft 
and  used  as  a  fishing  ice  pick.  Two  additional  ob- 
jects are  pointed  at  one  end  and  may  also  be  ice 
picks.  One  of  ivory  has  a  deep  groove  along  one 
side  (Fig.  44g;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Cd),  while 
the  other  of  antler  is  thinned  at  the  proximal  end 
(Fig.  44f;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  An). 


A  wooden  object,  rounded  at  one  end  and 
notched  on  either  side,  tapers  toward  the  opposite 
end  (Fig.  16s).  It  may  be  a  wound  plug  (9)  used  to 
stop  the  flow  of  blood  from  a  carcass. 

The  collection  contains  two  wooden  lance  blade 
sheaths  (10),  convex  on  the  outer  surface  and  hol- 
lowed out  on  the  inside,  for  the  protection  of  stone 
or  metal  blades.  There  are  lashing  notches  at  the 
point  of  maximum  width  (Fig.  1 6n).  A  similar 
sheath  was  described  and  illustrated  by  Nelson 
(1983,  p.  146,  PI.  LVIIa,  27).  Three  comparable 
two-piece  sheaths  are  included  in  an  undated  cache 
of  hunting  weapons  (never  published)  that  was 
accidentally  encountered  by  a  USGS  geologist  near 
the  shore  of  Lake  Grosvenor  in  the  upper  Naknek 
River  drainage  system  in  1964.  (.As  of  1985,  the 
sheaths,  four  associated  shaft  fragments,  and  eight 
polished  lance  heads  were  held  by  the  National 
Park  Service  in  Anchorage.) 

Two  spruce  bow  fi-agments  (11)  are  ovoid  in 
cross  section  with  nocks  that  are  simple  rounded 
projections  with  sloping  shoulders.  The  smaller 
fragment  may  represent  a  toy  (Figs.  1 6r,  44c;  Du- 
mond, 1981,P1.  XVII,  Cc). 

Arrowheads  (12)  for  large  game  or  war  are  rep- 
resented in  the  collection  by  10  specimens,  only 
two  of  which  are  complete;  all  are  made  of  antler. 
One  complete  arrowhead  has  a  pair  of  barbs  on 
one  side,  a  sharp  shoulder,  and  a  conical  tang;  there 
is  no  blade  slit.  An  incised  line  along  one  side  may 
be  an  ownership  mark  (Fig.  1 6p).  The  other  com- 
plete arrowhead  is  short  with  paired  barbs  at  the 
slightly  broken  tip,  sharp  shoulders,  and  a  plain 
conical  tang  (Fig.  441;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII, 
Be).  Two  specimens,  apparently  unfinished,  have 
sharp  shoulders  and  plain  conical  tangs  but  no 


Collections 


41 


barbs  (Fig.  16o,q).  On  one  there  is  a  series  of  par- 
allel incised  lines,  possibly  ownership  marks  (Fig. 
1 60).  Of  the  remaining  six  fragments,  three  are 
tips  (two  with  blade  slots  and  one  with  a  pair  of 
barbs  along  one  side),  two  are  center  sections 
showing  a  single  barb,  and  one  is  a  basal  fragment, 
rectangular  in  cross  section,  with  a  conical  tang 
(Fig.  16t). 

Two  blunt  arrowheads  (13)  of  wood  for  use  as 
bird  arrows  are  roughly  the  shape  of  an  elongated 
diamond.  From  a  sharp  tang,  broken  on  both  spec- 
imens, they  swell  to  a  point  approximately  one 
third  of  the  distance  from  the  tip  and  then  taper 
to  a  point  at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  1 6u, v). 

The  collection  contains  seven  metal  end  blades 
(14),  two  of  brass  and  five  of  steel.  The  brass  end 
blades  are  very  thin  and  flat  across  the  base  (Fig. 
17d;  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Db).  Three  steel 
blades  are  similar  in  shape  but  heavier  (Fig.  1 7c; 
Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Dh),  and  the  other  two 
are  long  and  narrow  with  short  tangs  (Fig.  17b; 
Dumond,  1981,  PI.  XVII,  Dg).  Because  toggle  har- 
poon heads  are  nearly  absent  from  the  Paugvik 
collection,  it  is  assumed  that  these  blades  were 
used  primarily  with  arrowheads. 

There  are  1 29  whole  and  fragmentary  slate  end 
blades  (15-17),  presumably  for  the  same  purpose 
as  the  somewhat  rarer  metal  end  blades.  These 
Paugvik  insert  blades  are  divided  into  two  types, 
of  which  the  first  is  by  far  the  more  common.  Type 
1(15)  has  a  faceted  butt,  always  more  than  20  mm 
in  length,  that  extends  a  variable  distance  over 
each  face  of  the  blade  and  was  almost  invariably 
formed  by  rubbing  a  narrow  whetstone  lengthwise 
to  the  blade,  often  grooving  it  deeply.  Relatively 
whole  examples  among  the  81  blades  identified 
vary  from  40  to  nearly  90  mm  in  length  and  are 
1 7-30  mm  in  maximum  width  (Fig.  46g-l).  Type 
2  (16)  is  similar  in  overall  form  and  size,  but  the 
butt  facet  has  been  carved  out  with  abrupt  edges 
(Fig.  46m,n).  Those  remaining  unclassified  (17) 
are  too  fragmentary  for  recognition  or  are  variant, 
most  of  the  latter  being  very  thin  and  lacking  facets 
but  of  shapes  variable  enough  that  they  form  no 
coherent  type;  a  few  are  thick  and  may  have  been 
in  process  of  manufacture.  Those  that  retain  signs 
of  their  mode  of  manufacture  were  formed  largely 
by  abrasive  sawing,  snapping,  and  subsequent 
grinding,  although  some  chipping  before  grinding 
is  also  in  evidence  (Fig.  46e,f). 

Butt-faceted  slate  insert  tips  similar  to  type  1 
blades  are  found  in  many  sites  in  northern  Alaska 
(e.g.,  Ford,  1959)  and  are  especially  common  in 
late  prehistoric  and  historic  sites  around  the  south- 


em  Bering  Sea.  They  appear  in  the  upper  Naknek 
drainage  sequence  after  a.d.  1000  and  become  the 
dominant  projectile  arming  device  after  a.d.  1400 
in  the  Brooks  River  Blufls  phase  (Dumond,  1981), 
at  about  which  time  they  also  appear  on  Kodiak 
Island  (Jordan  &  Knecht,  1988;  Dumond,  1991). 
Inserts  of  type  2  appeared  in  the  Naknek  region 
only  with  the  beginning  of  the  historic  period  (i.e., 
after  about  a.d.  1 800),  with  a  geographical  distri- 
bution much  more  limited  than  that  of  type  1, 
although  they  have  been  reported  from  some  of 
the  latest  sites  on  Kodiak  Island  (e.g.,  Clark,  1974, 
PI.  16P).  Larsen  (1950)  suggested  that  such  im- 
plements with  deeply  carved  facets  that  he  recov- 
ered from  Paugvik  in  1 948  were  derived  from  cast 
brass  prototypes,  but  there  is  no  evidence  for  this. 

The  single  chipped  projectile  point  (18)  is  rem- 
iniscent of  artifacts  from  the  Naknek  region  of  the 
early  first  millennium  a.d.  (i.e.,  of  the  Smelt  Creek 
phase  [Dumond,  1981]),  although  with  a  length  of 
56  mm  and  a  width  of  24  mm  it  is  somewhat  more 
elongated  than  is  common  in  that  phase.  Although 
it  might  be  compared  with  the  form  of  some 
chipped  points  of  later  periods  from  northern 
Alaska  (e.g..  Ford,  1959,  Fig.  64),  the  presence  of 
only  the  one  example— from  House  1 ,  from  which 
a  few  other  finds  are  reminiscent  of  Naknek  River 
drainage  implements  of  the  first  millennium— sug- 
gests rather  that  it  is  somehow  derived  from  some 
earlier  deposit  (Fig.  46a). 

Arrow  shafts  (19)  are  represented  by  three  frag- 
mentary specimens.  The  first  is  incomplete  at  both 
ends  and  has  a  diameter  of  9  mm.  The  second 
includes  the  nock  and,  as  is  usual  with  the  prox- 
imal ends  of  arrows,  is  flattened  and  oval  in  cross 
section  (Fig.  1 7e).  The  third  arrow  shaft  fragment 
is  complete  at  the  distal  end,  where  there  is  a  deep 
notch  3.5  cm  long  and  pointed  at  the  lower  end 
to  receive  the  tang  of  the  arrowhead  (Fig.  1 7k). 

A  cast  bronze  gun  side  plate  (20),  slightly  curved 
at  one  end,  has  holes  at  both  ends  to  receive  the 
screws  that  hold  the  lock  to  the  gun  stock.  Initials 
stamped  on  the  back  are  either  "HD"  or  "HU" 
(Fig.  1 7g).  This  side  plate  probably  was  part  of  the 
lock  mechanism  of  a  shotgun. 

The  collection  contains  one  bullet  mold  half  (21) 
made  from  medium-grain  sandstone,  rectangular 
in  shape  with  a  prepared  flat  surface  into  which 
has  been  ground  a  circular  depression  0.8  cm  in 
diameter.  At  one  end  of  the  depression  is  a  groove 
that,  when  the  identical  other  half  of  the  mold  was 
tied  or  otherwise  affixed  to  this  one,  would  permit 
the  lead  to  be  poured  in  (Fig.  1 7j).  This  stone  mold 
may  have  fitted  into  a  wood  or  antler  handle  re- 


42 


Part  Four 


sembling  those  in  ethnographic  collections  (e.g., 
Fitzhugh  &  Kaplan,  1982,  p.  167;  Nelson,  1983, 
PI.  LXIII,  8).  In  southwestern  Alaska  similar  molds 
have  been  recovered  from  archaeological  sites  at 
Crow  Village  on  the  Kuskokwim  River  (Oswalt  & 
VanStone,  1967,  p.  31,  PI.  2,  n),  Akulivikchuk  on 
the  Nushagak  River  (VanStone,  1970,  p.  62,  PI. 
11,2),  and  the  Nunakakhnak  site  on  Kodiak  Island 
(Knecht  &  Jordan,  1985,  p.  29,  Fig.  1 1). 

The  point  for  a  boat  or  meat  hook  (22)  is  made 
of  ivory  and  has  two  oval  lashing  slots  parallel  to 
the  flat  surface  that  would  lie  along  the  shaft  (Fig. 
1 7a).  This  hook  is  smaller  than  most  of  the  boat 
hooks  illustrated  by  Nelson  (1983,  pi.  LXVIII,  22- 
25,  LXXX,  1-5)  and  may  have  been  used  for  drag- 
ging large  pieces  of  meat. 


Fishing 

Fishing  was  presumably  as  important  to  the  Paug- 
vik  natives  as  it  was  to  most  coastal  peoples  south 
of  Bering  Strait,  where  there  are  great  salmon  runs. 
There  is  evidence  in  the  collection  to  indicate  the 
use  of  the  three-pronged  fish  spear  and  leister 
pronged  spear  and  probable  use  of  the  salmon  har- 
poon, nets,  and  hook  and  line. 

The  collection  contains  a  single  fish-shaped  lure- 
hook  (23)  and  five  lurehook  shanks  (24).  The  com- 
plete specimen  is  small  and  was  presumably  used 
for  taking  small  fish  such  as  tomcod  or  sculpin. 
The  fish-shaped  shank  of  ivory  flattens  at  the  prox- 
imal end,  where  there  is  an  oval  line  hole  cut  at 
right  angles  to  the  small  nail  at  the  distal  end  that 
serves  as  a  barb  (Fig.  1 7i). 

Five  objects,  four  of  ivory  and  one  of  antler,  are 
identified  as  lurehook  shanks;  all  are  unfinished, 
are  considerably  larger  than  the  complete  lure- 
hook, and  hence  were  probably  intended  for  taking 
larger  fish  such  as  grayling  or  trout.  One  ivory 
specimen  is  drilled  at  the  distal  end  for  a  barb  (Fig. 
1 7h)  and  another  is  drilled  near  the  proximal  end 
for  the  leader  or  line  (Fig.  1 7f).  Two  ivory  shanks 
are  flattened  at  the  proximal  end,  and  the  single 
antler  shank  is  narrower  and  flatter  than  the  others. 
Similar  lurehooks  collected  throughout  south- 
western Alaska  were  described  and  illustrated  by 
Nelson  (1983,  pp.  175,  Pis.  LXVIII,  LXIX,  Fig. 
48).  Surprisingly,  fish-shaped  lurehooks  are  absent 
from  the  archaeological  collection  from  the  Old 
Togiak  site  (Kowta,  1963,  p.  104). 

The  collection  contains  eight  slender,  barbless 
pointed  objects  of  antler  (25),  which  are  round  in 


cross  section.  Three  are  identified  as  probable  cen- 
ter prongs  for  the  three-pronged  fish  spear.  Al- 
though no  matching  side  prongs  were  recovered, 
this  type  of  implement  was  widespread  throughout 
southwestern  Alaska  in  the  late  prehistoric  and 
historic  periods.  All  but  two  of  the  pointed  objects 
are  complete  and  shoulderless,  sloping  to  a  pointed 
proximal  end  (Fig.  1 7m-o).  Similar  barbless  points 
have  been  recovered  at  Hooper  Bay  village  (Os- 
walt, 1952a,  pp.  54-55,  PI.  2,  items  9,  10)  and  Old 
Togiak  (Kowta,  1963,  pp.  114-121,  Pis.  12-14). 

The  1 3  items  identified  here  as  leister  prongs 
(26),  five  of  which  are  complete,  are  made  of  ant- 
ler; some  may  in  fact  have  been  bird  spear  side 
prongs  (see  Nelson,  1983,  Figs.  42,  44,  PI.  LIX). 
Two  of  the  complete  prongs  and  one  nearly  com- 
plete example  were  found  together  and  thus  may 
represent  pieces  of  a  single  leister;  each  has  nine 
barbs  (Fig.  1 71).  The  other  complete  prongs  have 
eight,  six,  and  four  barbs,  respectively.  Similar 
weapon  points  were  illustrated  by  Nelson  (1983, 
Pis.  LX,  1,  LXVII,  2,  LXVIII,  1,  Fig.  44),  and 
unilaterally  multibarbed  prongs  were  recovered  at 
Hooper  Bay  village  (Oswalt,  1952a,  pp.  54-55,  PI. 
2,  1 1-13)  and  the  Old  Togiak  site  (Kowta,  1963, 
pp.  1 23-1 26,  PI.  1 5)  and  from  House  1 5  at  Chagvan 
Bay  (Staley,  1990,  pp.  249-250,  Fig.  50a-c). 

A  piece  of  low-grade  steel,  perhaps  a  spike  orig- 
inally, was  flattened  and  pounded  out  at  one  end 
to  form  a  barb.  It  is  identified  as  difish  spear  point 
(27).  Because  the  distal  end  is  bent  slightly,  it  may 
have  been  intended  for  use  with  a  three-pronged 
fish  spear  (Fig.  1 7p).  Similar  steel  points  were  re- 
covered from  the  Nushagak  site  (VanStone,  1972, 
p.  55,  PI.  11,  items  2,  6). 

The  use  of  nets  at  Paugvik  is  indicated  by  20 
recovered  net  weights  (28),  12  of  bone,  seven  of 
antler,  and  one  of  mammoth  ivory.  Six  of  the  bone 
weights  are  made  from  the  curved,  unsplit  ribs  of 
large  mammals,  probably  beluga,  cut  to  length  and 
drilled  at  each  end  for  suspension.  The  holes  were 
placed  vertically,  or  what  would  be  edge-to-edge 
of  the  unmodified  rib,  and  the  surface  is  essentially 
unmodified  except  for  flattening  at  the  ends  (Fig. 
18i).  Two  of  the  weights  are  smaller,  possibly 
formed  of  caribou  ribs,  and  are  worked  on  all  sur- 
faces. In  one  case  the  suspension  holes  were  drilled 
laterally,  or  flat-side  to  flat-side  (Fig.  1 7t),  and  on 
the  other  vertically.  Three  bone  weights  are  made 
from  split  sections  of  the  material  worked  to  a 
rectangular  shape  and  with  laterally  drilled  sus- 
pension holes  (Fig.  18h).  The  12th  bone  specimen 
is  different,  having  been  worked  to  a  flattened  sur- 
face at  one  end  where  there  is  a  single  suspension 


Collections        43 


hole  (Fig.  17q).  This  last  weight  may  have  been 
used  with  hook  and  Une. 

Of  the  seven  antler  net  weights,  six  of  which  are 
complete,  all  except  one  are  made  of  split  seg- 
ments. The  exception  is  an  unmodified  section  of 
antler  tine  drilled  vertically  at  each  end.  The  other 
three  are  roughly  rectangular  in  cross  section  with 
laterally  drilled  suspension  holes  (Fig.  18b).  The 
net  weight  of  mammoth  ivory  is  a  piece  of  the 
exfoliated  outer  surface  of  a  tusk,  roughly  rect- 
angular in  shape  with  suspension  holes  drilled  lat- 
erally (Fig.  1 8d).  Net  weights  similar  to  those  from 
Paugvik  have  been  reported  from  all  coastal  and 
riverine  sites  in  southwestern  Alaska. 

Two  incomplete  net  floats  (29)  are  made  of  Cot- 
tonwood bark,  roughly  rectangular  in  outline,  with 
a  rectangular  gouged  line  hole  for  attachment  to 
the  net.  In  cross  section  these  fragments  have  a 
rounded  triangular  form,  thinner  at  the  top  and 
thick  at  the  bottom  (Fig.  1 7u).  A  piece  of  wood 
that  may  be  another  incomplete  net  float  is  ap- 
proximately 1 7  cm  long  and  6  cm  wide  and  rough- 
ly rectangular  in  shape;  there  are  no  suspension 
holes.  Bark  net  floats  have  been  recovered  from 
Hooper  Bay  village  (Oswalt,  1 952a,  p.  55),  Tikchik 
(VanStone,  1968,  pp.  283-284,  PI.  6,  14),  and  Ak- 
ulivichuk  (VanStone,  1970,  p.  68,  PI.  1 1,  1 1). 

A  single  net  mesh  gauge  (30)  is  a  made-over 
fragment  of  a  bone  sled  shoe.  The  gauging  distance 
of  6  cm  may  have  been  designed  for  nets  for  black- 
fish  or  herring  (Fig.  17r).  Wooden  mesh  gauges 
were  recovered  at  Hooper  Bay  village  (Oswalt, 
1952a,  p.  55)  and  Crow  Village  (Oswalt  & 
VanStone,  1967,  p.  32,  PI.  3,  k,  o,  p),  and  antler 
examples  were  found  at  Akulivikchuk  (VanStone, 
1970,  p.  61,  PI.  9,  items  19,20). 

The  broad,  flattened  area  of  a  caribou  antler  tine 
has  been  modified  so  as  to  be  concave  along  its 
working  edge  and  taper  at  the  proximal  end  to 
form  a  handle  (Fig.  1 7s).  This  is  tentatively  iden- 
tified as  a. fish  scaler  {3  \).  Similar  implements  from 
Old  Togiak  are  made  of  caribou  scapulae  (Kowta, 
1963,  p.  147,  PI.  20). 


Trapping 

Aside  from  the  presence  of  the  hair  and  bones  of 
fur-bearing  animals,  the  only  direct  evidence  for 
trapping  is  the  presence  of  five  y^ood  pelt  stretchers 
(32).  Presumably  they  were  made  locally  at  Paug- 
vik rather  than  obtained  as  trade  items.  Hides  of 
freshly  skinned  furbearers  were  turned  and 
stretched  on  these  frames  and  traded  when  dry. 


Of  the  five  stretchers,  four  are  complete  enough 
so  that  their  overall  shape  can  be  determined.  One 
is  long  and  narrow,  the  upper  (nose)  end  being 
extremely  thin  and  pointed  and  the  lower  end 
rounded  and  considerably  wider.  Approximately 
40  cm  from  the  lower  end  there  is  a  triangular 
perforation  (Fig.  19a).  According  to  present-day 
Naknek  trappers,  this  was  a  stretcher  for  fox  pelts. 
The  three  complete  shorter  stretchers  range  in 
length  from  49  to  63  cm,  are  broad  at  the  lower 
end,  and  taper  slightly  to  a  rounded  point  at  the 
upper  end  (Fig.  19b).  One  specimen  has  a  series 
of  vertical  cuts  on  one  surface  and  was  evidently 
used  secondarily  as  a  cutting  board.  Naknek  trap- 
pers identified  these  stretchers  as  intended  for 
muskrat  pelts.  The  single  incomplete  specimen  was 
apparently  once  about  the  same  size  and  shape  as 
the  muskrat  stretchers  but  has  been  cut  off"  at  the 
upper  or  nose  end. 


Transportation 

Artifacts  related  to  travel  are  poorly  represented. 
There  is  a  kayak  deck  beam  (33)  made  from  a 
single  piece  of  spruce  driftwood,  presumably  a 
curved  tree  stump  (Fig.  1 8a).  Data  concerning  the 
construction  of  a  modem  kayak  at  Hooper  Bay 
suggest  that  a  beam  of  this  length  and  curvature 
would  be  positioned  directly  in  front  or  in  back 
of  the  cockpit  (Zimmerly,  1979,  Fig.  74,  p.  95).  A 
complete  antler  kayak  keel  protector  or  shoe  (34) 
has  a  pair  of  holes  with  antler  pegs  for  attaching 
the  shoe  to  the  kayak  (Fig.  451).  Keel  protectors 
were  used  at  each  end  of  the  vessel  to  protect  the 
skin  cover  when  the  boat  was  drawn  up  on  the 
beach. 

Evidence  for  the  use  of  the  large  skin  boat  is 
restricted  to  a  single  umiak  rib  or  riser  (35).  The 
lower  end  is  notched  where  the  rib  would  be  fitted 
to  the  chine,  and  the  upper  end  is  slightly  concave 
to  receive  the  gunwale.  On  the  inner  side  is  a  notch 
where  a  stringer  would  be  attached.  Approxi- 
mately 7  cm  from  the  top  is  a  drilled  hole  and  the 
remains  of  a  sealskin  lashing  for  the  attachment 
of  the  gunwale.  There  is  a  similar  hole  at  the  lower 
end  for  lashing  the  rib  to  a  chine  (Fig.  20b). 

A  poorly  preserved,  wedge-shaped  piece  of  wood 
with  a  rectangular  groove  at  the  upper  end  that 
does  not  completely  penetrate  the  object  (Fig.  2 1  f) 
is  tentatively  identified  as  a  sled  stanchion  (36). 
Stanchions  were  mortised  into  the  top  of  a  runner 
and  extended  to  the  crosspieces  that  made  up  the 
bed  of  the  sled. 


44 


Part  Four 


Even  more  tentative  is  the  identification  of  a 
sled  upright  (37)  for  the  type  of  sled  with  a  railing. 
This  piece  is  wedge  shaped  at  one  end,  above  which 
is  a  large,  oval  perforation,  and  narrows  at  the 
other  end,  which  is  broken  (Fig.  20a).  This  upright, 
if  the  identification  is  correct,  may  have  been  placed 
toward  the  rear  of  the  sled,  with  the  perforation 
intended  to  receive  the  handlebar. 

More  certainly  identified  is  a  fragment  of  a  sled 
runner  (38)  from  the  front  of  a  sled.  The  piece  has 
a  slight  upward  curve  and  a  flat  area  at  the  front 
to  receive  a  crosspiece.  On  the  side  and  in  the  flat 
surface  are  holes  for  lashing  to  hold  the  crosspiece 
in  place.  Along  the  lower  surface  of  the  runner 
fragment  are  holes  for  the  pegs  that  hold  the  sled 
shoes  to  the  runner.  A  number  of  wooden  pegs  are 
still  in  place  (Fig.  21a).  This  fragment  would  have 
been  sufficiently  close  to  the  front  of  the  sled  to 
need  no  slots  in  the  upper  surface  to  receive  stan- 
chions. 

The  15  antler  and  15  whalebone  sled  shoe  (39) 
fragments  range  in  width  from  1 .5  cm  to  4  cm  and 
are  as  much  as  1.2  cm  thick,  although  most  are 
much  thinner.  There  are  irregularly  spaced  holes 
in  the  shoe  fragments  for  pegging  to  the  sled  run- 
ners; in  no  case  are  there  grooves  between  the  holes 
that  would  suggest  lashing  rather  than  pegging  (Fig. 
1 8c,f,g).  Although  it  might  be  supposed  that  antler 
would  be  the  most  satisfactory  material  for  pegs, 
the  only  pegs  in  place  in  a  shoe  fragment  are  of 
wood.  The  sled  runner  described  above  also  has 
wooden  pegs. 

A  single  wooden  snowshoe  crosspiece  (40)  is 
thinned  at  each  end  for  mortising  into  the  outer 
frame.  Along  one  edge  are  three  notches  to  receive 
the  webbing  (Fig.  ISe).  The  absence  of  holes 
through  which  webbing  could  be  strung  suggests 
the  relatively  crude  type  of  snowshoe  with  coarse 
sealskin  webbing  intended  for  use  on  frozen  snow 
or  on  the  rough  surface  of  the  sea  ice  (Nelson, 
1983,  pp.  213-214,  Fig.  64).  Similar  crosspieces 
were  recovered  from  the  Hooper  Bay  Village  site 
(Oswalt,  1952a,  p.  67,  PI.  5,  14)  and  Old  Togiak 
(Kowta,  1963,  pp.  177-178,  PI.  25,  k,l). 


Maintenance  Network 

Tools 

A  large  percentage  of  the  tools  received  from  the 
Paugvik  site  are  traditional  Eskimo  forms,  al- 
though some  incorporate  materials  of  European 
origin,  such  as  metal  for  blades.  As  a  group,  tools 


include  heavy  woodworking  implements  as  well 
as  finer  woodworking  and  antler-carving  imple- 
ments and  skin-working  tools.  In  addition,  there 
are  several  implements  associated  with  general 
maintenance  such  as  rakes,  picks,  and  a  shovel. 

The  most  abundant  tool  in  the  collection  is  the 
antler- splitting  wedge  (41).  A  total  of  30  were  re- 
covered from  the  houses  and  virtually  all  levels  of 
the  trenches.  The  typical  wedge  is  made  of  a  sec- 
tion of  caribou  antler  cut  off"  square  at  one  end  and 
worked  to  a  wedge-shaped  bevel  at  the  other.  On 
most  of  the  wedges  the  bevel  is  unifaced  to  take 
advantage  of  the  hard  outer  part  of  the  antler  for 
the  working  edge.  Some  shaping  of  the  opposite 
face  is  evident  on  most,  however.  The  wedges  vary 
in  length  from  9  cm  to  24  cm  and  average  14  cm 
(Fig.  20f,g,  21b-e).  Only  a  few  show  signs  of  ex- 
tensive use.  One  is  somewhat  different,  having  been 
made  from  the  heavy  base  of  an  antler  and  worked 
to  a  bevel  at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  45  k). 

In  addition  to  antler  wedges,  eight  steel  wedges 
(42)  were  recovered.  Four  are  rectangular  sections 
of  low-grade  steel,  cold  hammered  at  one  end  to 
a  bifacial  bevel  (Fig.  20e).  Two  are  made  from 
iron  spikes  flattened  at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  20d). 
A  single  specimen  is  a  heavy,  oval  steel  fragment 
cut  off"  squarely  at  the  top  and  slightly  tapered  and 
rounded  at  the  other  end;  it  may  be  unfinished 
(Fig.  20c).  The  eighth  specimen  was  apparently 
fashioned  from  a  section  of  thin  steel,  round  in 
cross  section,  possibly  a  machine  part.  It  is  ffat- 
tened  at  the  proximal  end,  where  there  is  a  rect- 
angular notch,  and  flattened  to  a  working  edge  at 
the  distal  end  (Fig.  22d).  All  these  wedges  are 
heavily  rusted. 

For  driving  wedges  to  split  logs,  a  maul  (43)  of 
wood  was  used.  The  single  example  is  round  in 
cross  section  with  a  sharp  shoulder  and  rounded 
handle.  It  shows  signs  of  heavy  use  and  may,  in 
fact,  have  been  discarded  for  that  reason  (Fig.  22a). 
Similar  mauls  of  cottonwood  were  recovered  at 
the  Crow  Village  site  (Oswalt  &  VanStone,  1967, 
PI.  4b). 

There  are  two  iron  axe  heads  (44).  The  first  is 
roughly  rectangular,  with  a  slightly  flaring  edge  and 
a  thickened  poll.  The  eye  is  teardrop  shaped  and 
contains  a  fragment  of  the  helve  (Fig.  22b).  Nine- 
teenth-century axes  were  usually  made  in  two  steps. 
One  end  of  an  elongated,  flat  plate  of  iron  was 
hammered  out  while  hot  and  wrapped  around  a 
pattern  to  form  the  eye  (Russell,  1967,  p.  257). 
Then  a  piece  of  steel  was  inserted  to  serve  as  the 
edge  and  the  joints  were  welded  by  heating  and 
hammering  (Peterson,  1965,  pp.  18-19). 


Collections 


45 


The  second  axe  head  is  broken,  so  that  a  whole 
section  is  missing  on  one  side  from  the  poll  to  a 
point  near  the  edge.  This  specimen  has  a  flat  poll, 
a  widely  flaring  edge,  and  a  pointed  lower  lip  that 
grips  the  handle  (Fig.  22c).  It  closely  resembles  axe 
heads  found  on  Umnak  Island  in  the  Aleutians, 
described  and  illustrated  by  Russell  (1967,  p.  296, 
Fig.  79b),  at  the  Nunakakhnak  site  on  Kodiak  Is- 
land (Knecht  &  Jordan,  1985,  pp.  26-27,  Fig.  8), 
and  at  a  site  on  the  southeast  coast  of  the  Kenai 
Peninsula  (Schaaf,  1988,  p.  20,  PI.  XIV).  Similar 
axe  heads  have  also  been  recovered  from  Russian- 
American  Company  sites  in  Kodiak  (Shinkwin  & 
Andrews,  1 979)  and  Sitka  (Bamett  &  Schumacher, 
1967). 

Of  two  stone  adze  blades  (45),  the  one  from 
House  2  is  made  from  a  slightly  metamorphosed 
sedimentary  rock  that  has  a  pronounced  metallic 
sheen.  It  is  roughly  worked  except  for  a  finely 
ground  working  edge,  which  is  V-shaped  in  cross 
section.  The  blade  tapers  toward  the  proximal  end 
for  insertion  into  a  socketed  head  (Fig.  23f)-  The 
form  is  that  classed  as  Adze  IV  in  prehistoric  col- 
lections of  the  Naknek  region  (Dumond,  1981), 
where  it  is  characteristic  of  the  first  millennium 
A.D.  The  second,  from  the  portion  of  the  1973 
trench  that  is  now  recognized  as  part  of  House  6, 
is  slate,  more  smoothly  polished  and  celtlike  even 
though  the  thin  blade  is  also  polished  only  at  the 
bit  (Fig.  46s);  classed  as  Adze  II  in  the  earlier 
analysis  (Dumond,  1981),  the  form  is  more  char- 
acteristic of  the  latest  prehistoric  period. 

The  one  stone  skin  scraper  blade  (46)  is  flaked 
with  a  finely  polished  bit  on  one  end,  appearing 
adze-like  except  for  its  overall  narrow  shape  (Fig. 
46u).  This  form  in  the  earlier  analysis  (Dumond, 
1981)  was  called  End-Shaver  II  and  is  character- 
istic of  the  early  first  millennium  a.d. 

A  possible  skin  scraper  blade  blank  (47)  of  vol- 
canic stone  is  roughly  chipped  on  all  surfaces, 
probably  preparatory  to  the  final  grinding  of  a 
working  edge  (Fig.  23b). 

A  crooked  knife  handle  (48)  is  made  from  a 
slightly  curved  piece  of  antler.  At  one  end  is  an 
open  notch  5  cm  long  to  hold  the  blade,  which 
was  presumably  lashed  in  place  (Fig.  23a).  There 
are  three  metal  crooked  knife  blades  (49),  curved 
at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  23c,d;  Dumond,  1981,  PI. 
XV,  Fb). 

The  collection  contains  three  composite  knife 
handle  (50)  halves,  two  of  antler  and  one  of  wood, 
flat  on  the  inner  side  and  rounded  on  the  outer 
surface.  Both  of  the  antler  specimens  have  short, 
thin  blade  slots,  possibly  for  metal  blades,  with 


raised  lashing  lips  at  the  distal  end.  One  has  a 
raised  lashing  knob  and  narrow  lashing  grooves  at 
the  proximal  end,  and  the  other  has  only  a  single 
lashing  groove  in  this  position.  There  are  three 
engraved  circle-dot  designs  on  one  handle  half  (Fig. 
23h).  The  wooden  knife  half  has  a  longer,  wider 
blade  slit  and  a  lashing  lip  at  the  distal  end  (Fig. 
23g). 

Two  end-bladed  knife  blades  (5 1)  of  low-grade 
steel  have  long,  thin  tangs  that  narrow  toward  the 
proximal  end  (Figs.  44b,  45d;  Dumond,  1981,  PI. 
XV,  Fa). 

A  rodent  incisor  knife  (52)  has  the  bit  still  in 
place,  hafted  in  a  line  with  the  long  axis  of  a  wood- 
en handle;  there  is  a  pronounced  lashing  lip.  The 
handle  is  constricted  toward  the  proximal  end  and 
on  one  side  is  a  circular  depression,  which  may 
have  contained  a  glass  bead  or  some  other  deco- 
ration (Fig.  23e). 

A  complete  engraving  tool  (53)  has  a  badly  cor- 
roded metal  blade  set  into  a  slit  in  a  crude  wooden 
handle  that  has  a  pronounced  lashing  lip;  the  lash- 
ing is  of  narrow  strips  of  baleen  (Fig.  23n).  Another 
example  consists  of  only  the  distal  end  of  the  han- 
dle with  a  lashing  knob  and  an  asymmetrical  metal 
blade  (Fig.  45f). 

There  are  two  metal  knife  or  engraver  fragments 
(54)  that  cannot  be  further  identified  with  certain- 
ty. One  is  simply  the  proximal  end  of  a  metal  blade 
embedded  in  part  of  an  antler  handle  (Fig.  23o). 
The  other  is  half  of  a  composite  antler  handle,  at 
the  distal  end  of  which  is  a  broad  slot  and  lashing 
knob.  It  may  be  part  of  an  engraving  tool  (Fig. 
23i). 

The  21  whetstones  have  for  description  been 
divided  into  five  types  based  on  the  nature  of  the 
material  from  which  they  are  made.  The  eight 
specimens  of  type  /  (55)  are  of  granitic  rock,  with 
a  variety  of  sizes  and  shapes  represented.  All  are 
fragmentary  and  are  worked  on  two  or  more  sur- 
faces (Fig.  23p-r).  The  eight  of  type  2  (56)  are  of 
shale;  all  are  fragmentary  and  have  been  worked 
on  one  or  more  surfaces  (Fig.  231,m).  The  three 
type  3  whetstones  (57)  are  fragments  of  pumice; 
two  are  small  and  have  been  worked  on  one  surface 
(Fig.  22e),  whereas  the  larger  piece  has  a  series  of 
parallel,  deep,  narrow  grooves  on  one  surface  and 
appears  to  have  been  used  as  a  sharpener  for  items 
such  as  ulu  blades  and  steel  needles  (Fig.  24).  The 
single  type  4  specimen  (58)  is  of  medium-grain 
sandstone,  worked  on  all  four  surfaces  (Fig.  23j). 
The  single  example  of  type  5  (59),  of  schist,  is 
worked  on  the  two  narrow  surfaces  (Fig.  23k). 

The  category  stone  saw  (60),  of  which  there  are 


46        Part  Four 


three  in  the  collection,  is  separated  from  other 
abrasive  stones  on  the  basis  of  form  rather  than 
material.  Generally  a  relatively  thin  sandstone  slab, 
one  edge  shows  heavy  wear  on  two  intersecting 
planes  (Fig.  46o).  The  function  of  the  artifact  is 
made  clear  by  the  numerous  slate  slabs  with  saw 
kerfs,  illustrating  the  technique  of  abrasive  sawing 
and  snapping  by  which  the  plentiful  slate  projectile 
inserts,  and  presumably  some  slate  ulu  blades,  were 
manufactured. 

The  ulu  or  woman's  knife  is  represented  in  the 
Paugvik  collection  by  two  complete  metal  imple- 
ments, three  metal  blades,  one  whole  slate  ulu 
blade,  various  fragments,  and  an  incomplete 
wooden  handle.  The  most  impressive  complete 
metal  ulu  (61)  has  a  blade  of  low-grade  steel  with 
a  semilunar  edge  and  a  large,  thick  wooden  handle 
with  a  centrally  located  oval  slot  near  the  proximal 
surface.  Narrow  striations  on  both  sides  of  the 
handle  suggest  that  it  was  used  occasionally  as  a 
cutting  board  (Fig.  25b).  The  other  complete  ulu 
is  in  very  fragile  condition.  It  also  has  a  steel  blade 
and  a  narrow  wooden  handle  that  turns  upward 
at  one  end  (Fig.  25a). 

Two  of  the  metal  ulu  blades  (62)  are  of  a  form 
that  appears  to  be  unique  for  the  Paugvik  site.  Both 
have  a  semilunar  edge,  and  extending  from  one 
end  is  a  narrow  metal  strip  that  curves  upward 
and  over  the  top  of  the  blade  and  ends  in  a  tight 
circle  or  spiral  (Fig.  25c,d).  These  blades  are  pre- 
sumed not  to  have  been  of  local  manufacture  and 
could  be  used  without  the  addition  of  a  wooden 
handle.  Although  the  shape  of  the  handle  of  one 
of  the  complete  ulus  (Fig.  25b)  seems  to  suggest 
that  it  covers  such  a  curved  appendage,  at  the  time 
it  was  excavated  the  wood  of  the  handle  was  wet 
and  soft  enough  to  permit  examination  of  the  haft 
edge  of  the  blade,  which  was  disappointingly 
square.  The  third  metal  blade  is  made  from  tinned 
steel  plate  of  the  type  normally  associated  with  the 
manufacture  of  tin  cans.  Flat  across  the  top,  it  has 
a  semilunar  edge  (Fig.  25e). 

The  single  whole  slate  ulu  blade  (63)  is  tabular 
in  form  and  4  mm  thick,  with  a  cutting  edge  nearly 
60  mm  in  length  (Fig.  46t).  The  type  was  earlier 
classed  (Dumond,  198 1)  as  Ulu  III.  Six  additional 
ulu  fragments  (64)  may  relate  to  the  same  type, 
although  at  least  one  of  the  fragments  suggests  the 
presence  of  a  tang  set  off  from  the  body  of  the 
blade. 

The  unattached  ulu  handle  (65)  has  a  broad  blade 
slit  possibly  intended  to  receive  a  stone  blade  with- 
out a  tang  (Fig.  45a). 

The  collection  contains  a  single  pair  of  badly 


corroded  metal  scissors  (66),  apparently  of  fully 
modem  form.  The  temptation  is  to  consider  these 
a  much  more  recent  intrusion  into  the  site,  but  the 
provenience,  essentially  on  the  small  piece  of  the 
floor  excavated  around  the  hearth  of  House  2A, 
seemed  undisturbed  and  genuine  enough  at  the 
time  of  excavation. 

Five  objects  of  bone  and  antler  have  been  iden- 
tified as  awls  (67).  A  seal  scapula  is  sharpened  to 
a  point  at  one  end  (Fig.  25g)  as  is  a  caribou  met- 
acarpus or  metatarsus.  The  other  three  specimens 
are  simply  antler  fragments  worked  to  a  tapering 
point  at  one  end  (Fig.  25h). 

Four  retouched  stone  flakes  apparently  served 
as  scrapers  or  knives  (68).  Three  of  these,  retouched 
along  one  edge  (Fig.  25f),  presumably  were  used 
unhafted,  but  a  fourth,  from  the  1 96 1  excavations, 
is  partially  wrapped  with  a  strip  of  lead  (Dumond, 
1981,  PI.  XV,  Cj),  suggesting  that  it  must  have 
been  wedged  into  a  haft.  Although  the  other  three 
objects  could  belong  to  an  earlier,  prehistoric  ar- 
chaeological horizon  of  the  region,  the  fourth  clearly 
does  not.  In  addition,  there  are  two  scrapers  made 
from  retouched  Augments  of  green  bottle  glass  (69), 
both  about  7  cm  in  thickness  (Fig.  25i).  Chipped 
glass  scrapers  have  been  reported  from  several  his- 
toric sites  in  Alaska,  and  the  form  is  also  common 
elsewhere  in  North  America. 

The  collection  contains  two  ivory  pick  or  mat- 
tock blades  (70),  one  of  which  is  complete.  The 
complete  specimen  is  flattened  along  one  surface, 
presumably  for  lashing  to  a  wooden  handle,  al- 
though there  are  no  lashing  grooves.  The  working 
edge  is  beveled  and  slightly  convex  (Fig.  26a).  The 
second  blade  is  fragmentary;  only  the  upper  part 
is  present.  One  surface  is  flattened,  and  there  is  a 
broad  groove  along  one  side.  Approximately  1 1 
cm  from  the  distal  end  is  a  broad  lashing  groove 
(Fig.  25j). 

A  shovel  blade  (71)  is  made  from  the  shoulder 
blade  of  a  large  sea  lion  or  walrus.  The  acromion 
process  has  been  cut  away,  and  a  rectangular  slot 
to  receive  the  handle  extends  downward  from  the 
glenoid  fossa  for  a  distance  of  9.5  cm  (Fig.  26c). 
A  similar  shovel  blade  was  recovered  at  the  Old 
Togiak  site  (Kowta,  1963,  p.  284,  PI.  56a). 

Two  rake  prongs  (72)  are  made  of  antlers.  Oval 
holes  for  attachment  of  the  handles  have  been 
drilled  near  the  proximal  ends,  but  the  antlers  are 
otherwise  unaltered  (Fig.  27b).  Nelson  (1983,  pp. 
74-75,  PI.  XXXV,  2)  described  and  illustrated  a 
somewhat  similar  rake  from  Sabotnisky  on  the 
lower  Yukon,  where  rakes  were  used  to  remove 
refuse  from  the  fireplace  in  the  qasqig  or  men's 


Collections        47 


house,  for  clearing  away  refuse  material  while 
building  a  house,  and  for  clearing  drift  material 
from  places  where  nets  or  fish  traps  were  set  in 
rivers  and  streams. 

Tentatively  identified  as  an  icepick  or  chisel  (7 3) 
is  a  length  of  antler  rounded  and  worked  to  a  wedge 
shape  at  the  distal  end.  The  upper  half  of  this 
implement  is  deeply  recessed,  presumably  to  re- 
ceive a  long  wooden  handle.  In  the  center  of  this 
recessed  area  is  a  round  lashing  hole,  and  there  is 
a  lashing  knob  at  the  proximal  end  (Fig.  27e). 

Three  flattened  pieces  of  wood,  oval  in  cross 
section,  are  tentatively  identified  as  snow  beaters 
(74)  for  beating  snow  from  clothing  and  other  ob- 
jects. The  two  complete  specimens  taper  slightly 
at  the  proximal  end  to  form  a  handle  (Fig.  27a,d). 
Somewhat  similar  implements  from  various  lo- 
cations in  Alaska  were  described  and  illustrated 
by  Nelson  (1983,  pp.  77-78,  Fig.  21). 

Unidentified  metal  objects  (75)  that  are  pre- 
sumed to  have  been  intended  as  some  form  of  tool 
include  a  section  of  gun  barrel  partially  flattened 
at  one  end,  possibly  for  use  as  a  hide  flesher  (Fig. 
28f),  and  a  heavy  iron  ferule  that  has  an  attach- 
ment hole  at  the  proximal  end  and  tapers  to  the 
distal  end,  which  is  broken  (Fig.  27c).  A  piece  of 
steel  with  what  appears  to  be  a  concave  working 
edge  may  be  the  blade  for  an  ulu. 

Numerous  items  of  stone  are  apparently  arti- 
facts in  the  process  of  manufacture.  Six  of  these 
are  rather  clearly  sawed  slate  blanks  (76)  for  insert 
blades,  completely  cut  to  basic  form,  but  not  yet 
sharpened  and  faceted  (Fig.  46p>-r).  The  majority 
of  the  rest  are  5 1  sawed  slate  pieces  (77)  charac- 
terized by  the  presence  of  saw  kerfs  but  of  no  ap- 
parent final  shape.  There  are  also  25  miscellaneous 
polished  stone  scraps  (78),  largely  slate,  that  may 
be  unidentifiable  fragments  of  ulus  or  insert  blades 
or,  in  a  few  cases,  chips  from  the  resharpening  of 
stone  adze  blades. 

The  1 7  crudely  chipped  bifaces  (79)  of  slate  or 
shale  are  also  presumably  artifacts  in  process  of 
manufacture  (Fig.  46b-d).  These  are  scattered 
through  the  site,  but  more  than  half  were  recovered 
from  the  1973  trench.  Of  those  recovered  in  1985, 
six  are  lanceolate  in  form,  55-90  mm  in  length, 
and  are  presumably  blanks  awaiting  polishing  into 
lance  heads.  Although  chipping  before  grinding  is 
indicated  for  some  Pavik  phase  artifacts,  these  bi- 
faces are  also  reminiscent  of  artifacts  termed  lan- 
ceolate biface  classes  I  and  II  (i.e.,  those  above  and 
below  70  mm  in  length),  which  are  especially  char- 
acteristic of  the  Brooks  River  Camp  phase  of  the 
early  second  millennium  a.d.  in  the  Naknek  region 


(Dumond,  1981),  when  the  basic  shape  of  slate 
implements  was  formed  before  polishing  by  chip- 
ping rather  than  sawing.  One  of  these  from  Paug- 
vik  is  a  slate  ellipsoid  50  mm  long,  again  remi- 
niscent of  the  Camp  phase. 

One  slab  of  a  fractured  cobble  is  heavily  stained 
with  red  hematite  in  its  fortuitous  basin,  evidently 
from  use  as  an  ochre  anvil  (80)  in  crushing  paint. 
There  are  eight  heavily  scarred  pebbles  that  have 
been  used  as  hammerstones  or  pounders  (81). 


Household  Equipment 

All  domestic  equipment  not  considered  in  previ- 
ous sections  is  described  here,  including  wooden 
serving  and  storage  vessels  and  utensils,  pottery 
and  stone  lamps,  other  ceramics,  and  woven  ma- 
terials. 

There  are  three  wooden  compound  vessels  (82) 
that  are  sufficiently  complete  so  that  their  size  and 
form  can  be  determined  with  certainty.  These  ves- 
sels are  of  two-piece  construction,  consisting  of  a 
flat,  oval  bottom  and  a  thin  strip  bent  around  to 
form  the  sides.  The  overlapping  ends  of  the  side 
pieces  are  fastened  together  by  sewing  strips  of  root 
through  holes  drilled  for  the  purpose.  Base  pieces 
have  chamfered  edges  to  fit  into  a  groove  around 
the  inner  edge  of  the  side  pieces. 

The  first  of  these  vessels  is  complete  except  for 
a  section  of  one  side.  The  two  ends  of  the  side, 
which  is  4.5  cm  high,  are  lap-spliced  with  root 
through  two  parallel  rows  of  slits.  On  the  bottom 
of  this  vessel  are  two  shallow  incisions  in  the  form 
of  a  cross  (Fig.  26b).  The  second  vessel  is  very 
shallow  and  complete  but  badly  warped;  a  portion 
of  the  bottom  is  split.  The  two  ends  of  the  side, 
which  is  3  cm  high,  are  fastened  together  with  root 
through  a  single  row  of  slits  (Fig.  28b).  Much  of 
the  rim  of  the  third  vessel  is  missing,  but  it  is  clear 
that  the  two  ends  of  the  side  piece  were  lashed 
together  through  two  parallel  rows  of  slits.  In  ad- 
dition to  the  groove  on  the  inner  edge  of  the  side, 
four  wooden  pegs,  one  on  each  side  and  end,  held 
the  bottom  in  place. 

Seven  fragments  of  compound  vessel  sides  (83) 
were  recovered,  only  one  of  which  is  complete 
enough  to  indicate  the  height  of  the  vessel.  This 
fragment  is  from  a  much  larger  container  than  the 
complete  vessels  just  described  and  lacks  a  groove 
running  around  the  lower  edge  to  receive  the  vessel 
bottom  (Fig.  28c).  A  much  smaller  fragment  does 
show  this  groove  (Fig.  28d).  The  rims  on  three 


48 


Part  Four 


fragments  are  rounded.  All  fragments  show  lashing 
that  held  the  two  ends  of  the  side  together.  On  the 
two  more  complete  fragments  the  ends  of  the  side 
were  fastened  with  root  lashing  through  a  single 
row  of  slits. 

The  collection  contains  17  fragmentary  com- 
pound vessel  bottoms  (84),  and  on  the  basis  of  size 
and  shape  two  types  can  be  differentiated.  The  first 
type  includes  six  fragments  of  oval  vessel  bottoms, 
none  of  which  are  chamfered  to  fit  into  grooves 
in  the  sides.  Most  are  from  relatively  large  vessels, 
the  longest  being  approximately  29  cm  in  length, 
the  smallest  8  cm  (Fig.  28a,e).  Three  apparently 
consisted  of  two  pieces  of  wood,  probably  equal 
halves,  pegged  together  with  wooden  pegs.  Both 
lashing  and  pegs  were  used  to  fasten  two  of  these 
bottoms  to  the  sides.  Two  bottoms  were  appar- 
ently used  as  cutting  boards,  perhaps  after  being 
discarded  as  vessels,  and  two  are  badly  charred. 

The  second  type  of  vessel  bottom,  of  which  there 
are  six  in  the  collection,  is  very  small.  All  were 
apparently  round  or  nearly  so  and  may  be  the  bases 
of  trinket  or  snuffboxes  similar  to  those  illustrated 
by  Nelson  (1983,  PI.  LXXXVI)  rather  than  of 
household  containers  (Fig.  29i).  It  is  also  possible 
that  one  or  more  of  these  round,  flat  pieces  of  wood 
are  poke  stoppers  associated  with  the  storage  of 
food  or  seal  oil.  However,  they  lack  the  deep  lash- 
ing grooves  usually  found  on  plugs  and  stoppers. 

Nine  relatively  whole  spoons  (85),  eight  of  antler 
and  one  of  wood,  and  two  additional  fragments 
were  excavated  from  the  Paugvik  site.  Three  of 
the  antler  specimens  have  elongated  oval  bowls 
and  straight  handles  of  various  lengths  (Fig. 
29a,c,g).  Two  have  deeper,  more  carefully  shaped 
bowls;  the  handle  of  one  widens  at  the  proximal 
end  (Fig.  29d),  and  the  handle  of  the  other  has  a 
pronounced  curve  (Fig.  45i;  Dumond,  1981,  PI. 
XVII,  Dg).  One  specimen  has  paired  parallel  in- 
cised lines  running  around  the  edges  (Fig.  29c), 
and  another  has  a  ribbed  handle  with  a  single 
straight  incised  line  in  the  center  of  the  bowl  (Fig. 
29a).  The  single  wooden  spoon  is  much  more 
crudely  made;  it  is  a  narrow  strip  of  wood  hol- 
lowed out  at  the  wider  distal  end  to  form  the  bowl 
(Fig.  29e). 

Of  the  fragmentary  spoons,  one  is  the  handle  of 
a  much  larger  wooden  specimen  broken  off  at  the 
point  where  it  widens  to  form  the  bowl  (Fig.  30b). 
The  other,  of  antler,  consists  of  the  bowl  only. 
Running  down  the  center  is  a  single  incised  line 
that  terminates  in  a  Y  pattern  ornamented  with 
spurred  lines  (Fig.  29f).  Spoons  similar  to  those 
from  Paugvik  were  described  and  illustrated  by 


Nelson  (1983,  p.  69,  PI.  XXX,  207)  and  were  re- 
covered from  the  Old  Togiak  site  (Kowta,  1963, 
p.  281,  PI.  55,  a-g). 

Five  large  spoonlike  objects  are  identified  as  la- 
dles (86).  Two  antler  specimens  have  spatulate 
bowls  that  are  flat  at  the  distal  end  (Fig.  30e,g). 
The  wooden  ladle  consists  of  a  bowl  only,  which 
is  shaped  like  the  bowls  of  the  complete  spoons 
but  is  larger  (Fig.  300-  Two  ladles,  one  of  antler 
and  the  other  of  bone,  are  simply  large,  irregularly 
shaped  bowls  that  would  have  had  separate,  at- 
tached handles  (Fig.  30c,d).  The  antler  specimen 
has  a  pair  of  drilled  holes  at  the  proximal  end  for 
this  purpose  (Fig.  30c).  These  two  objects  may  be 
small  shovels. 

The  Paugvik  collection  contains  one  complete 
dipper  (87)  and  two  fragments.  The  complete  dip- 
per of  wood  is  carefully  made,  with  a  bowl  that 
has  a  flat  bottom  and  sides  that  slope  out  toward 
the  rim.  The  handle  flares  at  the  proximal  end, 
which  is  rounded  (Fig.  30a).  A  similar  dipper, 
identified  as  a  ladle,  was  recovered  at  Crow  Village 
(Oswalt  &  VanStone,  1967,  p.  35,  PI.  5,  f).  A  single 
small  fragment  from  the  point  where  the  handle 
joins  the  bowl  appears  to  be  from  a  similar  dipper. 

A  large  dipper  fragment  is  made  from  a  single 
piece  of  wood  carefully  fashioned  into  a  thin  han- 
dle at  one  end  and  thinned  down  to  a  wedge-shaped 
point  at  the  other.  The  wood  was  then  steamed 
and  bent  to  form  the  sides  of  a  circular  bowl  and 
lashed  just  inside  the  base  of  the  handle  (Fig.  30h). 
The  bottom  would  have  been  a  separate  piece. 
This  type  of  dipper,  common  throughout  south- 
western Alaska,  was  described  and  illustrated  by 
Nelson  (1983,  pp.  65-66,  PI.  XXIX,  6-8). 

A  spoon-shaped  water  bag  nozzle  (88)  of  antler 
somewhat  resembles  similar  objects  from  south- 
western Alaska  illustrated  by  Nelson  (1983,  p.  74, 
PI.  XXXIIIa,  5).  These  bags,  made  from  the  stom- 
achs or  bladders  of  animals,  were  used  to  carry 
water  or  oil  while  on  hunting  trips  at  sea;  they  had 
wooden  stoppers  (Fig.  29j).  The  collection  also 
contains  two  other  antler  nozzles  that  obviously 
are  for  containers  of  some  sort  (Fig.  29h,l).  One 
of  these  has  a  projecting  lip  (Fig.  29h)  and  may 
have  been  a  bladder  float  nozzle  (89). 

Two  large  fragments  of  conical,  loosely  woven, 
twined  grass  bags  (90)  appear  to  be  from  those 
that  according  to  Nelson  (1983,  p.  203)  were  used 
to  hold  fish.  The  tops  consist  of  two  parallel  rows 
of  two-strand  braided  grass.  Bags  with  similar  tops, 
although  more  closely  woven,  were  illustrated  by 
Fitzhugh  and  Kaplan  (1982,  p.  125)  and  Kaplan 


Collections        49 


and  Barsness  (1986,  p.  122).  Fish  bags  of  this  type 
were  also  used  on  Nunivak  Island  (Lantis,  1946, 
Fig.  17  opp.  p.  177). 

Twined  work  is  also  represented  by  seven  mat 
or  bag  fragments  (9 1 )  varying  in  fineness  of  weave. 
The  coarser  examples  may  be  parts  of  sleeping 
maps  similar  to  one  described  and  illustrated  by 
Nelson  ( 1 983,  p.  203,  PI.  LXXIV,  1 5),  but  all  four 
could  be  bag  fragments.  All  fragments  may  have 
been  more  tightly  woven  than  they  appear  at  pres- 
ent (Figs.  31-33).  In  addition  to  the  twined  frag- 
ments, the  collection  contains  eight  fragments  of 
braided  grass  cordage  (92)  (Figs.  34,  35). 

The  single  fragment  of  a  birch  bark  basket  (93) 
indicates  that  the  vessel  was  made  from  one  piece 
of  bark  folded  at  the  four  comers  and  then  stitched, 
probably  with  spruce  root  as  indicated  by  the  large 
and  widely  spaced  stitching  holes.  Three  small  birch 
bark  fragments  may  also  be  from  baskets.  Con- 
tainers of  birch  bark  are  commonly  associated  with 
interior  Eskimo  settlements  in  southwestern  Alas- 
ka and  have  been  recovered  from  the  Crow  Vil- 
lage, Tikchik,  and  Akulivikchuk  sites  (Oswalt  & 
VanStone,  1967,  pp.  47^8,  PI.  lib;  VanStone, 
1968,  p.  283;  1970,  p.  67,  PI.  11,  13). 

The  collection  includes  several  metal  kettle  parts 
(94).  A  cast  iron  kettle  rim  fragment  includes  a 
circular  lug  welded  to  the  rim  and  is  from  an  ex- 
tremely large  vessel  (Fig.  30i).  There  are  also  two 
lugs  for  kettle  handles  of  the  type  that  was  riveted 
to  the  kettle  rim  on  opposite  sides  just  below  the 
lip.  One  lug  is  brass  (Fig.  29k)  and  the  other  is  cast 
iron  (Fig.  45b).  A  brass  kettle  lid  (94)  has  raised 
edges  and  a  ring  handle.  Attached  to  the  handle  is 
a  short  strip  of  two-strand  braided  grass  (Fig.  45j). 
A  round  brass  box  (95)  has  a  convex  top  with 
recessed  lower  edges  and  a  flat  bottom  (Fig.  45g). 

The  saucer-shaped  pottery  lamp  (96),  wide- 
spread through  southwestern  Alaska,  is  repre- 
sented by  four  virtually  complete  examples  and 
sherds  that  represent  seven  additional  lamps.  The 
complete  specimens  are  all  undecorated  and  are 
fired  poorly,  if  at  all.  The  temper  of  these  is  pre- 
dominantly grass,  although  some  gravel  can  be 
noted  in  at  least  one.  The  walls  are  thick,  and  the 
pronounced  rims  are  rounded.  Three  lamps  are 
extremely  shallow  (Fig.  36a,  b),  while  the  fourth 
is  deeper  (Fig.  37a). 

Grass  is  also  the  predominant  temper  in  the 
fragments,  with  one  exception  that  appears  to  be 
tempered  primarily  with  hair.  All  are  poorly  fired, 
and  at  least  two  are  from  lamps  even  shallower 
than  any  of  the  complete  examples;  on  one  of  these 
fragments  the  lip  barely  projects  above  the  surface. 


Oswalt  (1952b,  pp.  21-22)  suggested  that  saucer- 
shaped  clay  lamps  were  derived  from  the  conical- 
bottomed,  wide-mouth  clay  lamp  common  in 
northern  Alaska  during  the  early  phases  of  Eskimo 
prehistory.  Early  examples  of  the  saucer-shaped 
clay  lamp  have  been  excavated  from  sites  in  the 
Kobuk  River-Kotzebue  Sound  region,  from  which 
they  evidently  spread  to  the  Bristol  Bay-Norton 
Sound  area. 

Four  stone  lamps  (97)  were  also  recovered  at 
Paugvik.  One  of  these  is  crudely  worked  from  a 
roughly  circular  piece  of  granitic  rock  flattened  on 
one  side  and  hollowed  out  on  the  other.  It  is  en- 
crusted with  carbon  (Fig.  29b).  Two  others  are 
heavy  stone  spalls  with  fortuitous  basins  that  ap- 
pear from  carbon  deposits  to  have  been  pressed 
into  service  as  lamps.  A  fourth,  also  of  granitic 
rock,  has  been  carefully  worked  to  an  elongated 
oval  shape.  This  lamp  is  shallow  with  a  rounded 
lip  and  shows  signs  of  use  (Fig.  37b).  Because  it 
resembles  lamps  from  phases  of  the  first  millen- 
nium A.D.  (e.g.,  Dumond,  1981,  PI.  VI,  Fc,  PI.  XI, 
De),  it  may  have  been  salvaged  by  Paugvik  resi- 
dents from  earlier  sites  in  the  Naknek  River  re- 
gion. 

In  addition  to  the  bottle  glass  scrapers,  the  col- 
lection contains  six  small  bottle  glass  fragments 
(98).  Two  of  these,  one  green  and  the  other  brown, 
are  approximately  0.8  cm  thick;  a  third  is  a  bottom 
fragment  from  a  small  bottle  of  clear  glass.  The 
remaining  fragments  are  extremely  small  and  thin, 
ranging  in  thickness  from  1  to  2  mm.  One  is  a 
fragment  of  a  faceted  bottle. 

Excavations  at  the  Paugvik  site  in  1961  and 
1973  yielded  only  eight  nondescript  chinaware 
fragments  (99).  In  1985,  40  fragments  were  re- 
covered. Most  of  those  collected,  like  those  from 
other  historic  sites  in  southwestern  Alaska,  are 
sherds  of  factory-made  ironstone  (earthenware),  a 
utilitarian  stoneware  variant  that  was  extremely 
popular  during  the  19th  century,  particularly  in 
frontier  areas,  because  of  its  strength  and  dura- 
bility. 

Chinaware  sherds  from  the  1985  excavations 
were  each  assigned  a  serial  number  and  then  a 
potential  vessel  number,  as  nearly  as  such  an  as- 
signment could  be  made  from  appearance  alone, 
for  none  of  the  sherds  could  be  fitted  to  one  an- 
other (Table  3).  Looked  at  in  this  way  the  40  sherds 
could  come  from  no  more  than  3 1  vessels,  but  in 
two  cases  where  sherds  were  indicated  as  possibly 
from  the  same  vessel  (nos.  3  and  24,  and  nos.  1 5, 
34,  and  37)  the  proveniences  of  the  separate  sherds 
were  so  widely  separated  that  their  origins  in  a 


50 


Part  Fovu- 


single  vessel  seems  unlikely.  Thus  the  40  sherds 
probably  represent  at  least  35  different  vessels. 

Factory-made  ceramics  are  commonly  the  most 
voluminous  trade  goods  excavated  from  historic 
sites  in  southwestern  Alaska.  Nearly  6,000  chi- 
naware  fragments  have  been  excavated  from  six 
published  sites  along  the  Kuskokwim  and  Nush- 
agak  rivers  and  on  Lake  Clark  (Oswalt  &  Van- 
Stone,  1967,  pp.  52-55;  VanStone,  1968,  pp.  288- 
292,  1970,  pp.  74-81,  1972,  pp.  55-60;  VanStone 
&  Townsend,  1970,  pp.  75-86;  Oswalt,  1980,  pp. 
70-73).  Decorative  types  recovered  from  these  sites 
consist  primarily  of  plain,  under-glazed  lined,  cut 
sponge-stamped,  hand-painted,  and  transfer- 
printed  wares.  Although  there  is  some  late  19th- 
and  early  20th-century  American  ironstone  in  the 
assemblages,  the  majority  is  the  standard  British 
export  ware  described  by  Jewett  (1878)  that  sus- 
tained the  North  American  market  in  the  19th 
century. 

British  ceramics  reached  Alaska  through  the 
Russian-American  Company,  which  found  it 
cheaper  and  more  convenient  to  obtain  manufac- 
tured goods  that  reached  the  Northwest  Coast  on 
British  and  American  ships  rather  than  to  rely  on 
the  long  overland  or  ocean  supply  lines  to  Russia. 
In  1839  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  contracted 
to  supply  Russian  America  with  provisions  and 
manufactured  goods,  and  the  agreement  became 
effective  in  1840.  After  10  years,  the  agreement 
was  not  renewed  (Davidson,  1941;  Gibson,  1976, 
pp.  83,  139,  200-208).  Nevertheless,  the  ceramic 
supply  network,  which  came  to  include  an  increas- 
ing number  of  Staffordshire  and  other  British  pot- 
teries, continued  after  the  sale  of  Alaska  to  the 
United  States  in  1867. 

The  number  of  exotic  contact-period  ceramic 
fragments  recovered  from  the  Paugvik  site  is  thus 
unusually  small.  There  are  no  identifiable  maker's 
marks,  and  only  five  patterns  can  be  identified: 
"Willow,"  "Watteau,"  "Cherry  Picking,"  "Cam- 
illa," and  possibly  "Davenport"  (Fig.  38).  Only 
the  ubiquitous  "Willow"  pattern  has  been  report- 
ed from  all  the  other  excavated  sites  in  south- 
western Alaska,  and  the  "Cherry  Picking"  pattern 
occurs  at  Crow  Village  (Table  3).  The  "Camilla" 
and  "Watteau"  patterns  were  recovered  at  the  Nu- 
nakakhnak  site  on  Kodiak  Island  (Knecht  &  Jor- 
dan, 1985,  Table  1,  p.  25). 

The  number  of  decorated  china  ware  sherds  from 
the  Paugvik  site  is  also  too  small  to  permit  mean- 
ingful comparison  with  other  sites  and  thus  at  first 
glance  seems  not  to  provide  new  information  re- 
lating to  the  chronological  or  distributional  ques- 


tions associated  with  this  particular  trade  item.  It 
is  certainly  significant,  however,  that  the  residents 
of  Paugvik  apparently  had  restricted  access  to  ce- 
ramics, as  compared  with  the  residents  of  other 
excavated  village  and  trading  post  sites  in  the  re- 
gion. 

Aside  from  the  clay  lamps,  ceramics  of  aborig- 
inal type  are  of  what  has  been  classed  as  Naknek 
ware  (100-106),  one  of  two  ware  types  known  for 
the  region  prehistorically  (Dumond,  1981).  Nak- 
nek ware  vessels  are  patch  modeled  and  paddled 
against  the  hand,  tan  to  black  in  color,  baked  in 
an  open  fire,  and  when  found  commonly  have 
caked  food  residues  in  the  interior.  The  range  of 
shapes  in  any  one  period  is  limited.  Techniques 
of  clay  treatment  are  poor,  resulting  in  consider- 
able variation  in  frequency  and  distribution  of 
temper,  which  is  predominantly  water-worn  grav- 
el in  such  quantity  as  to  result  in  a  pronouncedly 
crumbly  fracture,  and  varying  directly  in  size  with 
the  vessel  wall  thickness.  Grass  may  also  be  pres- 
ent, and  temper  fraction  may  vary  significantly 
over  different  parts  of  the  vessel. 

Naknek  ware  is  then  divided  into  two  subclass- 
es, depending  simply  on  thickness,  in  a  division 
that  has  been  shown  to  be  temporally  significant 
(Dumond,  198 1).  Naknek  thin  ware  has  walls  less 
than  10  mm  in  thickness  and  is  often  relatively 
hard.  Naknek  thick  ware  has  walls  of  10  mm  or 
more,  sometimes  more  than  double  that  dimen- 
sion (Fig.  39).  In  the  Paugvik  collection  there  is 
no  overall  surface  decoration,  so  that  the  only  two 
types  represented  are  Naknek  thin  plain,  by  far 
the  more  common,  and  Naknek  thick  plain,  much 
of  which  in  fact  probably  pertains  to  an  earlier 
occupation  in  the  vicinity.  In  keeping  with  the  less 
than  consistent  manufacturing  techniques,  some 
otherwise  thin  vessels  may  have  a  few  reinforced 
sections  that  in  small  sherds  may  be  classed  as 
thick;  a  few  other  thick  sherds  may  actually  be 
derived  from  lamps  (Fig.  39L)  rather  than  from 
the  ordinary  Naknek  ware  cooking  vessels. 

Within  each  type,  varieties  are  distinguished  by 
vessel  shape,  chiefly  indicated  by  rim  sherds.  There 
are  four  of  these  varieties  represented  at  Paugvik. 

The  Camp  variety  (102,  106)  appears  in  both 
types  but  is  far  more  common  in  thick  plain.  The 
variety  is  characterized  by  a  globular  shape  with 
in-sloping  lips  that  restrict  a  neckless  opening  (Fig. 
39K,L).  The  base  tends  to  be  small,  although  not 
pointed  but  tapering  to  a  flat  area  (Dumond,  1981, 
Fig.  A.l).  There  are  examples  of  this  rim  in  the 
Paugvik  collection  but  no  examples  of  the  base. 

The  Pavik  variety  (101)  is  confined  to  the  Nak- 


CoUections        5 1 


Table  3.    Chinaware  sherds  from  the  1985  Paugvik  excavations. 


Sherd  Vessel 

no.  Unif  no.  Description 

1  HI  1  Base  and  foot  of  a  transfer-printed  cup  (Fig.  38b).  The  letters  ORT  on  the 

base  are  probably  final  letters  of  the  word  DAVENPORT,  a  factory  at 
Longport  in  the  Staffordshire  Potteries.  This  firm,  which  exported  widely 
to  North  America,  was  in  existence  from  c.  1793  to  1887,  and  after  1850 
their  wares  were  normally  marked  with  the  name  Davenport  (Godden, 
1964,  p.  189). 

2  HI  2  Plain  (?)  fragment  of  ironstone  from  a  plate  or  saucer. 

3  H2  3  Blue  transfer-printed  cup  rim  with  handle  junction  (Fig.  38g),  manufactured 

by  the  Copeland  Spode  factory.  The  pattern  is  "Watteau"  (Sussman, 
1979,  p.  231)  and  has  been  recovered  from  Hudson's  Bay  Company  sites 
in  western  Canada. 

4  H2  4  Fragment  of  transfer-printed  plate  rim  (Fig.  38c)  manufactured  by  Cope- 

land  and  Garrett,  Spode  Works,  Stoke,  Staffordshire  Potteries,  between 
1833  and  1847.  The  design  is  called  "Cherry  Picking"  and  dates  from 
1838.  It  was  not  recorded  by  Sussman  (1979)  and  is  not  generally  known 
to  have  been  exported  to  North  America  (Louise  M.  Jackson,  personal 
communication).  However,  it  was  recovered  from  the  Crow  Village  site. 

Plain  plate  (ironstone)  foot. 

Transfer-printed  blue  willow  pattern  border.  ^ 

Plain  fragment  (plate?).  -^ 

Transfer-printed  blue  willow  plate  soup  rim  with  moulded  ridge. 

Transfer-printed  blue  willow  border  of  rim  fragment. 

Transfer-printed  blue  willow  pattern.  Possibly  the  ball  of  a  soup  plate 
shoulder  or  rim. 

Plain  or  cream  fragment,  possibly  from  a  soup  plate  or  saucer. 

Blue  transfer-printed  cup  body;  staining  on  the  inside. 

Plain  fragment  from  shoulder  of  a  soup  plate. 

Brownware  fragment  of  the  lid  of  a  storage  vessel. 

Fragment  of  green  transfer-printed  cup  (see  comment  to  sherd  no.  34). 

Plain  plate  body  fragment  with  illegible  impressed  mark. 

Flake  with  no  glaze,  unidentifiable. 

Fragment  from  brownware  storage  vessel. 

Plain  fragment  of  moulding  around  plate  rim;  ironstone. 

Rim  fragment  of  porcelain  bowl  with  plain  pink  band  on  the  outside. 

Body  fragment  of  brownware  serving  bowl. 

Blue  floral  transfer-printed  cup  fragment,  possibly  a  Copeland  and  Garrett 
or  W.  T.  Copeland  piece  (Louise  M.  Jackson,  personal  communication). 

Fragment  of  plate  body  without  glaze  on  either  side. 

Transfer-printed  blue  cup  fragment  (Fig.  38d)  with  the  "Watteau"  pattern 
(see  Sussman,  1979,  p.  231).  Possibly  same  as  sherd  no.  3,  although  pro- 
veniences differ. 

Body  fragment  of  utilitarian  brownstone  serving  vessel. 

Basal  fragment  of  utilitarian  brownstone  vessel  with  part  of  an  impressed 
mark,  enclosed  in  a  circle;  includes  the  final  letters  of  two  words,  REENS 
in  a  curve  at  the  top  of  the  circle,  and  SIDE  horizontally  across  the  mid- 
dle. It  has  not  been  possible  to  identify  this  mark. 

Chip  from  a  utilitarian  brownstone  vessel. 

Fragment  of  plate  with  blue  feather  edge.  A  hole  has  been  drilled  through 
the  shoulder. 

Body  fragment  of  blue  transfer-printed  plate. 

Fragment  of  blue  transfer- printed  plate.  ' 

Plain  plate  or  soup  plate  fragment. 

Plain  cup  fragment. 

Body  fragment  of  blue  transfer-printed  cup  (Fig.  38a)  with  the  "Camilla" 
pattern  manufactured  by  Copeland  and  Garrett  and  W.  T.  Copeland  of 
Stoke,  Staffordshire  Potteries,  from  1833  and  still  manufactured  by  Spode 
Limited  (Sussman,  1979,  p.  83). 
34  T2  11  Fragment  of  green  transfer-printed  plate  rim.  It  could  belong  to  the  same 

vessel  as  no.  15,  and  no.  37,  although  proveniences  differ.  The  pattern 
design  may  be  "Davenport  IV,"  illustrated  by  Williams  and  Weber 
(1986,  p.  168),  made  by  the  Davenport  factory  (see  sherd  no.  1). 


5 

H2 

5 

6 

H2 

6 

7 

H2 

7 

8 

H2 

6 

9 

H2 

6 

10 

H2 

6 

11 

H2 

8 

12 

H2 

9 

13 

H2 

8 

14 

H2 

10 

IS 

H2 

11 

16 

H2 

12 

17 

H2 

13 

18 

H2 

14 

19 

H3 

15 

20 

H3 

16 

21 

H3 

17 

22 

H3 

18 

23 

H3 

19 

24 

H3 

3 

25 

H3 

20 

26 

H3 

21 

27 

H3 

22 

28 

H5 

23 

29 

HS 

24 

30 

HS 

24 

31 

HS 

24 

32 

Tl 

25 

33 

Tl 

26 

52        Part  Four 


Table  3.     Continued. 


Sherd 
no. 


Unit^ 


Vessel 
no. 


Description 


35 

T2 

27 

36 

T4 

28 

37 

T4 

11 

38 

T4 

29 

39 

T4 

30 

40 

T4 

31 

Bowl  fragment  with  hand-painted  brown  band  on  the  outside. 
Plain  plate  body  fragment  with  fragmentary  unidentified  impression. 
Green  transfer-printed  body  fragment  (see  sherd  nos.  1 5  and  34). 
Unidentified  flake  without  glaze. 
Blue  transfer-printed  flake. 
Blue  transfer-printed  flake. 


'^  H  =  house;  T  =  trench. 


nek  thin  plain  type  and  has  an  unrestricted  opening 
and  sides  tapering  outward  in  flower-pot  form, 
often  with  an  additional  slight  flare  at  the  lip  (Fig. 
39B-G).  In  some  cases,  this  flare  occurs  above  a 
very  slight  constriction  after  the  manner  of  the  so- 
called  situla  shape  that  has  been  described  for  his- 
toric-period ceramics  in  western  Alaska  to  the  north 
(e.g.,  Oswalt,  1955).  The  base  of  this  variety  is  flat 
and  relatively  wide  (Fig.  39M). 

The  Brooks  River  variety  (103)  of  the  Naknek 
thin  plain  type  has  a  form  approaching  that  of  a 
cylinder  or  barrel  (Fig.  3  9 A).  Although  not  gen- 
erally found  in  vessels  of  Naknek  ware  paste  any- 
where in  the  region  (where  the  shape  commonly 
pertains  to  the  earlier  Brooks  River  ware  with  dis- 
tinctive fiber-tempered  paste),  some  rims  at  Paug- 
vik  cannot  reasonably  be  assigned  to  any  other 
shape.  Unfortunately,  the  restriction  at  the  lip  of 
such  vessels  may  be  pronounced  enough  that  rim 
sherds  too  small  to  reveal  the  conformation  of  the 
lower  vessel  walls  can  be  mistaken  for  the  lips  of 
globular  pots  and  so  classed  as  Camp  variety.  This 
may  be  the  case  with  some  sherds  in  the  present 
collection  (Table  2).  The  base  of  vessels  of  this 
variety  are  indistinguishable  from  those  of  the  Pa- 
vik  variety  (Fig.  39M). 

The  exterior  ridged  variety  (104)  is  represented 
by  even  fewer  sherds.  The  total  vessel  shape  is 
evidently  that  of  the  Pavik  variety,  of  which  this 
may  be  considered  a  variant,  in  which  the  wet  clay 
was  pinched  into  a  pronounced  horizontal  ridge 
somewhat  below  the  lip  (Fig.  39H),  as  though  to 
emphasize  the  thickened  region  that  often  occurs 
in  that  portion  of  the  vessel  walls  (e.g..  Fig. 
39B,D,E).  This  is  the  only  approach  to  decorative 
treatment  in  the  Pavik  ceramic  collection. 

In  the  Naknek  region,  the  Naknek  thick  plain 
type.  Camp  variety,  is  characteristic  of  the  period 
from  about  a.d.  1000  to  1450,  the  time  of  the 
Brooks  River  Camp  phase  (Dumond,  1981).  The 
Naknek  thin  plain  type  in  the  same  variety,  in- 
cluding some  vessels  with  exterior  ridges,  appears 


thereafter  in  the  Brooks  River  Blufls  phase.  The 
Pavik  variety  of  the  Naknek  thin  plain  type  is  then 
present  in  quantity  only  in  the  Pavik  phase  of 
historic  times.  In  the  present  case,  as  has  been 
indicated,  the  majority  of  the  Naknek  thick  plain 
potsherds  of  the  Paugvik  site  are  thought  to  rep- 
resent earlier  deposits  located  in  the  vicinity  or  in 
some  cases  to  possibly  result  from  misclassifica- 
tion  of  small  fragments  of  clay  lamps. 


Personal  Adornment 

A  total  of  538  complete  glass  trade  beads  (107) 
were  recovered  from  the  Paugvik  site  in  1 985,  with 
317  recorded  for  the  trenches  of  1961  and  1973 
(Table  4).  Although  most  were  probably  used  as 
items  of  personal  adornment,  it  is  probable  that  a 
few  may  have  served  to  decorate  other  items  of 
material  culture.  For  present  purposes,  the  1985 
sample  is  deemed  of  ample  size  for  analysis,  in- 
asmuch as  an  examination  of  the  earlier  material 
revealed  no  apparent  difference  in  the  range  of 
types. 

The  bead  typology  developed  by  Kenneth  and 
Martha  Kidd  ( 1 970)  is  here  applied  to  the  Paugvik 
bead  sample  of  1985,  although  some  problems 
were  encountered  in  its  use.  Colors  were  some- 
times difficult  to  define  or  assign,  and  it  was  also 
difficult  at  times  to  separate  precisely  the  "round" 
bead  varieties  from  the  "circular"  varieties.  As  a 
result,  there  may  be  some  mixture  of  such  Kidd 
varieties  as  IVa6  and  IVa7.  A  total  of  1 16  beads, 
or  20%  of  the  1985  collection,  could  not  be  as- 
signed within  the  original  Kidd  classification,  which 
for  present  purposes  was  expanded  to  accommo- 
date the  Paugvik  sample.  Table  4  gives  a  complete 
list  of  the  number  and  varieties  of  beads  excavated 
at  Paugvik  in  1985. 

The  54  bead  varieties  from  the  site  represent 
eight  separate  Kidd  types.  The  most  frequently 
occurring  variety  is  Ila  1 4,  circular  in  shape,  opaque, 


Collections 


53 


^^_-«-«cr)r-^<Ni<NooTfTf  —  —  o  —  <^<*^-^r«^o^^~•'^  — 


<N  VO 


—        fS  «->  — 


—         fN  rf  rr 


(N       00       fN       m  1/^ 


mm  <N       — 


<N  — I  <N  m 


—I          <N  fN  — 


—  — <       mm       —  — <  ts 


m  —       — 


C/3 


J 

SS       S 


J  J 


C/5"cO>t/f2vfc«>y32ij2(/3t/3~t/fi-lV3i-l>C/3i-l>i-l2w32i-liy5(/3C/32 


i^ 


O 


a  & 


1»  .s? 

3  — 

^  is 

aii 
o  w 


4J  C 

U  V  CQ 

»  p  5  c 

>    C  »]  U 

u  <u  <u  a 

3    3  3  — 

CT  O"  O*  g 

cd   CO  cd  5 

o  o  o  is 


% 

s 

O 


3    U 

50  t;  X5 


_     U     (A     u 

^1  s-'S 


3  'C    O    ,^ 
U    U    u  ^ 


3    3    3 


a  2 


CO    g 


y  y  «  « 

^  5  3  3 

C  C  rt  c3 

2  S  a  a 


J3 

■© 

^  »fi  »JS    qJ) 
u    ""    "" 


i:  t!  o  o  i: 


^   u  <u  u 

,2333 

<2  o"  o*  o" 

C     W     CO     £« 

o.  o.  o. 
o  o  o 


c 
2 

4>    c    c3    £0    aj    1) 

3 
«2 

wi  oS  -^ 

pple  gre 
urf  greei 
nt  light 
ght  aqu 
qua  blu 
qua  blu 

II 

in's  e 
in's  e 
brigh 

,_j 

3  ♦- 

X)  *  ♦- 

c 

O"  C 

o  o  n 

9. 

ea    Wi    4>  .3    w    w 

tfl   « 

u    u    « 

1 

U    U    3    (U    (U    U 
3    3^333 

^1 

U  U  3 
3    3  5 

"en 

a  o"  ;2  o*  a  o" 

«i 

CO    c«    C 

C 

cd    cd    ^   cd    cQ    c^ 

2 

a  a  2  ex  a  a 

o  i: 

a  a  2 
o  o  i: 

Un 

O   O  t!   o   o   o 

3  " 


HHHHHHHHHHHHUUUttJOOiOittiftJUOiCiiUOoJoSUPiU 


o  m  ^  <<^  vo  <N 

<Nm>/^CT\  —  -H  —  —  —  <Nv 

cocQcdcocdcQAcQcdcoco 


fNmTj-t^  —  Tfi/^'t'/^vor-oooNO-^mov 
(St^-H  —  —  —  fNfNfNmmmr'^mmTj-Tj-rr'r^ 


54 


Part  Four 


_  CTs  --  _-  <^4  _  ^ 


—  —  <N    f<» 


r~  — «  —  <N  —       vn  — 


»N  r^       o  •'^ 


— ■  —  —  (N     TJ- 


;3 


(/I 


JJJJ(Z)(y3V3(Z)C/fj>OOC«C/3"oOC/3'NjjSNjHJ-jS 


3  SB. 


c   w  J5 


c  c 

«    4)  . 

o2>  bb 


JJ  u    u 


u  u   u 

3  3    3 

CT  CT  CT 

a  Q.  a 

o  o  o 


QiUUUUUHHh-Hf-OiOaJUUC^OiBSoJalOoJ 


— <  «N  fn 


O  —  »N  <^  -JJ 

(N  —  —  —  —  —  IX       S 

-_«-_«•'«<«   «w  -^^    ra    cd    cq   cd   cd    cQ  ^^  ^^  ^^  ^^  ^^  ^^  w^    [.H 


Is 


II 

s 

3 

■•3 

u 

6 


c 


'S  2  — 


k>    u    (/) 


a 


3  C    C 

R  «  (u  X 

V|"  II -H 

HU>X> 


Collections        55 


Table  5.    Types  and  varieties  of  beads  in  the  1985 
Paugvik  sample. 


Table  6.    Comaline  d' Aleppo  red  beads  from  south- 
western Alaskan  sites.'' 


Kidd  no. 


No.  of  beads 


No.  of  present 
varieties'' 


la 

165 

11 

Ic 

1 

2 

Ila 

200 

25 

Ilia 

90 

3 

Illf 

2 

1 

IVa 

110 

5 

Wlb 

14 

7 

Wlc 

1 

1 

Total 

583 

54 

"  Kidd  tyj)es  have  been  expanded  for  present  uses.  See 
Table  4. 


and  white.  The  second  most  common  is  Ia5,  a 
tubular  opaque  white  bead.  The  nine  most  com- 
monly occurring  varieties  account  for  61%  of  the 
total  bead  sample.  Rounded  beads  (represented  by 
Kidd  classes  I  and  III)  make  up  53%  of  the  sample. 
The  greatest  number  of  beads  of  any  one  type  is 
1 84  beads  of  type  Ila,  representing  20  different 
varieties.  Type  la,  with  165  beads,  is  represented 
by  1 1  varieties  at  Paugvik.  Of  the  116  beads  that 
could  not  be  placed  within  the  Kidd  classification, 
98  belong  to  types  Ilia  and  IVa,  tubular  and  cir- 
cular beads  of  opaque  oyster  white  with  a  white 
interior.  The  assemblage  includes  only  15  wire- 
wound  beads,  or  2.5%  of  the  sample.  The  total 
Kidd  types  and  varieties,  as  expanded  for  the  pres- 
ent analysis,  are  listed  in  Table  5. 

For  a  comparison  of  the  Paugvik  beads  with 
those  from  other  historic  sites  in  southwestern 
Alaska,  perhaps  the  most  significant  varieties  are 
circular  or  round  beads  with  opaque  red  exteriors 
and  clear  green  or  brown  interiors  (IIIa3,  IVa5- 
6),  of  which  there  are  82  examples,  comprising 
14%  of  the  sample.  These  are  varieties  for  a  form 
known  as  Comaline  d' Aleppo,  which  derives  its 
name  from  association  with  the  Italian  export 
business  with  the  city  of  Aleppo  in  Syria.  This  sort 
of  bead  was  widely  distributed  among  Indians  of 
North  America  in  the  first  half  of  the  19th  century 
(Orchard,  1929,  p.  87;  Woodward,  1965,  pp.  19- 
20).  Of  the  two  primary  varieties  of  Comaline 
d' Aleppo  bead,  the  green-  and  brown-lined  red 
forms  occur  chronologically  earlier  in  the  eastem 
United  States  and  Canada  than  do  those  with  white 
cores,  a  variety  absent  from  the  Paugvik  sample 
but  present  in  bead  assemblages  from  other  sites 
in  southwestern  Alaska.  Previous  students  of  beads 
from  archaeological  sites  in  this  region  have  be- 
lieved that  both  forms  were  introduced  into  Alas- 


Site 


No.  of 
beads 


"White   "Green    "Brown 
lined"     lined"     lined"      centers 


Black 

«6 


Paugvik               583 

82 

Crow  Village      416 

8 

7 

Akulivikchuk     537 

2 

4 

Tikchik               407 

2 

18 

Kijik                1,229 

111 

12 

Kolmakov- 

skiyR.     (2,431) 

Russian 

75 

levels 

U.S.  levels 

80 

"  Based  on  information  from  Oswalt  and  VanStone 
(1967),  VanStone  (1968,  1970),  VanStone  and  Town- 
send  (1970),  and  Oswalt  (1980). 

*  Possibly  a  misidentification  of  green-lined  red. 

ka  after  extensive  use  elsewhere  in  North  America 
but  that  the  exact  time  of  introduction  cannot  be 
determined  (Oswalt  &  VanStone,  1967,  p.  60; 
VanStone,  1968,  p.  295;  VanStone  &  Townsend, 
1970,  p.  97). 

Distribution  of  Comaline  d' Aleppo  beads  at  ex- 
cavated historic  sites  in  southwestem  Alaska  is 
shown  in  Table  6. 

A  large  number  of  white-lined  red  beads  were 
found  at  the  Kijik  site,  which  may  have  been  oc- 
cupied somewhat  later  than  the  others.  Also,  at 
Kolmakovskiy  Redoubt  beads  that  are  "red  with 
black  centers"  occur  in  approximately  equal  num- 
bers in  both  Russian-  and  U.S.-period  levels.  Be- 
cause the  clear  centers  of  the  green-lined  red  beads 
appear  black  unless  held  up  to  the  light,  the  Kol- 
makovskiy beads  may  be  the  green-lined  red  va- 
riety. In  any  event,  they  cannot  be  said  to  be  an 
exclusively  Russian  import.  The  white-lined  red 
form  also  occurs  in  both  the  Russian-  and  U.S.- 
period  levels  but  in  much  smaller  numbers. 

South  of  Bristol  Bay  the  picture  is  somewhat 
clearer.  Bead  assemblages  from  Chirikof  Island 
south  of  Kodiak  (Workman,  1 969),  the  Korov- 
inskii  site  on  Atka  Island  in  the  Aleutians  (Veltre, 
1979),  Reese  Bay  on  Unalaska  Island  (Francis, 
1988),  and  Nunakakhnak  on  Kodiak  Island  (Sha- 
piro, 1988)  indicate  that  the  green-lined  red  va- 
riety was  imported  into  Alaska  relatively  early  in 
the  19th  century.  The  Chirikof  Island  site  was 
abandoned  by  the  time  of  the  Alaska  purchase  of 
1867,  and  thus  all  trade  goods  recovered  there 
belong  to  the  Russian  period.  The  Chirikof  col- 
lection includes  45  green-lined  red  beads  and  a 
single  white-lined  red  example,  which  Workman 
(1969,  pp.  200-212)  believed  had  been  imported 


56 


Part  Four 


from  the  interior.  The  Korovinski  collection  con- 
tains 1 1  green-lined  red  beads  but  no  white-lined 
red  examples,  and  because  the  site  was  largely 
abandoned  by  1872  the  beads  there  can  also  be 
considered  of  Russian  importation.  Longhouses  at 
the  Reese  Bay  site  were  abandoned  about  1806, 
and  approximately  10%  of  the  beads  recovered 
from  them  were  the  green-lined  form.  At  the  Nu- 
nakakhnak  site,  apparently  abandoned  in  the  1 880s 
(Knecht  &  Jordan,  1985,  p.  21),  37%  of  the  re- 
covered beads  were  the  Comaline  d' Aleppo  form; 
those  with  a  light  green  center  were  by  far  the  most 
common.  Thus,  Workman  (1969,  p.  204)  was  ap- 
parently correct  when  he  noted  that  the  green-lined 
red  form  of  the  Comaline  d' Aleppo  is  "a  marker 
of  Russian  contact  in  this  area." 

The  absence  of  the  white-lined  red  variety  at 
Paugvik  seems  significant.  Nevertheless,  given  the 
conflicting  evidence  at  Chirikof  Island,  Korovin- 
ski, and  Kolmakovskiy  Redoubt,  as  well  as  the 
presence  of  both  varieties  at  Kijik,  Crow  Village, 
and  the  Nushagak  River  sites,  the  precise  chro- 
nological significance  of  the  Comaline  d' Aleppo 
beads  in  southwestern  Alaska  still  wants  clarifi- 
cation. 

Also  of  interest  in  the  bead  assemblage  at  Paug- 
vik are  the  large  number  of  white  beads  that  cannot 
be  accommodated  within  the  Kidds'  classification 
system  (Table  4).  These  beads  are  oyster  white  on 
the  exterior  with  an  opaque  white  core.  Although 
a  wide  range  of  beads  of  various  sizes  and  colors 
were  recovered  from  the  historic  sites  in  south- 
westem  Alaska,  the  aboriginal  people  were  ap- 
parently partial  to  white  beads,  as  this  was  the 
predominant  color  present  in  the  assemblages  from 
all  the  Nushagak  River  sites  except  Nushagak  it- 
self, as  well  as  those  from  Kijik,  Crow  Village,  and 
Kolmakovskiy.  Most  of  the  beads  are  described 
simply  as  "white"  without  reference  to  exterior/ 
interior  differences,  but  at  Akulivikchuk  (Van- 
Stone,  1 970,  p.  84)  and  Kijik  (VanStone  &  Town- 
send,  1970,  p.  94),  a  large  number  exhibited  a 
variation  between  exterior  and  interior  color.  If 
the  white  beads  from  all  these  sites  were  reex- 
amined, a  considerable  number  probably  would 
be  found  to  have  cores  that  differ  slightly  in  color 
from  the  exteriors. 

A  single  flat  native  bead  o^MgMXt  (108)  appears 
to  represent  an  item  manufactured  in  aboriginal 
style. 

With  the  exception  of  beads,  few  items  of  per- 
sonal adomment  were  recovered  from  the  Paugvik 
site.  There  are  two  brass  ^«^^r  rings  (109;  Fig. 
38h)  and  a  circular  band  of  soft  binding  iron  that 


may  have  been  wom  as  a  bracelet  (1 10).  A  bear's 
tooth  has  been  drilled  along  one  side  at  the  edge 
and  may  have  been  wom  by  itself  or  as  part  of  a 
necklace  (111;  Fig.  38f).  An  antler  hair  comb  (112; 
Fig.  38j)  is  roughly  rectangular  in  shape,  with  a 
series  of  short,  closely  spaced  teeth  at  one  end. 
The  teeth  appear  to  be  too  closely  spaced  for  the 
implement  to  have  been  used  for  shredding  grass 
or  sinew. 


Smoking  Complex 

A  rectangular  section  of  antler  may  be  one  side  of 
an  oval  snuffbox  {Wi).  The  edges  of  the  fragment 
are  omamented  with  parallel  incised  lines  and  in 
the  center  are  a  pair  of  incised  circle  designs  with 
radiating  spurs  (Fig.  38i).  For  smoking,  fungus  ash 
was  frequently  mixed  with  tobacco  to  improve  the 
taste  and  to  make  the  tobacco  last  longer.  The 
collection  contains  a  single  piece  of  birch  fungus 
(1 14).  These  fungi,  cut  from  trees  in  the  interior, 
were  traded  to  the  coast  by  Athapaskan  Indians 
(Nelson,  1983,  p.  271). 


Toys 

There  are  two  fragments  of  toy  bows  (115),  one 
with  a  simple  rounded  nock  and  the  other  with  a 
nock  that  is  roughly  diamond  shaped.  Both  are 
ovoid  in  cross  section,  but  the  smaller  is  relatively 
wide  and  flat  (Fig.  38k,l). 


Ceremonial  Objects 

A  single  unfinished  mask  of  wood  (116)  was  re- 
covered from  the  Paugvik  site.  The  shaping  ap- 
pears to  be  virtually  complete,  but  the  nose,  eyes, 
and  mouth  are  barely  indicated.  On  the  reverse 
side  the  surface  is  nearly  flat  except  for  the  area 
that  would  fit  over  the  nose  of  the  wearer  (Fig. 
40a).  There  are  also  three  mask  appendages  (117) 
for  the  type  of  composite  mask  characteristic  of 
southwestem  Alaska.  The  first  is  fragmentary  and 
roughly  paddle  shaped  (Fig.  38e).  The  second  is 
in  the  shape  of  a  human  hand  with  a  hole  through 
the  palm  (Fig.  38m).  Pierced  hand  appendages  are 
believed  to  have  been  associated  with  masks  rep- 
resenting powerful  tuunrat  spirits  that  controlled 
the  availability  of  animals  on  earth.  The  holes 
symbolize  the  willingness  of  the  spirits  to  allow 
some  animals  to  slip  through  their  fingers,  thus 


Collections        57 


assuring  their  continued  abundance  on  earth  (Fitz- 
hugh  &  Kaplan,  1982,  p.  202).  Most  Yupik  carved 
hands  have  four  fingers  and  no  thumb,  whereas 
this  one  has  three  fingers  and  a  short  thumb.  The 
more  problematic  mask  appendage  is  a  piece  of 
wood  carved  in  the  shape  of  a  human  leg  (Fig. 
45e). 

Two  wooden  human^^r/n^5  (1 18)  are  worked 
to  a  point  at  one  end.  On  the  larger,  which  is  very 
poorly  preserved,  the  head  and  shoulders  are  de- 
picted but  the  features  have  been  obliterated  (Fig. 
40c).  A  similar  figurine  was  recovered  at  Paugvik 
by  Larsen  (1950,  Fig.  55a,  7).  The  smaller  depicts 
only  the  head,  but  the  incised  features  are  clearly 
indicated.  The  marks  of  a  rodent  tooth  tool  are 
clearly  visible  on  this  figurine  (Fig.  40b). 


Miscellaneous 

A  bundle  of  grass  wrapped  with  a  sealskin  thong 
may  have  served  as  a  respirator  ( II 9)  for  a  person 
taking  a  sweat  bath,  although  Nelson  (1983,  p. 
288)  indicates  that  these  respirators  were  usually 
made  of  wood  shavings  (Fig.  40d). 


Protective  Network 

Clothing 

Fragments  of  skin  and  commercial  cloth  are  rel- 
atively scarce  in  the  inventory  of  materials  from 
the  Paugvik  site,  and  most  of  those  recovered  are 
too  small  or  too  poorly  preserved  for  identification 
as  to  the  type  of  apparel  they  represent.  One  ex- 
planation, of  course,  is  that  preservation  in  many 
parts  of  the  site  was  poor,  with  frozen  sections 
discontinuous  except  for  those  in  Trench  1  and 
House  6,  and  it  was  only  from  frozen  matrix  that 
cloth  and  leather  fragments  were  recovered.  Cloth 
garments  along  with  those  of  skin  were  probably 
of  importance  at  the  site;  when  the  Korsakovskiy 
expedition  visited  Paugvik  in  1818,  European 
clothing  was  already  among  the  trade  objects  most 
desired  by  the  natives  (VanStone,  ed.,  1988,  pp. 
28-29). 

There  are  six  fragments  of  sealskin  mukluk  soles 
(120),  all  of  which  are  quite  small  but  include  an 
area  of  crimping  around  the  toe  (Fig.  41c);  no  up- 
per sections  were  identified. 

Three  fragments  of  cut  sealskin,  each  found  with 


numerous  small,  deteriorated  pieces,  may  be  gar- 
ment fragments  (121). 

Two  circular  pieces  of  sealskin  with  a  row  of 
sewing  holes  around  the  edges  are  identified  as 
patches  (122),  probably  for  parkas  or  boots  but 
perhaps  for  boat  covers  (Fig.  41a).  Large  pieces  of 
sea  mammal  intestine  suggest  parts  of  raincoats 
(123). 

Five  buttons  (124)  were  recovered.  Three  are 
four-hole  buttons  of  wood  that  are  obviously 
homemade  (Fig.  4 1  f).  The  fourth  is  covered  with 
brown  wool  fabric  and  the  material  of  the  button 
itself  cannot  be  determined  (Fig.  41g).  Half  of  a 
plain  brass  button  is  a  coin-shaped  disc  that  once 
had  an  eye  of  the  same  material  soldered  to  the 
back.  Around  the  edges  on  the  reverse  is  stamped 
"F  Barnes  &  Co."  (Fig.  41e).  A  similar  complete 
button  from  the  Nushagak  site  is  stamped  with 
the  words  "F.  BARNES  &.  CO./LONDON" 
(VanStone,  1972,  p.  64,  PI.  13,  10).  It  has  not  been 
possible  to  locate  this  firm  in  lists  of  known  button 
companies,  but  buttons  of  this  type,  with  soldered 
eyes,  were  manufactured  between  1812  and  1820 
(Olsen,  1963,  pp.  31-33).  Evidently  an  attempt 
had  been  made  to  cut  the  Paugvik  button  into 
strips. 

The  two  fragments  of  factory-made  shoes  {\25) 
are  too  fragmentary  to  provide  much  information 
about  the  method  of  manufacture  or  to  be  of  chro- 
nological significance.  A  single  sole  fragment  ap- 
pears to  have  been  sewn  to  the  upper,  the  insole 
attached  to  it  by  a  row  of  wooden  pegs  that  run 
longitudinally  along  the  center  of  the  foot;  one  peg 
is  still  in  place  (Fig.  41b).  In  the  United  States, 
machine-made  pegs  were  introduced  about  1811, 
and  a  hand-operated  pegging  machine  was  pat- 
ented in  1829  (Anderson,  1968,  pp.  58-59).  The 
other  shoe  fragment  is  the  outer  section  of  a  heel 
made  of  leather,  which  had  been  fastened  to  the 
lifts  around  the  edges  and  in  the  center  with  heavy 
iron  nails  as  much  as  0.4  cm  in  diameter.  The  nail 
heads  protrude  on  the  outer  surface  (Fig.  4 Id). 

In  addition  to  the  skin  clothing  fragments,  there 
are  48  sea  mammal  or  caribou  skin  fragments  with 
stitching  holes  (126)  along  one  or  more  edges,  64 
cut  skin  fragments  ( 1 27)  presumably  associated 
with  clothing,  and  45  uncut  skin  fragments  (128). 
Because  of  the  fragility  of  the  deteriorated  mate- 
rial, these  counts  are  approximate.  There  are  also 
two  fragments  oi  knotted  sealskin  line  (129;  Fig. 
41h)  and  one  fragment  oi  knotted  baleen  (130). 

Unfortunately,  little  can  be  inferred  concerning 
the  European  clothing  in  use  because  of  the  small 
number  and  poor  condition  of  those  fabrics  re- 


58 


Part  Four 


covered.  The  fibers  of  the  1 3  cloth  fragments  (131), 
now  brown  or  black  in  apparent  color,  are  ex- 
tremely degraded  but  appear  to  be  wool  of  plain 
(tabby)  weave  or  twilled  weave.  Two  fragments 
may  have  been  originally  fulled,  and  one  has  a 
seam  with  stitch  holes  along  one  edge.  On  another, 
stitch  marks  and  circular  impressions  indicate  that 
three  buttons  had  once  been  sewn  along  one  edge. 
On  one  fragment  two  paired  sets  of  wefts  are  ev- 
ident, one  now  black  and  the  other  brown.  One 
fragment  is  unusual  in  having  two  such  sets  of 
wefts,  one  of  wool  and  the  other  spun  with  coarse 
animal  hair  of  unknown  origin. 


the  Paugvik  shards  is  very  much  in  keeping  with 
a  date  sometime  before  the  sale  of  Alaska  in  1 867. 

Two  square-cut  nails  (133)  were  recovered,  on 
one  of  which  the  head  is  missing.  The  complete 
nail  is  within  the  range  of  the  40d  length.  There 
are  also  two  badly  corroded  screws  (134)  with 
rounded  heads. 

A  small  fragment  of  muscovite  mica  (135)  ap- 
proximately 2  cm  X  1.5  cm  may  have  been  part 
of  the  covering  for  a  window.  Zagoskin  (1967,  p. 
1 86)  mentioned  that  mica  was  brought  from  Sitka 
to  be  used  for  window  panes  in  the  Russian-Amer- 
ican Company  buildings  at  Nulato  on  the  Yukon. 
The  collection  also  contains  one  very  small  frag- 
ment of  brick  (136). 


Imported  Building  Materials 

The  Paugvik  natives  had  very  little  access  to  im- 
ported building  materials.  Some  of  the  few  pieces 
that  were  recovered  may  have  been  salvaged  from 
driftwood,  and  others  may  be  unrelated  to  occu- 
pation of  the  site. 

The  1 1  fragments  ofwz>K/ow^/as5(  132)  are  clear 
and  small  (maximum  dimension  of  the  largest  is 
42  mm)  and  range  in  thickness  from  1.0  to  2.2 
mm,  with  a  mean  thickness  of  1.51  mm;  five  of 
the  11  are  between  1.1  and  1.65  mm.  Although 
window  glass  was  highly  prized  by  the  natives  of 
southwestern  Alaska  at  least  as  early  as  1 842  (Za- 
goskin, 1967,  p.  255),  such  glass  was  apparently 
available  at  Paugvik  only  in  small  quantities.  The 
Hudson's  Bay  Company  imported  English  win- 
dow glass  into  the  Pacific  Northwest  from  the  time 
of  its  establishment  there  and  after  1 840  can  be 
expected  to  have  been  the  source  for  flat  glass  found 
in  Alaska  at  least  until  1867.  Before  the  mid- 19th 
century  the  major  English  production  was  of  spun- 
blown  crown  glass,  much  of  which  was  very  thin 
(Roenke,  1978,  pp.  5-6).  Although  large  sheets  of 
this  glass  show  circular  patterns  of  bubbles  or  im- 
perfections, these  are  almost  never  discernible  in 
fragments  as  small  as  those  reported  here.  Ac- 
cording to  Roenke  ( 1 978,  p.  11 6),  the  modal  thick- 
ness of  sheet  glass  fragments  found  in  archaeolog- 
ical sites  in  the  Pacific  Northwest  that  were  oc- 
cupied before  1845  does  not  exceed  1.4  mm,  be- 
comes thicker  than  the  mean  of  the  Paugvik  shards 
only  sometime  after  that  date,  and  exceeds  the 
thickness  of  the  single  thickest  Paugvik  fragment 
only  after  about  1870.  Although  variations  in  the 
thickness  of  such  glass  products  are  great  enough 
to  rule  out  the  definitive  dating  of  very  small  sam- 
ples by  this  measurement  alone,  the  thickness  of 


Unidentified  Objects 

There  are  a  large  number  of  unidentified  objects, 
most  of  them  fragmentary.  The  more  interesting 
of  these  are  described  according  to  the  material  of 
which  they  are  made. 


Wood 

The  following  objects,  complete  or  nearly  so,  were 
found.  Eight  are  stakes  (137)  pointed  at  one  end, 
ranging  in  length  from  3  cm  to  10  cm,  two  of  them 
complete  (Fig.  42a,c),  and  the  rest  are  unidentified 
(138):  a  short,  handlelike  object  recessed  at  one 
end,  with  a  sharp  shoulder  (Fig.  42d);  a  flat,  oval 
piece  with  a  series  of  incised  lines  on  one  side  (Fig. 
42i);  an  oval  shaft  with  a  narrow  blade  slit  at  one 
end,  grooves  left  by  sinew  lashing,  and  narrow, 
fringelike  slits  at  the  other  end  (Fig.  42b);  an  object 
wedge  shaped  at  one  end  and  rounded  with  an 
incised  groove  at  the  other  (Fig.  42j);  a  piece  of 
birch  bark  cut  to  an  oval  shape  (Fig.  42e);  and  a 
small  peg  enlarged  at  one  end  (Fig.  42g). 


Antler,  Ivory,  Bone 

Those  unidentified  objects  (139)  illustrated  include 
a  partially  exfoliated  strip  of  antler,  with  incised 
eyes  at  one  end  as  well  as  a  number  of  other  incised 
lines,  possibly  representing  an  animal  or  fish  (Fig. 
43c);  a  thin  antler  fragment  with  parallel  incised 
lines  on  one  side  and  a  vertical  series  of  drilled 
holes,  probably  part  of  the  rim  of  something  (Fig. 
42f);  a  paddle-shaped  object  of  antler  with  a  pro- 


Collections 


59 


jection  enlarged  at  the  end  and  a  line  hole  (Fig. 
43a);  a  partially  exfoliated  antler  fragment,  pos- 
sibly a  handle,  with  a  knob  at  one  end  on  which 
a  mouth  and  eyes  are  incised  (Fig.  42k);  a  forked 
handle-like  object  of  antler  (Fig.  45c;  Dumond, 
1981,  PI.  XVII,  Cg);  a  possible  spoon  handle  of 
antler,  along  the  rear  of  which  is  a  vertical  row  of 
circular  depressions  that  once  contained  beads, 
with  one  bead  still  in  place  (Fig.  45h);  two  oval 
ivory  tubes,  on  one  of  which  are  incised  lines  (Fig. 
43d,e);  two  sea  mammal  ribs  with  elliptical  per- 
forations in  one  end  (Fig.  43f);  and  a  caribou  scap- 
ula with  two  round  perforations  in  the  blade  (Fig. 
43b). 


Miscellaneous  Debris 

This  section  lists  manufacturing  detritus,  items  that 
appear  to  have  been  picked  up  and  purposely 
brought  to  the  site,  and  subsistence  byproducts. 
Some  of  these  items  are  confined  to  those  collected 
in  1985  (see  Table  2). 

Scraps  of  cut  or  broken  material  discarded  in 
manufacture,  not  yet  completely  formed  for  use, 
or  at  times  possibly  only  fortuitously  present  in- 
clude 107  fragments  of5/a/e(  140),  31  chips  of  chert 
or  quartzite  (141),  several  pieces  of  pumice  (142), 
and  cut  bone,  ivory,  and  antler  fragments  (143, 
144,  145). 

Metal  scraps  include  70  fragments  of  iron  or 
steel  (146)  many  of  which  appear  to  be  cut  from 
barrel  hoops.  There  are  also  2 1  fragments  of  cop- 
per-based alloys  of  brass  or  bronze  (147).  Five  of 
these  have  been  analyzed  for  content,  confirming 
the  industrial  origin  of  four  of  them  but  suggesting 
that  one,  from  Trench  1  (see  Part  3)  is  possibly 


native  copper  (Harritt  &  Dumond,  in  prepara- 
tion). 

Although  there  were  numerous  scraps  of  baleen, 
these  were  not  systematically  collected,  except  for 
a  piece  cut  into  a  leaf  shape  (148;  Fig.  42h). 

Fragments  of  remains  of  Pleistocene  woolly 
mammoth  of  Alaska  {Mammuthus  primigenius) 
attest  to  the  proclivity  of  the  Paugvik  people  for 
bringing  home  segments  of  tusk  and  tooth  from 
mammoth  remains  that  erode  regularly  from 
Pleistocene  deposits  around  the  mouth  of  the  Nak- 
nek  River  and  upper  Bristol  Bay.  The  latest  ra- 
diocarbon designation  associated  with  Alaskan 
mammoth  remains  is  on  the  order  of  1 3,500  years 
ago  (see,  for  example,  Guthrie,  1 990,  p.  244),  and 
no  Alaskan  mammoth  remains  have  yet  been  found 
associated  with  contemporary  human  traces.  But 
mammoth  tusk  or  tooth  fragments  (149)  were  re- 
corded in  eight  excavation  units  at  Paugvik,  tusk 
laminae  in  five  of  them  (in  House  2,  level  A,  the 
tusk  fragment  found  was  apparently  used  as  a  net 
weight),  and  cheek  teeth  or  their  sections  in  four 
of  them. 

Remains  of  more  contemporary  fauna  include 
a  number  of  samples  of //a/r  (150-156),  including 
that  of  canids  (dog,  wolf,  or  fox),  beaver,  muskrat, 
seal,  caribou,  bear,  and  humans.  The  extensive 
bone  waste  is  set  out  separately  in  Appendix  1 ,  by 
the  original  excavation  units. 

Samples  of  ash  and  soil  were  taken  from  six  of 
the  hearths  excavated  in  1985,  in  the  hope  that 
these  samples  would  provide  information  regard- 
ing use  of  vegetal  materials  other  than  those  rep- 
resented by  scattered  remains  of  fern  rhizomes. 
The  samples  were  dried  and  then  floated  in  water, 
with  preservation  and  subsequent  drying  of  both 
heavy  and  light  fractions.  A  summary  of  the  rather 
disappointing  results  is  given  in  Table  7. 


60 


Part  Four 


Table  7.    Flotation  analysis  of  six  Paugvik  hearths. 


Hearth  location 

Fraction 

HI 
HIA 

light 

heavy 

light 

la 

heavy 
light 

heavy 

m 

light 
heavy 

H6  (secondary  hearth)'' 
H6  (main  hearth) 

light 
heavy 
light 
heavy 

Content 


charcoal,  roots 

pulverized  mammal  bone,  bird  bone,  shell 

charcoal,  rootlets,  mica  flecks;  1  probable  fish  ver- 
tebra fragment;  grass;  calcined  bone  fragments 

same  as  light,  without  vertebra;  1  white  seed  bead 

charcoal;  twigs;  bird  bone,  probably  duck  (Alci-    / 
dae) 

small  bone,  pulverized  large  mammal  bone;  1 
piece  green  glass;  salmonid  vertebra;  bird  toes 

twigs;  charcoal;  salmonid  vertebra;  bird  toe 

salmonid  vertebrae;  bird  toe;  calcined  bird  bone, 
mammal  bone 

charcoal 

pulverized  bird  bone,  mammal  bone 

charcoal;  unbumed  wood;  grass 

pulverized  bird  or  rabbit  bone;  pulverized  shell; 
mica  flecks;  1  white  seed  bead 


"  The  small  section  of  fire  at  the  east  edge  of  the  house;  see  Figure  14. 


Collections        6 1 


cr 


11        21        3|        1\ 
I     I     I     I     I     I     I     I     I 


I 


Fig.  1 6.  a,  harpoon  socketpiece;  b,  haipoon  socketpiece;  c,  harpoon  socketpiece;  d,  harpoon  socketpiece;  e,  harpoon 
socketpiece;/  harpoon  dart  head;  g,  float  mouthpiece;  h,  harpoon  dart  head;  /,  harpoon  foreshaft;7,  float  mouthpiece; 
k,  harpoon  socketpiece  fragment;  /,  harpoon  socketpiece  fragment;  m.  harpwon  ice  pick;  n,  lance  blade  sheath;  o, 
unfinished  arrowhead;  p,  arrowhead;  q,  unfinished  arrowhead;  r,  bow  fragment;  s,  wound  plug;  t,  basal  fragment  of 
arrowhead;  u,  blunt  arrowhead;  v,  blunt  arrowhead  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10990). 


62 


Part  Four 


Fig.  17.  a,  boat  or  meat  hook;  b,  end  blade;  c.  end  blade;  d,  end  blade;  e,  arrow  shaft  fragment;/  lurehook  shank; 
g,  gun  side  plate;  h,  lurehook  shank;  /,  lurehook;  j,  bullet  mold  half;  k,  arrow  shaft  fragment;  /,  leister  prong;  m, 
pointed  object;  n,  pointed  object;  o.  pointed  object;  p,  fish  spear  pKjint;  q,  net  weight;  r,  mesh  gauge;  s,  fish  scaler  (?); 
/,  net  weight;  u,  net  float  fragment  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10994). 


Collections        63 


''I''l''l''ll'l 


Fig.  18.    a,  kayak  deck  beam;  b,  net  weight;  c,  sled  shoe  fragment;  d,  net  weight;  e,  snowshoe  crosspiece;/  sled 
shoe;  g,  sled  shoe  fragment;  h,  net  weight;  /,  net  weight  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10991). 


64        Part  Fovir 


Fio.  19.    a,  pelt  stretcher;  b,  pelt  stretcher  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10989). 


Collections        65 


J 


'II1I1I1I1 


Fio.  20.    a,  sled  upright;  b,  umiak  rib  or  riser;  c,  wedge;  d.  wedge;  e,  wedge;  /  wedge;  g,  wedge  (fmnh  neg.  no. 
A- 110986). 


66        Part  Four 


Fig.  21.    a,  sled  runner;  b,  wedge;  c,  wedge;  d,  wedge;  e,  wedge;/  sled  stanchion  (?)  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10988). 


Collections        67 


;"i  ii  .1  li 


Fig.  22.  a,  maul;  b,  axe  head;  c.  axe  head;  d,  wedge;  e,  whetstone  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10986). 


68        Part  Four 


I  I  • 


llllllll 


Fig.  23.  a,  crooked  knife  handle;  b,  skin  scraper  blade  blank;  c,  crooked  knife  blade;  d,  crooked  knife  blade;  e, 
rodent  incisor  knife;/  adze  blade;  g,  composite  knife  handle;  h,  composite  knife  handle;  /,  knife  or  engraver  fragment; 
j,  whetstone;  k,  whetstone;  /,  whetstone;  m,  whetstone;  n,  engraving  tool;  o,  knife  or  engraver  fragment;  p,  whetstone; 
q,  whetstone;  r,  whetstone  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10992). 


Collections        69 


Fig.  24.    Whetstone  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10987). 


70        Part  Four 


Fig.  25.    a,  ulu;  b,  ulu;  c,  ulu;  d,  ulu;  e,  ulu;/  scraper  or  knife;  g,  awl;  h,  awl;  /,  scraper  or  knife;/  pick  or  mattock 
blade  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10984). 


Collections        7 1 


Him^^ 


'■'  '    v^' 


.''■"'  ■'.'.' ' 


■■.'■•  '*• 

m 


nTrTiiiy 


:  V -.  • 


B 

s 

Fio.  26.    fl,  pick  or  mattock  blade,  b,  compound  vessel;  c,  shovel  blade  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10982). 


72        Part  Four 


Fig.  27.    a.  snow  beater,  b.  rake  prong;  c,  unidentified;  </,.snow  ieater;  e,  ice  pick  or  chisel  (?)  (fmnh  neg.  no. 

A- 110993). 


Collections        73 


''Il'l''li'll' 


Fio.  28.    a,  compound  vessel  bottom;  h,  compound  vessel;  c,  compound  vessel  side;  d,  compound  vessel  side;  e, 
compound  vessel  bottom;/  unidentified  (FMhfH  neg.  no.  A-1 10995). 


74 


Part  Four 


21        31        4  Si 


'III 


9 


Wt  O 


Fig.  29.  a,  spoon;  b,  lamp;  c,  spoon,  d,  spoon;  e,  spoon;/  spoon;  g,  spoon;  A.  bladder  float  nozzle 
(?);  /,  compound  vessel  bottom;  /  water  bag  nozzle  (?);  k,  lug  for  kettle  handle;  /,  nozzle  (fmnh  neg. 
no.  A- 110985). 


Collections        75 


Fig.  30.    a,  dipper;  b,  spoon  fragment;  c-g,  ladles;  h,  dipper  fragment;  /,  kettle  rim  fragment  (fmnh  neg.  no. 
A- 110980). 


76        Part  Four 


1  cm 


Fig.  3 1 .     Mat  or  bag  fragment. 


Fig.  33.     Mat  or  bag  fragment. 


Collections        77 


Fig.  35.    Braided  grass  cordage. 


Fig.  34.    Braided  grass  cordage. 


78        Part  Four 


Fig.  36.    a,  lamp;  b,  lamp  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10981). 


Collections        79 


centimeters 

l|         2|        31        4|        ! 

I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 


Fig.  37.    a,  lamp;  b,  lamp  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 10983). 


80        Part  Four 


Fig.  38.  a,  fragment  of  blue  transfer-printed  cup  with  the  "Camilla"  pattern;  b,  base  and  foot  of  a  transfer-printed 
cup  possibly  showing  part  of  the  "Davenport"  mark;  c,  fragment  of  transfer-printed  plate  rim  with  the  "cherry 
picking"  pattern;  d,  transfer-printed  blue  cup  fragment  with  the  "Watteau"  pattern;  e,  mask  appendage;  /  necklace 
fragment;  g,  blue  transfer-printed  cup  rim  fragment  with  the  "Watteau"  pattern;  h.  finger  ring;  /,  snuffbox  fragment; 
j,  hair  comb;  k,  toy  bow  fragment;  /,  toy  bow  fragment;  m,  mask  appendage  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A- 1 11 335). 


Collections 


\ 


Fig.  39.    Pottery  profiles. 


12        Part  Four 


Fig.  40.    a,  unfinished  mask;  b,  human  figurine;  c,  human  figurine;  d,  respirator  (?)  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1337). 


Collections        83 


I  centimeiert  ,  J 


»•••• 


Fig.  41.    a,  sealskin  patch;  b,  shoe  sole  fragment;  c,  mukluk  sole  fragment;  d,  shoe  heel  fragment;  e,  brass  button; 
/  wood  buttons;  g,  cloth  covered  button;  h,  knotted  sealskin  line  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1477). 


84        Part  Four 


r 


Mill 


d3 


Fig.  42.     Unidentified  objects  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1336). 


Collections        85 


Fig.  43.    Unidentified  objects  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1476). 


86        Part  Four 


Fig.  44.  a,  harpoon  socketpiece;  b,  knife  blade;  c,  bow  fragment;  d,  harpoon  socketpiece;  e,  harpoon  socketpiece 
tang  fragment;  /  harpoon  ice  pick;  g,  harpoon  ice  pick  (?);  h,  toggle  harpoon  head;  /,  harpoon  dart  head;  /  harpoon 
dart  head;  k,  harpoon  dart  head;  /,  arrowhead;  m,  harpoon  foreshaft  (fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1362). 


Collections        87 


Fig.  45.  a,  ulu  handle;  b,  lug  for  kettle  handle;  c,  unidentified;  d,  end-bladed  knife  blade;  e,  mask  appendage  (?); 
/  engraving  tool;  g,  brass  box;  h,  spoon;  /,  spoon,  j,  kettle  lid;  k,  wedge;  /,  kayak  keel  protector  or  shoe  (fmnh  neg. 
no.  A-1 11361). 


88        Part  Four 


Fig.  46.  a,  projectile  point;  b,  chipped  biface;  c,  chipped  biface;  d,  chipped  biface;  e,  end  blade;  /  end  blade;  g, 
end  blade;  h,  end  blade;  /,  end  blade;  j,  end  blade;  k,  end  blade;  /,  end  blade;  m,  end  blade;  n,  end  blade;  o,  stone 
saw;  p,  slate  blank;  q,  slate  blank;  r,  slate  blank  (broken);  s,  adze  blade;  /,  tabular  ulu  blade;  u,  skin  scraper  blade 
(fmnh  neg.  no.  A-1 1 1935). 


Collections        89 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context 


In  this  final  section  we  briefly  consider  the  place 
of  Paugvik  within  southwestern  Alaskan  pre- 
history and  history. 


Subsistence 

Identified  faunal  elements  recovered  fi-om  the 
Paugvik  settlement  during  the  several  years  of  ex- 
cavations are  summarized  in  Table  8,  where  em- 
phasis is  placed  on  the  relatively  numerous  mam- 
malian remains.  The  identifications  of  moose  el- 
ements are  evidently  tentative,  based  chiefly  on 
the  size  of  two  separate  bones  (see  Appendix). 
Moose  reportedly  were  virtually  nonexistent  on 
the  Alaska  Peninsula  before  the  year  1900  (e.g., 
DI,  1980,  p.  III-65),  although  a  rare  presence  in 
the  Naknek  vicinity  at  the  time  Paugvik  was  oc- 
cupied is  of  course  possible.  The  animal  cannot, 
however,  be  considered  very  significant  in  terms 
of  routine  subsistence. 

Both  birds  and  fish  were  much  more  fully  iden- 
tified following  the  work  in  1961  and  1973,  as 
summarized  in  Table  9.  Despite  the  lack  of  more 
detailed  identifications  of  bird  and  fish  remains 
from  1985,  the  high  proportions  of  both  salmon 
and  waterfowl  shown  in  Table  9  can  reasonably 
be  extended  to  work  of  that  later  year. 

-   Mammals 

From  the  faunal  remains  collected  at  Paugvik  (Ta- 
ble 8),  those  considered  to  have  been  probably  the 
most  important  mammalian  food  remains  are 
summarized  in  Table  10.  The  mean  live  weights 
given  may  not  be  absolutely  accurate  indications 
of  the  amount  of  usable  meat  for  each  species,  but 


the  contrasts  presented  in  total  live  meat  available 
are  so  clear  and  the  differences  among  the  species 
are  so  robust  that  there  should  be  little  doubt  that 
the  order  of  mass  in  fact  represents  the  order  of 
availability  of  meat  for  subsistence. 

The  total  amount  of  beluga  meat  (and  blubber) 
obviously  far  exceeds  that  of  all  others.  Whether 
or  not  this  was  all  consumed  locally,  the  contrast 
between  the  beluga  total  and  that  of  the  next  rank- 
ing species,  caribou,  is  so  great  that  it  must  receive 
attention.  Even  though  oil  rendered  from  blubber 
of  these  small  toothed  whales  was  evidently  an 
item  of  native  trade  in  some  parts  of  western  Alas- 
ka (see  Zagoskin,  1967,  pp.  101-102)  and  some 
allowance  for  these  potential  trade  uses  may  be 
made,  the  bulk  taken  still  is  such  as  to  place  the 
beluga  at  the  top  of  the  list  of  apparent  mammalian 
food. 

The  relationship  between  live  weight  of  caribou 
and  bear  and  between  bear  and  seal,  with  the  larger 
in  each  pair  amounting  to  about  150%  of  the 
smaller,  is  less  robustly  clear-cut.  Nevertheless, 
the  possibility  that  bears  were  killed  for  purposes 
other  than  food  (i.e.,  for  fur  or  to  remove  them  as 
nuisances  around  the  settlement)  serves  to  set  the 
bear  potentially  apart  from  the  more  clearly  sub- 
sistence species,  although  the  presence  of  bony  el- 
ements within  the  houses  seems  to  indicate  that 
bears  were  also  eaten.  In  any  event,  the  progression 
in  order  of  frequency  of  beluga,  caribou,  seal,  or 
more  generally  beluga,  large  land  mammal,  seal, 
is  unambiguously  supported. 

The  high  importance  of  the  beluga  is  in  accord 
with  the  species  distribution  and  with  reports  of 
local  informants.  Bristol  Bay  is  a  year-round  hab- 
itat of  belugas  (FWS,  1985,  pp.  2-14),  which  enter 
the  major»tributary  rivers  in  spring  to  meet  young 
juvenile  salmon  on  their  way  to  the  sea  and  in 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        9 1 


Table  8.     Faunal  remains  found  in  various  Paugvik  units.' 
of  individual  animals.* 


E  =  total  skeletal  elements,  and  I  =  minimum  number 


HI 

H2 

H3 

H4 

Animals 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E             I 

Land  mammals 

Caribou  (Rangifer  tarandus) 

60+ 

2 

211 

6 

37 

2 

23            1 

Bear  (Ursus  arctos) 

17 

1 

7 

1 

Beaver  {Castor  canadensis) 

3  + 

1 

1 

1 

+ 

2 

Porcupine  (Erethizon  dorsatum) 

Wolf  (Canis  lupus) 

Dog  {Canis  cf.  familiaris) 

Dog  or  wolf  {Canis  sp.) 

+ 

2 

+ 

1 

Fox  ( Vulpes  cf  fulva) 

+ 

3 

+ 

1 

4            2 

Unidentified  canid  {Canis,  Vulpes) 

11            2 

Otter  {Lutra  canadensis) 

+ 

1 

Muskrat  (Ondatra  sp.) 

1 

1 

Moose  (?)  {Alces  alces) 

Sea  mammals 

, 

Beluga  {Delphinapterus  leucas) 

Unidentified  cetacean  (cf  D.  leucas) 

9 

1 

90 

1 

20 

1 

5             1 

Harbor  seal  {Phoca  cf  vitulina) 

1 

1 

6 

1 

+ 

2 

Walrus  (Odobenus  rosmarus) 

Birds 

6 

1 

50 

6 

13 

4 

1             1 

Fishes 

17 

23 

57 

2 

Mollusks 

Macoma  clam  {Macoma  balthica) 

5 

18 

9 

1 

Mussel  {Mytilus  edulis) 

1 

1 

2 

Whelk  (cf  Neptunea  lyrata) 

2 

1 

Cockle  {Clinocardium  nuttalli) 

°  W  =  house;  T  =  trench. 

*  Abstracted  from  information  in  the  Appendix  and  from  Dumond  (1981). 


summer  and  fall  to  pursue  mature  salmon  up- 
stream. Local  native  people  have  told  of  driving 
belugas  upstream  by  kayak,  the  boatmen  slapping 
the  water  with  their  paddles,  to  arrive  at  a  lagoon 
located  near  the  upper  tidal  limit  more  than  30 
km  inland.  When  the  tide  dropped,  the  whales 
were  beached  and  butchered.  Other  local  residents 
report  the  presence  of  beluga  skulls  in  the  vicinity 
(Dumond,  1973-1985,  fieldnotes,  1973,  1974). 

There  is  nothing  in  the  artifact  assemblage,  how- 
ever, that  can  be  recognized  as  a  specific  indicator 
of  the  harvest  of  belugas.  Hunting  techniques  sim- 
ilar to  that  mentioned  above  have  been  described 
for  the  19th  century  both  from  western  Alaska 
(Zagoskin,  1967,  p.  113)  and  from  the  mouth  of 
the  Mackenzie  River  in  northwestern  Canada.  In 
the  latter  region,  once  the  animals  were  driven  into 
shallows  they  were  harpooned  and  then  speared 
(McGhee,  1974;  Krech,  1989,  p.  63).  The  toggling 
heads  of  the  harpoons  used,  however,  were  re- 
portedly heavier  and  larger  (perhaps  by  50%)  than 
those  of  the  usual  sealing  harpoons  (McGhee,  1 974, 
pp.  39-40).  There  are  no  such  implements  in  the 


Paugvik  collection,  in  which  the  delicate  (and  rare) 
examples  of  toggling  heads  (artifact  class  1)  must 
have  been  used  for  animals  no  larger  than  seals. 
Although  some  of  the  larger  slate  blades  of  the 
collection  (end  blades  of  type  1 ,  artifact  class  1 5) 
could  well  have  armed  lances  used  for  whale  killing 
and  butchery  (cf  Krech,  1989,  p.  106,  Figs.  5b,d, 
16a),  there  is  nothing  to  show  them  as  any  way 
specialized  for  that  purpose.  Others  of  the  same 
type  probably  were  used  to  tip  both  arrowheads 
for  land  animals  and  harpoons  for  seals,  although 
for  seals  barbed  dart  heads  of  bone  or  ivory  would 
also  have  been  used. 


Birds 

The  Alaska  Peninsula  is  a  staging  area  for  the  mi- 
gration of  numerous  species  of  migratory  water- 
fowl (UA,  1974,  p.  46 Iff;  FWS,  1985,  pp.  2-10). 
Although  the  major  areas  involved  are  located  well 
southwest  of  Paugvik,  the  high  proportion  among 
bird  remains  of  ducks  and  geese  of  various  species 


Part  Five 


Table  8.    Continued. 


H5 

H6 

Tl 

T4 

73T 

61T 

Total 

E     I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

E 

I 

5    1 

627 
2 

11 

1 

66 

2 

82 
14 

3 
1 

182 

1 

6 
1 

13 

2 

1306+ 
41 

36 

5 

+ 

4 

2 

1 

12 
7 

1 

2 
1 

1 

1 

1 

18  + 

7 
1 
1 

11   ' 
1 

1 
1 

+ 

3 

4 

1 

10 

2 

14+ 

9 

+ 

9 

+ 
+ 

1 

4 

104 

4 

1 

1 

109+ 
11  + 

21 
6 

2 

1 

+ 

1 

1 

1 

3  + 

4 

?1 

1 

?1 

1 

34 

2 

4 

1 

?2 
38 

2 
3 

1    1 

169 

4 

19 

1 

16 

1 

49 

2 

6 

2 

384 

15 

39 

3 

7 

1 

67 

5 

5 
1 

2 
1 

125  + 
1 

15 
1 

117 

11 

1 

1 

32 

6 

83 

27 

3 

3 

306 

60 

50 

3 

23 

1 

+ 

4 

32 

1 

211  + 

43  + 

1 

8 

1 

2 

1 
1 

443 

41 

1 

223 

24 

1 

488  + 

46+ 

5 

1 

268 

29 

5 

1 

meets  expectations.  The  overall  number  of  bird 
elements  recovered,  however  (Table  8),  is  small 
enough  to  suggest  that  birds  were  not  a  major  sta- 
ple. The  presence  of  some  egg  shells  accords  well 
with  local  reports  of  the  gathering  of  eggs,  es- 
pecially gull  eggs,  in  the  summer  months  (Du- 
mond,  1973-1985,  fieldnotes,  1973,  1974). 


Fishes 

Of  all  the  expected  major  food  resources,  salmon 
and  other  fish  remains  are  the  least  well  repre- 
sented. Although  a  considerable  quantity  of  fishing 
equipment  was  recovered,  including  both  spears 
and  net  parts  (see  Table  2),  the  actual  remains  of 
fish  are  not  common,  although  salmon  did  provide 
the  major  fraction  of  the  modest  sample  (Table 
9).  One  reason  for  this  shortage  must  lie  in  pres- 
ervation, especially  of  the  relatively  soft  salmon 
bones.  A  second  and  probably  more  important 
reason,  however,  is  the  practice  of  filleting  the  fish 
for  drying  or  smoking,  with  the  mass  of  bony  parts 


left  at  the  processing  point  rather  than  taken  into 
the  houses.  Figure  5  (p.  11)  shows  racks  of  drying 
salmon. 

Of  the  remaining  fishes  (Table  9),  the  inconnu 
(sheefish)  is  normally  not  found  south  of  the  Kus- 
kokwim  River  (Morrow,  1980,  p.  25),  and  the 
identification,  evidently  made  from  a  single  scale, 
may  be  in  error.  Other  whitefish,  as  well  as  pike 
and  grayling,  are  present  in  the  Naknek  River  sys- 
tem and  could  have  been  taken  there  in  open  water 
or,  possibly,  through  the  ice.  None  of  these  species 
is  so  well  represented  as  to  suggest  they  were  cru- 
cial to  subsistence. 


•^ 


Shellfish 


Shellfish,  given  the  high  proportion  of  relatively 
long-lasting  debris  (i.e.,  shell)  versus  edible  meat 
and  the  small  number  of  shells  recovered  in  the 
excavations,  must  have  been  relatively  unimpor- 
tant as  a  staple  food,  although  no  doubt  would 
have  been  a  welcome  seasonal  protein  supple- 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        93 


Table  9.    Skeletal  elements  (E)  and  minimum  number  of  individual  (I)  birds  and  fishes  identified  from  previous 
Paugvik  work.'' 


1973  Trench 

1961  Trench 

Animal 

E 

I 

E                        I 

Birds* 

Loon  {Gavia  stellata) 

5 

2 

Grebe  {Podiceps  sp.) 

1 

1 

Cormorant  (Phalacrocorax  sp.) 

1 

1 

Duck  (Anatinae  or  Aythyinae) 

29 

8 

1                        1 

Goose  (Anser  or  Branta) 

34 

8 

1                        1 

Tundra  swan  {Cygnns  cf.  columbianus) 

2 

1 

Murre  {Uria  sp.) 

1 

1 

Gull  {Larus  spp.) 

5 

2 

Bald  eagle  (Haliaeetus  leucocephalus) 

1 

1 

1                        1 

Ptarmigan  {Lagopus  spp.) 

3 

1 

Raven  {Corvm  corax) 

1 

1 

Fishes 

Bone  waste 

Silver  salmon  (Oncorhynchus  kisutch) 

8 

Salmon  {Oncorhynchus  spp.) 

1  + 

23 

Scales 
Salmon  (Oncorhynchus  spp.) 
Whitefish  (undetermined) 
Arctic  grayling  (Thymallus  arcticus) 
Inconnu  (Stenodus  leucichthys) 
Northern  pike  {Esox  lucius) 


1 

1  + 
1 
1 

1  + 


"  Adapted  from  Dumond  (1981,  Table  6.32). 

*  Also  represented  by  various  shells  of  unidentified  species. 


ment.  Most  common  is  the  macoma  clam,  a  chalky- 
shelled  mud  clam  that  is  found  in  the  inlets  of 
upper  Bristol  Bay.  Colonies  of  the  second  most 
frequent,  the  common  blue  mussel,  are  present 
wherever  there  are  rocky  outcrops  exposed  at  low 
tide,  as  at  the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River. 


concentrations  were  known  only  from  Area  6A  by 
House  6,  in  the  short  trench  excavated  in  1961, 
and  in  what  had  clearly  been  a  pit  full  of  them  that 
was  recognized  in  the  face  of  the  bluff  below  the 
site  where  it  was  exposed  by  erosion  in  1975  (Du- 
mond, 1981,  pp.  65,67). 


Vegetal  Foods 

The  only  example  here  is  provided  by  rhizomes 
of  a  fern  of  the  family  Aspleniaceae,  probably  wood 
fern  {Dtyopteris  sp.).  These  rhizomes  were  recov- 
ered in  some  quantity  in  1961  and  in  the  1970s 
(Dumond,  1981,  pp.  65,  67,  where  they  were  ten- 
tatively identified  as  the  related  Polystichum),  and 
within  the  pit  in  Area  6 A  of  1985.  A  plant  of 
southeastern  Alaska,  Cook  Inlet,  and  the  Bristol 
Bay  region,  the  wood  fern  is  known  as  a  food 
source;  the  old  leafstalks  on  the  underground  stem 
are  dug  in  early  spring  for  roasting  and  the  young 
fiddleheads  in  summer  are  eaten  boiled  or  steamed 
(UA,  1981,  p.  14).  The  dietary  importance  of  this 
plant  at  Paugvik  is  unclear.  Although  found  in 
scattered  examples  throughout  the  site  in  1985, 


Conclusion 

Based  on  ethnographic  information  from  south- 
western Alaska,  salmon,  systematically  preserved 
and  stored,  probably  represented  the  single  most 
important  staple  of  the  Paugvik  people,  although 
we  do  not  have  direct  archaeological  evidence  of 
such  reliance.  Second  in  importance  to  salmon 
appears  to  have  been  beluga,  followed  somewhat 
distantly  by  caribou  or  bear,  or  both,  followed 
even  more  distantly  by  seal.  The  other  mammals 
represented  in  Table  8  probably  were  used  pri- 
marily for  purposes  other  than  food,  although  the 
situation  with  bear  is  unclear.  Waterfowl  were 
clearly  taken  and  were  probably  important  but  to 
a  much  lesser  degree.  The  importance  of  gathered 
eggs  cannot  be  assessed  on  the  basis  of  present 


94 


Part  Five 


Table  10.     Proportions  of  mammal  foods  probably  available  at  Paugvik. 


Min.  no. 

(%)  animals  represented'' 

Estimated 
individual 
_  live  weight 
(lb) 

Total 

live  weight 

taken 

(lb) 

Total  weight 
(%) 

Species 

E 

I 

Caribou 
Bear 
Beluga 
Seal 
Total 

1,306  + 
41 

422 

125  + 
1,894 

(68.9) 
(2.2) 

(22.3) 

(6.6) 

(100.0) 

36 
5 

18 
15 

74 

(48.6) 

(6.8) 

(24.3) 

(20.3) 

(100.0) 

250 
1,200 
3,000 

250 

9,000 
6,000 

54,000 
3,750 

72,750 

12.4 
8.2 

74.2 

5.2      ' 
100.0 

"  E  =  skeletal  elements;  I  =  individuals. 


evidence.  Although  wood  fern  was  evidently  a 
common  foodstuff,  its  overall  importance  to  the 
diet  is  unclear.  Lacking  from  the  collection  are 
remains  of  species  of  berries  such  as  that  locally 
called  blackberry  {Empetrum  nigrum),  which  is 
common  along  the  lower  Naknek  River.  It  is  gath- 
ered heavily  by  local  people  today  and  without 
doubt  was  important  in  the  past. 


The  Fur  Trade 

The  most  important  fur-bearing  animals  at  Nush- 
agak  at  the  end  of  the  Russian  period  were  beaver, 
river  or  land  otter,  muskrat,  fox,  and  lynx  (Elliott, 
1875,  p.  40).  Russian  traders  also  accepted  bear 
and  wolf  pelts,  however  (e.g.,  Khlebnikov,  1976, 
Appendix  4;  Oswalt,  1980,  p.  86).  At  Paugvik, 
bone  waste  indicates  (in  order  of  abundance)  in- 
dividuals of  fox,  beaver,  dog  or  wolf,  bear,  otter, 
and  muskrat.  Confirmation  is  found  in  the  pres- 
ence of  fur  identified  as  beaver,  bear,  muskrat,  and 
canid  (Table  2,  Appendix). 

This  evidence  supports  the  statement  regarding 
the  fur  animals  important  at  Alexandrovskiy,  and 
suggests  in  the  case  of  fox  and  otter  that  some 
trapping  was  done  close  enough  to  the  Paugvik 
settlement  for  the  animals  to  have  been  brought 
home  and  skinned  there.  Trench  4  produced  the 
essentially  complete  skeletons  of  one  fox  and  one 
otter  (recorded  as  feature  14)  in  positions  indi- 
cating disposal  of  the  whole  articulated  animal 
corpses  at  a  location  that  would  have  been  only  a 
short  distance  outside  the  door  of  House  3. 

However,  both  bears  and  wolves  killed  for  fur 
alone  probably  would  have  been  skinned  outside 
the  village.  If  so,  this  implies  that  the  bulk  of  the 
possible  wolf  bones  in  and  around  the  Paugvik 
houses  were  more  likely  those  of  dogs,  whereas 
the  presence  of  bear  bones  seems  to  say  that  at 


least  portions  of  the  bear  carcasses  were  brought 
into  Paugvik  as  meat. 

Activities  within  the  fur  trade  are  clearly  con- 
firmed by  finds  of  fur  stretchers  within  House  6 
of  a  size  for  both  fox  and  muskrat  (Table  2,  item 
no.  32). 


Seasonality 

In  the  sample  presented  here,  the  seasons  from 
spring  through  summer  to  fall  are  indicated  by  a 
range  of  forms,  including  the  belugas  and  salmon, 
which  are  available  through  much  of  the  entire 
period.  Birds'  eggs  and  fern  parts  are  associated 
with  spring.  Winter  appears  to  be  chiefly  marked 
by  the  caribou  remains,  overwhelmingly  those  of 
mature  individuals  carrying  antlers. 

The  major  peninsula  caribou  subherd  calves  in 
spring  southwest  of  Port  Heiden.  In  summer  the 
animals  scatter,  but  in  early  fall  all  drift  northward 
to  winter  on  the  coastal  plain  northeast  of  the  Uga- 
shik  River,  returning  south  in  late  February  or 
March.  A  high  point  in  herd  numbers  seems  to 
have  been  reached  in  the  mid- 1 9th  century,  forc- 
ing the  limit  of  their  winter  migration  farther 
northeast.  Thus,  as  of  the  early  1870s,  Elliott  re- 
ported caribou  to 

cross  and  recross  the  Kvichak  River  in  large  herds  during 

the  month  of  September At  the  mouth  of  this  stream 

is  one  of  the  broadest  deer-roads  in  the  country.  The 
natives  run  along  the  banks  of  the  river  when  reindeer 
[sic]  are  swimming  across,  easily  and  rapidly . . .  securing 
in  this  way  any  number  that  fancy  or  want  may  dictate. 
(Elliott,  1886,  p.  397) 

During  that  period,  then,  caribou  must  have  been 
available  in  the  immediate  Naknek  vicinity  much 
of  the  time  from  September  until  March.  Those 
animals  represented  in  the  bone  waste  at  Paugvik 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        95 


Table  1 1 .    Counts  of  potsherds  from  sites  in  south- 
western Alaska." 


Native 

Site 

pottery 

Chinaware 

Kijik 

0 

1,092 

Kolmakovskiy  Redoubt 

1 

3,480 

Akulivikchuk 

2 

329 

Nushagak 

12 

317 

Crow  Village 

61 

325 

Tikchik 

310 

223 

Paugvik 

1,506 

48 

"  Based  on  information  from  Oswalt  and  VanStone 
(1967),  VanStone  (1968,  1970,  1972),  VanStone  and 
Townsend  (1970),  and  Oswalt  (1980). 


were  probably  taken  locally,  as  suggested  by  the 
large  numbers  of  skeletal  elements  compared  with 
the  apparent  number  of  individual  animals  (Table 
8,  ratio  of  E:I),  the  ratio  being  the  highest  of  the 
four  large  mammal  forms  in  Table  10.  Had  the 
meat  been  hauled  long  distances,  more  boning 
probably  would  have  taken  place  outside  the  Paug- 
vik settlement. 

In  addition  to  evidence  from  caribou  remains, 
fur  trapping  customarily  took  place  principally  in 
fall  and  winter  seasons;  thus,  the  evidence  for  such 
activity  at  Paugvik  provides  some  confirmation  of 
winter  occupation.  The  use  of  the  site  in  winter  is 
suggested  strongly  by  the  nature  of  the  habitations 
themselves:  semisubterranean  structures  with  sub- 
stantial central  fireplaces. 

Thus,  the  immediate  area  of  the  Paugvik  settle- 
ment probably  was  occupied  by  at  least  some  peo- 
ple all  year  round.  However,  the  houses  excavated 
were  not  necessarily  the  living  sites  in  all  seasons. 
Accounts  of  local  people  in  the  1920s  and  1930s 
indicate  the  custom  of  moving  from  the  perma- 
nent winter  house  (by  that  time  an  above-ground 
frame  structure)  into  tents  for  summer.  Although 
the  tents  might  move  to  several  locations  during 
the  ice-free  season,  they  were  often  only  a  few 
yards  from  the  winter  settlement.  We  suppose  that 
a  comparable  pattern  existed  during  the  period  of 
occupation  at  the  Paugvik  site. 


wise  confined  to  the  older,  thicker  pottery  variety 
that  was  mixed  with  some  later  deposits.  Given 
the  arrival  of  Russians  along  the  southern  coast 
of  the  Alaska  Peninsula  less  than  two  decades  be- 
fore A.D.  1 800  and  the  establishment  of  the  post 
at  Nushagak  only  in  1819,  the  major  occupation 
in  the  excavated  portion  of  the  site  probably  did 
not  predate  1 800  and  may  not  have  begun  earlier 
than  about  1810. 

When  we  began  our  research,  we  expected  to 
find  evidence  of  the  same  occupation  lasting  until 
at  least  1 900  and  perhaps  beyond,  with  some  ar- 
tifacts relating  to  the  period  of  the  development 
of  the  commercial  fishery  and  the  presence  of  can- 
neries in  those  later  years.  Upon  completion  of 
our  analysis,  however,  our  conclusion  differs  sig- 
nificantly from  our  expectation. 

The  small  number  of  trade  artifacts  in  the  sam- 
ple makes  absolutely  specific  dating  difficult,  and 
the  period  of  occupation  is  both  too  late  and  too 
short  for  the  radiocarbon  method  to  provide  any 
assistance.  But  the  very  shortage  of  imported  trade 
objects  at  the  site  now  appears  to  have  temporal 
significance. 


Ceramics 

As  discussed  in  Part  4,  fragments  of  imported  chi- 
naware are  far  outnumbered  by  those  of  native 
pottery.  In  this  aspect  Paugvik  stands  in  marked 
contrast  to  other  19th-century  sites  excavated  in 
southwestern  Alaska  (Table  1 1). 

Of  the  few  imported  sherds  from  Paugvik  that 
can  be  reasonably  dated  on  stylistic  grounds  or 
manufacturer's  identification  (Table  3),  some  are 
types  that  endured  to  the  end  of  the  1 9th  century 
or  beyond.  But  none  of  them  so  identified  were 
necessarily  manufactured  after  about  1 850,  and  at 
least  one  would  have  been  made  not  later  than 
1847  (i.e..  Table  3,  sherd  no.  4). 


Beads 


Dating 

Trade  beads  were  recovered  at  essentially  every 
excavation  site,  the  single  exception  being  a  short 
and  unproductive  section  of  Trench  1 .  Evidence 
of  times  before  contact  with  Europeans  is  other- 


Although  the  precise  chronology  of  bead  types  in- 
troduced to  Alaska  is  obscure,  it  appears  that  the 
green-lined  red  variety  of  Comaline  d' Aleppo  beads 
did  pre-date  the  other  varieties  of  that  type.  The 
fairly  substantial  sample  of  Comaline  d' Aleppo 
beads  from  the  Paugvik  sites  is  entirely  of  this 
earlier  green-lined  variety. 


96 


Part  Five 


Metal 

By  far  the  majority  of  metal  objects  from  Paugvik 
are  those  fashioned  into  aboriginal-style  imple- 
ments. Metal  animal  traps  are  lacking  entirely,  as 
is  common  at  19th-century  sites  of  the  region, 
despite  efforts  of  the  Russians  to  introduce  such 
traps  for  beaver  (Zagoskin,  1967,  p.  221;  Oswalt, 
1980,  p.  83).  Much  more  uncommon  in  the  case 
of  Paugvik  is  the  absence  of  tin  cans;  tin  cans  have 
been  reported  from  all  of  the  comparator  sites  (such 
as  those  listed  in  Table  1 1).  The  unusual  shape  of 
two  of  the  ulus  (Table  2,  item  no.  62),  with  the 
curving  metal  strip  as  handle,  may  indicate  some 
temporal  category  of  which  we  are  unfamiliar;  cer- 
tainly they  are  not  standard  trade  objects  of  the 
American  period.  One  of  the  axe  heads  (Table  2, 
item  no.  44)  is  of  a  type  known  to  have  been  as- 
sociated with  the  Russian-American  Company. 


Glass 

Bottle  glass  (Table  2,  item  no.  98)  is  represented 
by  only  eight  fragments,  two  of  them  retouched  as 
scrapers,  the  total  less  even  than  the  very  small 
number  recovered  at  Tikchik  (VanStone,  1968) 
and  only  about  10%  of  the  glass  found  at  Akuli- 
vikchuk  (VanStone,  1970).  This  indicates  a  very 
limited  acquisition  of  bottled  products  of  any  kind. 
The  characteristics  of  the  1 1  fragments  of  window 
glass  (Table  2,  item  no.  132)  are  in  keeping  with 
a  date  between  about  1840  and  1870. 


Summary  and  Conclusions 

We  have  mentioned  specifically  the  artifact  classes 
that  seem  to  us  to  carry  rather  direct  temporal 
implications.  In  Part  1  and  elsewhere,  we  have 
made  additional  remarks  leading  to  a  similar  end. 
Here  we  briefly  summarize  these  and  add  still  oth- 
er circumstances  that  contribute  to  our  conclu- 
sions. 

The  Orthodox  Church  in  Alaska  holds  many 
recognized  chapel  sites  in  both  present  and  former 
settlements,  some  with  structures  standing  (and  in 
use)  and  some  with  none.  For  instance,  there  are 
three  such  Church  holdings  on  the  mainland  coast 
of  Shelikof  Strait  almost  directly  across  the  pen- 
insula from  Paugvik,  all  of  them  at  settlements 
occupied  in  the  19th  century  and  substantially 
contemporary  with  Paugvik.  These  are  at  the  for- 
mer settlements  of  Katmai  and  Douglas,  both 


abandoned  in  1912,  and  at  a  site  on  Kukak  Bay, 
evidently  abandoned  sometime  before  1 900. 

Examination  of  local  Naknek-vicinity  owner- 
ship records  both  in  the  office  of  the  Bristol  Bay 
Borough,  at  Naknek,  and  in  the  Bureau  of  Land 
Management  regional  office  in  Anchorage  and 
queries  to  officials  of  the  Orthodox  Church  reveal 
no  comparable  holding  in  or  adjacent  to  the  area 
we  recognized  and  excavated  as  Paugvik  but  rather 
only  the  single  site  of  the  present  Orthodox  relig- 
ious structure,  which  is  located  on  the  bluff"  above 
the  Naknek  River  somewhat  to  the  west  of  the 
center  of  present  Naknek  village,  2  km  upstream 
from  Paugvik.  When  the  first  chapel  was  con- 
structed in  1876  (ARC,  1733-1938,  Nushagak, 
Church/Clergy  Registers,  Sts.  Peter  and  Paul 
Church,  1876)  it  was  at  this  site— one  seemingly 
much  more  convenient  to  modem  Naknek  than 
to  the  site  we  explored.  The  church  was  in  active 
use  in  1900  when  photographed  by  a  U.S.  Fish 
Commission  party  (Fig.  47),  and  its  replacement 
structure  still  stands. 

Although  Elliott  (1886)  described  the  aban- 
doned village  of  "Paugwik"  as  "marked  by  the 
outlines  of  its  cemetery"  (which  seems  to  imply 
the  existence  of  an  Orthodox  burial  ground),  there 
is  no  sign  of  any  such  graveyard  near  the  village 
of  our  excavations.  The  only  Orthodox  cemetery 
in  evidence  in  the  region  is  that  surrounding  the 
modem  church  building  at  the  Naknek  location. 

The  comments  attributed  by  Larsen  (1950)  to 
the  postmaster  at  Naknek  at  the  time  of  his  visit 
in  1 948  indicated  that  the  former  village  site  we 
know  as  Paugvik  had  already  been  abandoned  for 
some  20  years  in  1895.  Also,  the  imported  ma- 
terial recovered  at  Paugvik  includes  nothing  of  the 
plentiful  quantity  that  seems  clearly  related  at  oth- 
er sites  to  occupation  after  the  development  of  the 
commercial  fishing  industry  in  the  region  (as,  for 
instance,  at  Kijik;  see  VanStone  &  Townsend, 
1970).  Furthermore,  although  a  few  trade  objects 
in  the  Paugvik  collection  could  date  from  the 
American  period  (i.e.,  after  the  late  1860s),  there 
is  nothing  in  that  collection  that  must  date  from 
the  American  period,  whereas  everything  reason- 
ably datable  could  equally  well  be  from  several 
decades  earlier. 

Given  all  of  the  above,  we  accept  the  import  of 
Elliott's  statement  that  was  based  on  his  visit  of 
the  mid- 1870s.  We  conclude  that  the  major  oc- 
cupation of  the  archaeological  Paugvik  site  began 
as  early  as  1 800  and  that  all  occupation  ended  by 
1870.  Thus,  it  is  a  site  representative  of  the  Rus- 
sian period  alone. 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        97 


AIbatroB$  -AlaBka-1906 
Bristol  Bay  Diet, 


*-. . 

lf^\^^^^"^ 

vinr-  'HI 

K\iK\ 


Fig.  47.     Russian  Orthodox  chapel  near  Naknek,  1900.  U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service  photo  no.  22-FFA-2547, 
U.S.  National  Archives. 


Paugvik  in  the  Russian  Period 

Some  of  the  Russian  period  settlement  of  Paugvik 
certainly  has  slipped  down  the  bluff  with  tidal  ero- 
sion, which  has  been  severe  in  the  past.  The  por- 
tion remaining  in  1985  (Figs.  8,  9,  pp.  17,  18), 
however,  must  provide  some  indication  of  the 
contemporary  appearance  of  the  village,  with  the 
houses  strung  out  along  the  bluff  above  the  river. 
There  is  no  indication  of  a  Russian  chapel  or  cem- 
etery at  the  site  as  it  remains,  and  there  is  no 
documentary  evidence  that  would  indicate  any  such 
presence  there,  rather  than  closer  to  modem  Nak- 
nek. 

With  regard  to  another  common  feature  of  1 9th- 
century  native  sites  in  the  region,  the  kazhim  or 
qasigiq,  however,  the  situation  may  be  different. 
According  to  historical  accounts,  the  Aglurmiut 
were  like  their  linguistic  relatives  of  the  Kusko- 


kwim  River  vicinity  in  the  use  of  a  community 
structure  that  served  also  as  men's  residence  house 
(Wrangell,  1970,  pp.  17-18,  1980,  pp.  65-67).  This 
is  described  as  of  construction  similar  to  that  of 
the  ordinary  semisubterranean  winter  house,  al- 
though larger,  entered  by  a  tunnel  entrance,  and 
with  an  especially  large  and  deeply  sunken  fire- 
place in  the  center  (Elliott,  1986,  pp.  385-387; 
Zagoskin,  1967,  p.  115).  Examples  of  these  struc- 
tures, with  the  well-marked  entrance  tunnel  arid 
large  and  deep  firepits,  have  been  excavated  at  sites 
such  as  Tikchik  and  Akulivikchuk  (VanStone, 
1968,  figs.  1 6, 1 8;  1 970,  fig.  1 1 ).  We  suspect  strong- 
ly that  one  such  structure  is  represented  at  the 
Paugvik  site  by  the  large  depression  located  be- 
tween Houses  1  and  2  (Figure  9,  p.  18).  This  sus- 
picion is  suggested  by  its  size— from  surface  ap- 
pearance the  largest  house  on  the  site— and  by  its 
depth,  which  indicates  the  sort  of  central  hole  that 


98 


Part  Five 


would  incorporate  a  deep  fireplace.  We  decided 
against  excavation  of  this  depression,  however, 
both  because  of  its  rather  daunting  dimensions  and 
because  it  is  the  most  heavily  vandalized  area  at 
the  site.  The  tentativeness  of  our  conclusion  is 
based  on  evidence  of  recent  digging  in  the  center 
of  the  depression.  This  haphazard  excavation  had 
been  so  extensive  as  to  make  it  actually  unclear 
whether  the  depth  was  really  because  of  an  original 
fireplace  or  simply  the  result  of  vandals'  digging. 

Aside  from  this  area,  the  houses  of  the  site  ap- 
peared relatively  uniform,  and  this  uniformity  was 
confirmed  in  our  excavations:  all  consisting  of  a 
single  room  with  sunken  entry  tunnel,  comparable 
to  houses  at  sites  such  as  Tikchik  and  Akulivik- 
chuk  (VanStone,  1968,  1970)  but  without  the  ev- 
idence of  storm  sheds  at  the  outer  end  of  the  en- 
trances. Whether  this  represents  a  real  absence  or 
simply  our  failure  to  recognize  traces  of  such  sheds 
in  the  excavations  is  not  clear. 

One  surprise  was  in  the  consistent  evidence  for 
reconstructions  and  superimpositions  of  houses  at 
the  site.  Although  all  versions  of  all  houses  yielded 
glass  beads  bespeaking  a  period  of  European  or 
American  contact,  there  is  unmistakable  evidence 
for  at  least  three  generations  of  houses  during  the 
time  the  site  was  occupied.  Seventy-five  years  is 
considered  the  longest  reasonable  span  of  occu- 
pation in  the  portion  of  the  site  we  excavated;  thus 
about  25  years  appears  to  be  about  the  maximum 
length  of  time  that  such  a  semisubterranean  struc- 
ture could  be  expected  to  retain  its  usefulness  be- 
fore reaching  a  stage  of  rot  that  would  render  con- 
tinued use  dangerous.  This  situation,  together  with 
the  number  of  house  remains  encountered  in  our 
excavations  that  were  not  indicated  clearly  on  the 
surface  (at  least  equaling  the  number  we  recog- 
nized on  the  surface  and  expected  to  excavate), 
should  serve  as  reminders  for  archaeologists  who 
make  much  of  village  size  and  population  esti- 
mates based  on  nothing  more  than  the  surface 
appearances  of  southern  Alaska  archaeological 
sites. 

Beyond  the  physical  condition  of  the  site,  an 
element  that  stands  out  as  strongly  characteristic 
is  the  small  number  of  imported  goods  recovered. 
Although  the  people  of  the  settlement  were  ob- 
viously active  in  pursuing  furs  for  the  Russian 
trade,  the  Russians  apparently  were  not  lavish  in 
dispensing  payment  in  imported  goods. 

Although  upon  first  arrival  in  the  New  World 
the  Russian  fur  hunters  had  instituted  the  Siberian 
practice  of  collecting  yasak  from  the  natives  (the 
headtax  payable  in  furs  by  each  man),  some  years 


before  the  establishment  of  the  Russian-American 
Company  in  1 799  a  change  was  instituted  by  which 
natives  of  the  Aleutian  Islands  and  Kodiak  were 
organized  into  hunting  parties  under  Russian  su- 
pervision, with  the  hunters  being  paid  according 
to  their  individual  success  (Gibson,  1976,  p.  32n). 
This  procedure  was  not  so  commonly  employed 
in  the  region  north  of  the  Alaska  Peninsula,  al- 
though a  few  hunting  parties  were  organized  in 
somewhat  this  fashion  (e.g.,  Oswalt,  1980,  p.  81). 
For  the  most  part,  natives  were  simply  encouraged 
to  hunt,  with  prodding  from  the  toyon,  and  their 
take  was  purchased  by  barter.  In  this  process  the 
Company  traded  European  goods  for  furs  and  en- 
gaged in  trading  furs  from  one  region  to  another, 
thus  trading  skins  less  desirable  (to  the  Russians), 
such  as  wolf,  wolverine,  and  caribou,  into  regions 
where  they  were  wanted  by  natives.  Thus  they 
gained  beaver  and  otter  (Oswalt,  1980,  p.  80).  In 
any  event,  the  result  appears  to  have  been  the 
introduction  of  very  few  exotic  objects  into  the 
site  at  Paugvik. 


Relations  with  Neighbors 

Historical  accounts  indicate  that  the  Aglurmiut 
first  entered  Bristol  Bay  no  earlier  than  about  a.d. 
1 800,  when  their  warlike  behavior  displaced  pre- 
vious inhabitants  to  the  Sevemovsk  settlements 
of  the  upper  Naknek  River  drainage  and  to  the 
Ugashik  River.  In  seeming  contradiction  of  this 
bit  of  history,  however,  are  conclusions  from  pre- 
vious archaeological  work  in  the  Naknek  region. 
When  information  from  Paugvik  was  confined  to 
results  of  the  limited  excavations  of  1 96 1  and  1973 
and  to  the  short  statement  of  Larsen  (1950),  it  was 
concluded  that  the  Paugvik  people's  "material  cul- 
ture was  substantially  indistinguishable  from  that 
of  the  people  they  displaced"  (Dumond,  1981,  p. 
185).  Since  the  time  of  that  report,  however,  in- 
formation from  the  latest  precontact  (Brooks  Riv- 
er Bluffs)  phase  of  the  upper  Naknek  region  ob- 
tained in  three  seasons  of  excavation  by  the  Na- 
tional Park  Service  (Harritt,  1 988)  and  the  analysis 
of  the  1985  Paugvik  collection  suggest  a  modifi- 
cation of  this  view. 

As  reported  elsewhere  (Dumond,  1994),  be- 
tween the  Pavik  archaeological  phase  of  the  Paug- 
vik site  (beginning  ca.  a.d.  1800)  and  the  Brooks 
River  Bluffs  phase  of  the  Naknek  region  (a.d.  1 450- 
1800),  discrepancies  are  noteworthy  both  in  the 
form  of  the  ordinary  habitations  and  in  the  quan- 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        99 


tity  of  ceramics.  In  the  Bluffs  phase  the  late  pre- 
historic houses  were  dominated  by  multiroom 
structures  that  appear  comparable,  although  not 
identical,  to  native  houses  of  Kodiak  Island  of  the 
same  period.  In  the  same  phase  there  was  a  marked 
decline  in  the  use  of  ceramics  from  the  immedi- 
ately prior  (Brooks  River  Camp)  phase  (a.d.  1 050- 
1450):  during  the  Camp  phase,  the  number  of  pot- 
tery sherds  amounted  to  64%  of  the  total  of  stone 
implements  recovered,  whereas  the  overall  pro- 
portion of  sherds  to  stone  artifacts  in  all  Bluffs 
phase  sites  sampled  dropped  to  a  mere  7%.  This 
situation  is  parallel  to  the  contemporary  situation 
on  much  of  the  Kodiak  Island  group,  where  ce- 
ramics were  known  but  scarcely  used  (e.g.,  Jordan 
&  Knecht,  1988;  Dumond,  1991).  This  situation 
changed  dramatically  after  about  a.d.  1 800  with 
the  Pavik  phase  of  the  Paugvik  site,  when  ceramic 
fragments  only  slightly  differing  in  form  from  those 
of  the  Bluffs  phase  exceed  in  number  artifacts  of 
both  stone  and  metal  (Table  8,  p.  17)  and  where 
there  is  no  doubt  that  the  ordinary  habitation  was 
a  single-room  house  entered  by  a  sunken  tunnel 
or  cold  trap. 

Although  a  single-room  house  was  in  use  at  the 
major  Sevemovsk  site  at  the  time  it  was  aban- 
doned in  1912  (and  had  been  for  several  decades, 
according  to  historical  accounts)  1 9th-century  ob- 
servers contrasted  it  with  the  semisubterranean 
house  of  Paugvik  as  being  more  nearly  above 
ground  and  more  commodious  and  involving  more 
wood  in  its  construction  (Porter,  1893,  p.  169; 
Petroff,  1884,  p.  15).  The  1 9 1 2  example  illustrated 
by  Davis  (1954,  Fig.  14)  was  essentially  an  above- 
ground  cabin  covered  with  sod.  Nevertheless,  late 
prehistoric  multiroom  houses  were  reported  at  the 
edge  of  the  same  Sevemovsk  site  (Davis,  1954, 
Map  5,  Fig.  10).  Comparable  multiroom  struc- 
tures are  also  reported  from  a  Bluffs-phase  site 
(designated  49-NAK-0 1 5)  on  the  upper  tidal  por- 
tion of  the  Naknek  River,  where  testing  by  the 
Bureau  of  Indian  Affairs  has  confirmed  impres- 
sions derived  from  surface  configuration  (S.  Neal 
Crozier,  personal  communication,  1993).  Similar 
depressions  suggest  the  presence  of  late-prehistoric 
multiroom  houses  at  a  site  (49-NAK-008)  near 
the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River,  where  occupation 
is  known  to  be  of  the  Brooks  River  Bluffs  phase, 
although  testing  has  suggested  that  some  single- 
room  houses  may  also  have  been  present  (Du- 
mond, 1981,  pp.  78-81). 

Thus  it  appears  that  multiroom  structures  were 
especially  characteristic  of  the  Naknek  area  settle- 


ments of  A.D.  1450-1800,  during  which  time  the 
Naknek  River  drainage  is  thought  to  have  been 
the  home  of  a  single,  relatively  homogeneous  so- 
ciety (Dumond,  1986,  pp.  4-5;  Harritt,  1988,  pp. 
101-115).  It  also  appears  that  there  was  a  change 
in  modal  house  form  in  the  lower  drainage  that 
coincided  with  the  arrival  of  Aglurmiut  people 
described  in  documentary  sources.  Whether  a 
roughly  parallel  shift  occurred  at  the  same  time  in 
the  region  of  the  Sevemovsk  settlements  or  wheth- 
er the  change  there  was  instead  some  result  of  the 
enhanced  Russian  presence  in  the  1 840s  and  after 
is  unknown.  Unfortunately,  no  sites  of  the  precise 
age  of  the  Paugvik  site  have  been  excavated  in  the 
upper  portion  of  the  Naknek  system,  and  until  this 
can  be  accomplished  no  tmly  close  comparison  of 
Russian-period  remains  at  the  two  extremes  of  the 
Naknek  River  drainage  are  possible. 

Nevertheless,  locations  of  settlements  of  this 
date,  between  1800  and  1870,  seem  now  to  be 
confined  to  those  extreme  ends  of  the  river  system. 
That  is,  no  sites  of  the  age  of  archaeological  Paug- 
vik have  been  found  anywhere  in  the  area  between 
the  mouth  of  the  Naknek  River  and  the  tributaries 
completely  above  the  uppermost  portion  of  Nak- 
nek Lake,  where  the  Sevemovsk  settlements  were 
reported  to  be  during  the  Russian  period,  and  where 
the  Sevemovsk  site  is  located  that  was  tested  brief- 
ly by  a  two-man  party  in  the  Katmai  Project  of 
1953  (Davis,  1954).  Extensive  work  at  Brooks 
River,  a  lower  tributary  of  Naknek  Lake,  resulted 
in  the  identification  of  no  significant  occupation 
in  the  1 9th  century.  Although  a  site  of  possibly 
such  age  was  reported  from  a  cursory  examination 
in  1963  (Dumond,  1981,  p.  31),  tests  in  1984  pro- 
vided clear  evidence  that  the  site  in  its  entirety 
postdates  the  1912  volcanic  emption  (Dumond, 
1988).  However,  at  Brooks  River  there  is  a  great 
deal  of  evidence  for  human  use  in  the  decades 
before  a.d.  1 800  and  for  use  resuming  after  1912 
(Dumond,  1981,  1988).  Thus  the  suggestion  made 
on  the  basis  of  historical  and  ethnographic  ac- 
counts, that  there  was  a  kind  of  no-man's  land  that 
separated  the  Aglurmiut  of  Paugvik  and  the  Alii- 
tiiq-speaking  people  of  the  Sevemovsk  settle- 
ments, appears  to  be  confirmed  by  the  material 
evidence  as  we  now  understand  it. 

We  conclude  that  the  evidence  from  the  site 
known  as  Paugvik  and  dated  in  this  work  to  the 
period  of  Russian  control  of  Alaska  confirms  the 
historical  information  as  it  is  provided  in  the  doc- 
umentary sources  available  (summarized  in  Part 
1). 


100 


Part  Five 


Acknowledgments 


The  present  authorship  is  joint  in  all  respects;  the 
order  of  authors'  names  on  the  cover  is  alphabet- 
ical. For  analysis  and  reportage,  VanStone  had 
primary  responsibility  for  native  organic  and  im- 
ported industrial  artifacts,  and  Dumond  had  pri- 
mary responsibility  for  native  ceramics  and  stone 
artifacts,  excavation  details,  feature  definitions,  and 
distributional  comparisons.  Financial  support  for 
the  1 985  excavations  was  provided  by  a  grant  (RO- 
20977-85)  from  the  National  Endowment  for  the 
Humanities  to  the  University  of  Oregon,  tendered 
with  an  offer  of  additional  Treasury  funds  that 
were  matched  by  contributions  from  the  National 
Geographic  magazine,  an  anonymous  research 
foundation  in  Eugene,  Oregon,  the  Field  Museum 
of  Natural  History,  and  the  University  of  Oregon 
Foundation.  Supplemental  support  for  mapping 
and  site  boundary  determination  was  provided  by 
a  Historic  Preservation  Fund  grant-in-aid  (02-85- 
900 1)  from  the  Office  of  History  and  Archaeology, 
Alaska  Division  of  Parks  and  Outdoor  Recreation. 
In  the  field,  the  permission  to  excavate  was  gra- 
ciously given  by  Don  Rawlinson,  Vice  President, 
Peter  Pan  Seafoods,  Inc.  We  are  indebted  to  our 
crew— Ruth  Blazina-Joyce,  Dan  Joyce,  Patricia 
McClenahan,  and  Dennis  Pontius— who  volun- 
teered much  of  their  service  for  the  summer,  and 
to  Roger  Harritt,  Lael  Morgan,  Robert  Sattler,  and 
Robert  Asher,  each  of  whom  joined  us  for  a  few 


days.  Vehicles  were  made  available  by  John  A. 
Davis  and  Brittany  Nowak,  and  housing  was  pro- 
vided by  John  A.  Davis,  Jerry  Holbrook,  and  by 
late-season  efforts  of  Richard  Russell  and  the  Alas- 
ka Department  of  Fish  and  Game.  We  are  grateful 
to  Tony  Malone  of  Naknek,  a  professional  trapper, 
for  identification  of  the  hide  stretchers  and  the 
animals  for  which  they  were  suitable. 

In  the  laboratories,  work  was  supported  by  the 
University  of  Oregon  and  the  Field  Museum  of 
Natural  History.  Flotation  samples  were  exam- 
ined by  Guy  Prouty,  and  faunal  fragments  from 
them  were  identified  by  Dr.  Ruth  Greenspan.  Met- 
als were  identified  by  Dr.  Jonathan  Lederer,  mam- 
mal hair  by  Julia  Hartwick,  and  textile  material 
by  Nancy  Rubin.  Dr.  Louise  Jackson  provided 
valuable  assistance  in  the  identification  and  dating 
of  Euro-American  crockery  fragments.  Figures  1 
and  2  were  drawn  by  Carol  Steichen  Dumond, 
Figure  15  by  Lori  Grove,  and  Figures  31-35  by 
Linnea  M.  Labium.  The  photographs  are  the  work 
of  Ron  Testa,  former  Field  Museum  photogra- 
pher. We  are  especially  grateful  to  Loran  H.  Rec- 
chia,  who  field  catalogued  the  entire  collection, 
repaired  and  restored  many  objects,  and  typed  sev- 
eral drafts  of  the  manuscript.  We  also  are  grateful 
to  Katherine  L.  Amdt,  who  reviewed  Alaska  Rus- 
sian Church  Records  and  located  the  date  of  con- 
struction of  the  first  Naknek  chapel. 

Collections  are  deposited  at  the  Oregon  State 
Museum  of  Anthropology,  University  of  Oregon. 


Paugvik  in  Historical  Context        101 


Literature  Cited 


AcKERMAN,  R.  E.,  AND  L.  AcKERMAN.  1973.  Ethnoar- 
cheological  interpretations  of  territoriality  and  land 
use  in  southwestern  Alaska.  Ethnohistory,  20:  315- 
334. 

ADFG  [Alaska  Department  of  Fish  and  Game].  1 99 1 . 
Division  of  Commercial  Fisheries  Annual  Manage- 
ment Report,  1 990,  Bristol  Bay  Area.  Regional  Infor- 
mation Report  no.  91-1. 

Anderson,  A.  1968.  The  archaeology  of  mass-pro- 
duced footwear.  Historical  Archaeology,  2:  56-65. 

ARC  [Alaska  Russian  Church].  1733-1938.  Ar- 
chives, Series  D  (Geographic  File).  Records  of  the  Rus- 
sian Orthodox  Greek  Catholic  Church  of  North  Amer- 
ica, Diocese  of  Alaska.  Library  of  Congress  Manu- 
script Division,  shelf  no.  19,001. 

.  1816-1936.  Archives,  Series  E  (Vital  Statis- 
tics). Records  of  the  Russian  Orthodox  Greek  Catholic 
Church  of  North  America,  Diocese  of  Alaska.  Library 
of  Congress  Manuscript  Division,  shelf  no.  12,766. 

Barnett,  a.  W.,  and  p.  Schumacher.  1 967.  An  Anal- 
ysis of  the  Archaeological  Excavations  of  the  U.S.  For- 
est Service  at  Old  Sitka,  Sitka,  Alaska  in  1934-35. 
Manuscript  on  file,  U.S.  Forest  Service. 

Barsukov,  L,  ED.  1886-1888.  Tvoreniya  Innokentiya 
Mitropolita  Moskovskago,  3  vols,  in  2.  Synodic,  Mos- 
cow, Russia. 

.    1897-1901.    Pisma  Innokentiya,  Mitropolita 


Moskovskago  i  Kolmenskago  1828-1878.  3  vols.  St. 
Petersburg,  Russia. 

Berkh,  V.  N.  1823a.  Khronologicheskaya  Istoriya  ve- 
sekh  puteshestviy  v  Sevemyya  polyamyya  strany,  2 
pts.  St.  Petersburg,  Russia. 

.    1823b.    Puteshestvie  uchenika  morekhodstva 

Andreya  Ustyugova,  i  sluzhiteley  Rossiyskoy  Amer- 
ikanskoy  Kompanii  Fedora  Kolmakova  i  Petra  Kor- 
sanovskago  v  1819  godu.  Sevemny  Arkhiv,  8(4):  46- 
51. 

Black,  L.T.    1984.  The  Yupik  of  western  Alaska  and 

Russian  impact.  Etudes/Inuit/Studies,8(supplementary 

issue):  21-43. 
Bryant,  C,  and  H.  H.  McIntyre.    1 869.   Resources 

of  Alaska.  41st  U.S.  Congress,  2nd  session.  Senate 

executive  document,  32:  1-43. 
Clark,  D.  W.     1974.    Koniag  Prehistory.  Tubinger 


Monographien  zur  Urgeschichte,  Band  1 .  Verlag  W. 
Kohlhammer,  Stuttgart. 

Davidson,  D.  C.  1941.  Relations  of  the  Hudson's  Bay 
Company  with  the  Russian  American  Company  on 
the  northwest  coast,  1829-1867.  British  Columbia 
Historical  Quarterly,  5:  33-51. 

Davis,  W.  A.  1954.  Archaeological  Investigations  of 
Inland  and  Coastal  Sites  of  the  Katmai  National  Mon- 
ument, Alaska.  Report  to  the  National  Park  Service, 
Department  of  Anthropology,  University  of  Oregon, 
Eugene. 

DI  [U.S.  Department  of  the  Interior].  1980.  Proposed 
Alaska  Peninsula  National  Wildlife  Refuge,  Alaska. 
Draft  Environmental  Impact  Statement. 

DRHA  [Documents  Relative  to  the  History  of  Alaska]. 
1936-1938.  Alaska  History  Project.  Manuscript  in 
the  Rasmuson  Library,  University  of  Alaska,  Fair- 
banks, and  the  Library  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.C. 

DuMOND,  D.  E.  1962a.  Human  prehistory  in  the  Nak- 
nek  Drainage,  Alaska.  Ph.D.  diss..  Department  of  An- 
thropology, University  of  Oregon,  Eugene.  University 
Microfilms  62-4944. 

1 962b.   Prehistory  in  the  Naknek  drainage:  A 


preliminary  statement,  pp.  7-54.  In  Cressman,  L.  S., 
and  D.  E.  Dumond,  eds..  Research  on  Northwest  Pre- 
history: Prehistory  in  the  Naknek  Drainage,  South- 
western Alaska.  Department  of  Anthropology,  Uni- 
versity of  Oregon,  Eugene. 

1973-1985.    Fieldnotes:  Ethnohistory  inter- 


views, Naknek,  Alaska. 

1981.    Archaeology  on  the  Alaska  Peninsula: 


The  Naknek  Region,  1960-1975.  Anthropological  Pa- 
pers of  the  University  of  Oregon,  no.  21. 

1986.    Demographic  effects  of  European  ex- 


pansion: A  nineteenth-century  native  population  on 
the  Alaska  Peninsula.  University  of  Oregon  Anthro- 
pological Papers,  no.  35. 

1 988.  Final  report  on  field  and  library  research 


related  to  Katmai  National  Park  and  Preserve  under 
permits  85KATM/ARO-001  and  85KATM/ARO- 
002,  submitted  January  8,  1988.  Manuscript  report 
on  file  at  the  Alaska  Regional  Office,  U.S.  National 
Park  Service,  Anchorage. 
.    1991.    The  Uyak  Site  in  regional  prehistory: 


102        Literature  Cited 


The  cultural  evidence,  pp.  57-114.  In  Dumond,  D. 
E.,  and  G.  R.  Scott,  The  Uyak  Site  on  Kodiak  Island: 
Its  Place  in  Alaskan  Prehistory.  University  of  Oregon 
Anthrop>ological  Papers,  no.  44. 

1994.    A  reevaluation  of  the  late  prehistoric 


houses  of  the  Naknek  River  region,  southwestern  Alas- 
ka. Arctic  Anthropology,  32(2):  108-1 18. 

Efimov,  a.  v.,  ED.  1964.  Atlas  geograficheskikh  ot- 
krytiy  v  Sibiri  i  v  Severo-Zapadnoy  Amerike  XVII- 
XVIII  vv.  Nauka,  Moscow,  Russia. 

Elliott,  H.  W.  1875.  A  Report  upon  the  Condition 
of  Affairs  in  the  Territory  of  Alaska.  U.S.  Treasury 
Department,  Washington,  D.C. 

.   1886.  Our  Arctic  Province:  Alaska  and  the  Seal 

Islands.  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  New  York. 

Fedorova,  S.  G.  1973a.  New  data  on  Russian  Geo- 
graphic and  ethnographic  investigations  in  Alaska  (first 
half  of  the  1 9th  century).  Paper  read  at  the  9th  Inter- 
national Congress  of  Anthropological  and  Ethnologi- 
cal Sciences,  Chicago,  1973. 

.    1 973b.  The  Russian  Population  in  Alaska  and 

Cahfomia:  Late  18th  Century- 1867.  [Pierce,  R.  A., 
and  A.  S.  Donnelly,  transls.,  eds.]  The  Limestone  Press, 
Kingston,  Ontario. 

FiENUP-RiORDAN,  A.  1990.  Yup'ik  warfare  and  the  myth 
of  the  peaceful  Eskimo,  pp.  146-166.  In  Eskimo  Es- 
says: Yup'k  Lives  and  How  We  See  Them.  Rutgers 
University  Press,  New  Brunswick,  New  Jersey. 

FiTZHUGH,  W.  W.,  AND  S.  A.  Kaplan.  1982.  Inua: 
Spirit  World  of  the  Bering  Sea  Eskimo.  Smithsonian 
Institution  Press,  Washington,  D.C. 

Ford,  J.  A.  1 959.  Eskimo  prehistory  in  the  vicinity  of 
Point  Barrow,  Alaska.  Anthropological  Papers  of  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  47(1). 

Franos,  p.,  Jr.  1988.  Early  Russian  trade  beads  in 
Alaska.  Ornament,  12(1):  26-27,  82-85. 

FWS  [U.S.  Fish  and  Wildlife  Service].  1985.  The  Bris- 
tol Bay  Regional  Management  Plan  and  Final  Envi- 
ronmental Impact  Statement.  U.S.  Department  of  the 
Interior,  Washington,  D.C. 

Gibson,  J.  R.  1 976.  Imperial  Russia  in  Frontier  Amer- 
ica: The  Changing  Geography  of  Supply  of  Russian 
America,  1784-1876.  Oxford  University  Press,  Lon- 
don. 

GoDDEN,  G.  A.  1 964.  Encyclof)edia  of  British  Pottery 
and  Porcelain  Marks.  Crown  Publishers,  New  York. 

Guthrie,  R.  D.  1990.  Frozen  Fauna  of  the  Mammoth 
Steppe:  The  Story  of  Blue  Babe.  University  of  Chicago 
Press,  Chicago. 

Harrttt,  R.  K.  1988.  The  Late  Prehistory  of  Brooks 
River,  Alaska.  University  of  Oregon  Anthropological 
Papers,  no.  38. 

Harrftt,  R.  K.,  AND  D.  E.  DuMOND.  n.d.  Analysis  of 
copper  artifacts  and  raw  materials  from  southern  Alas- 
ka. Manuscript  in  preparation. 

Hemming,  J.  E.  1971.  The  Distribution  and  Movement 
Patterns  of  Caribou  in  Alaska.  Alaska  Department  of 
Fish  and  Game,  Game  Technical  Bulletin,  no.  1. 

Hrdlicka,  A.  1943.  Alaska  Diary,  1926-1931.  Jaques 
Cattell,  Lancaster,  Pennsylvania. 

.    1 944.  Catalog  of  Human  Crania  in  the  United 

States  National  Museum  Collections:  Non-Eskimo 


People  of  the  Northwest  Coast,  Alaska,  and  Siberia. 
Proceedings  of  the  United  States  National  Museum, 
94:  1-175. 

Jewett,  L.  1878.  The  Ceramic  Art  of  Great  Britain 
from  Prehistoric  Times  Down  to  the  Present  Day: 
Being  a  History  of  the  Ancient  and  Modem  Pottery 
and  Porcelain  Works  of  the  Kingdom  and  the  Products 
of  Every  Class.  2  vols.  Virtue  and  Co.,  London. 

Jordan,  R.  A.,  and  R.  A.  Knecht.  1988.  Archaeo- 
logical research  on  western  Kodiak  Island,  Alaska:  The 
development  of  Koniag  culture,  pp.  225-306.  /nShaw, 
R.  D.,  R.  K.  Harritt,  and  D.  E.  Dumond,  eds..  The 
Late  Prehistoric  Development  of  Alaska's  Native  Peo- 
ple. Alaska  Anthropological  Association  Monograph 
Series,  no.  4. 

Kaplan,  S.  A.,  and  K.  T.  Barsness.  1986.  Raven's 
Journey:  The  World  of  Alaska's  Native  People.  The 
University  Museum,  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
Philadelphia. 

Khlebnikov,  K.  T.  1976.  Colonial  Russian  America: 
Kyrill  T.  Khlebnikov's  Reports,  1817-1832.  [Dmy- 
tryshyn,  B.,  and  E.  A.  P.  Crownhart-Vaughan,  transls. 
and  eds.]  Oregon  Historical  Society,  Portland. 

Kidd,  K.  E.,  and  M.  a.  Kidd.  1970.  A  classification 
system  of  glass  beads  for  the  use  of  field  archaeologists, 
pp.  45-89.  In  Canadian  Historical  Sites,  Occasional 
Papers  in  Archaeology  and  History,  no.  1 .  Department 
of  Indian  Affairs  and  Northern  Development,  Ottawa. 

Knecht,  R.  A.,  and  R.  H.  Jordan.  1985.  Nunakakh- 
nak:  An  historic  Koniag  village  in  Karluk,  Kodiak 
Island,  Alaska.  Arctic  Anthropology,  22(2):  1 7-35. 

KowTA,  M.  1 963.  Old  Togiak  in  prehistory.  Ph.D.  diss., 
Department  of  Anthropology,  University  of  Califor- 
nia, Los  Angeles.  University  Microfilms,  Ann  Arbor, 
Michigan. 

Krauss,  M.  1982.  Native  Peoples  and  Languages  of 
Alaska  (map).  Alaska  Native  Language  Center,  Uni- 
versity of  Alaska,  Fairbanks. 

Krech,  S.,  III.  1989.  A  Victorian  Earl  in  the  Arctic: 
The  Travels  and  Collections  of  the  Fifth  Earl  of  Lons- 
dale 1888-89.  University  of  Washington  Press,  Seat- 
tle. 

Langsdorff,  G.  H.  von.  1814.  Voyages  and  Travels 
in  Various  Parts  of  the  World,  During  the  Years  1 803, 
1804,  1805,  and  1807.  Part  II.  The  Voyage  to  the 
Aleutian  Islands  and  North-West  Coast  of  America. 
Henry  Colbum,  London. 

Lantis,  M.  1946.  The  social  culture  of  the  Nunivak 
Eskimo.  Transactions  of  the  American  Philosophical 
Society,  n.s.,  35(3):  153-323. 

Larsen,  H.  1950.  Archaeological  Investigations  in 
southwestern  Alaska.  American  Antiquity,  15(3):  177- 
186. 

Lyapunova,  R.  G.,  and  S.  G.  Fedorova,  eds.    1979. 

Russkaya  Amerika  v  neopublikovannykh  zapiskakh 

K.  T.  Khlebnikova.  Nauka,  Leningrad. 
Mason,  O.  T.    1902.   Aboriginal  American  harpoons: 

A  study  in  ethnic  distribution  and  invention,  pp.  1 89- 

304.  In  Report  of  the  United  States  National  Museum 

for  1900.  Washington,  D.C. 
McGhee,  R.   1974.  Beluga  Hunters:  An  Archaeological 

Reconstruction  of  the  History  and  Culture  of  the  Mac- 


Literature  Cited 


103 


kenzie  Delta  Kittegariyumiut.  Newfoundland  Social 
and  Economic  Studies,  no.  13. 

Morrow,  J.  E.  1 980.  The  Freshwater  Fishes  of  Alaska. 
Northwest  Publishing  Co.,  Anchorage. 

MosER,  J.  F.  1902.  The  Salmon  and  Salmon  Fisheries 
of  Alaska.  Report  of  the  Alaskan  Salmon  Investiga- 
tions of  the  United  States  Fish  Commission  Steamer 
Albatross  in  1900  and  1901.  U.S.  Fish  Commission, 
Washington,  D.C. 

Nelson,  E.W.  1983.  The  Eskimo  About  Bering  Strait, 
pp.  19-518.  In  Eighteenth  Annual  Report  of  the  Bu- 
reau of  American  Ethnology,  Pt.  1 .  U.S.  Fish  Com- 
mission, Washington,  D.C.  [Reprint  of  1899  edition.] 

Olsen,  S.  J.  1963.  Dating  early  American  buttons  by 
their  form.  American  Antiquity,  28(4):  551-554. 

Orchard,  W.  C.  1929.  Beads  and  beadwork  of  the 
American  Indians.  Museum  of  the  American  Indian, 
Heye  Foundation,  contribution  no.  11. 

Oswalt,  W.  H.  1 952a.  The  archaeology  of  Hooper  Bay 
village,  Alaska.  Anthropological  Papers  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Alaska,  1(1):  47-91. 

.  1952b.  The  saucer-shaped  Eskimo  lamp.  An- 
thropological Papers  of  the  University  of  Alaska,  1(2): 
15-33. 

1955.    Alaskan  pottery:  A  classification  and 


historic  reconstruction.  American  Antiquity,  21(1):  32- 
43. 

1980.   Kolmakovskiy  Redoubt:  The  Ethnoar- 


chaeology  of  a  Russian  Fort  in  Alaska.  University  of 
California,  Institute  of  Archaeology,  Monumenta  7 
Archaeologica.  Institute  of  Archaeology,  Los  Angeles. 

Oswalt,  W.  H.,  AND  J.  W.  VanStone.  1967.  The  Eth- 
noarchaeology  of  Crow  Village,  Alaska.  Bureau  of 
American  Ethnology,  bulletin  no.  199. 

Peterson,  H.  L.  1965.  American  Indian  Tomahawks. 
Museum  of  the  American  Indian,  Heye  Foundation, 
contribution  no.  19. 

Petroff,  I.  1881.  Population  and  Resources  of  Alaska. 
46th  U.S.  Congress,  3rd  Session,  House  Executive 
Documents,  no.  40,  series  1968.  Government  Printing 
Office,  Washington,  D.C. 

.    1884.    Report  on  the  Population,  Industries, 

and  Resources  of  Alaska.  Department  of  the  Interior, 
Census  Office,  Washington,  D.C. 

Porter,  R.  P.,  comp.  1893.  Report  on  the  Population 
and  Resources  of  Alaska  at  the  11th  Census:  1890. 
Department  of  the  Interior,  Census  Office,  Washing- 
ton, D.C. 

RAC  [Russian-American  Company].  1818-1865.  Re- 
cords: Communications  Sent  and  Received.  Manu- 
scripts in  the  National  Archives  (Record  Group  1 1). 
Washington,  D.C. 

RoENKE,  K.  G.  1 978.  Flat  glass:  Its  use  as  a  dating  tool 
for  nineteenth  century  archaeological  sites  in  the  Pa- 
cific Northwest  and  elsewhere.  Northwest  Anthropo- 
logical Research  Notes,  12(2):  part  2. 

Russell,  C.  P.  1967.  Firearms,  Traps,  &  Tools  of  the 
Mountain  Men.  Alfred  A.  Knopf,  New  York. 

Saraitan,  W.  L.  1970.  Russian-American  Company 
Employee  Policies  and  Practices,  1799-1867.  Ph.D. 
diss.,  Dept.  of  History,  University  of  California,  Los 


Angeles.  University  Microfilms,  Ann  Arbor,  Michi- 
gan. 

ScHAAF,  J.  1988.  Report  on  the  Denton  Collection. 
Verdant  Cave,  Aialik  Bay,  Kenai  Fjords  National  Park. 
Alaska  Regional  Office,  National  Park  Service,  An- 
chorage. 

Shapiro,  E.  G.  1988.  Trade  beads  excavated  from  a 
European/Konyak  site  on  Kodiak  Island,  Alaska.  The 
Bead  Forum,  13:  7-12. 

Shinkwin,  A.,  AND  E.  Andrews.  1979.  Archaeological 
Excavations  at  the  Erskin  House,  Kodiak,  Alaska— 
1978.  Manuscript  on  file,  University  of  Alaska,  Fair- 
banks. 

Spurr,  J.  E.  1 900.  A  reconnaissance  in  southwestern 
Alaska  in  1 898.  In  Annual  Report  of  the  United  States 
Geological  Survey,  part  7, 20: 3 1-264.  U.S.  Geological 
Survey,  Washington,  D.C. 

Staley,  D.  p.  1990.  The  Archaeological  Analysis  of 
House  15  at  Chagvan  Bay  Beach  Site.  M.A.  thesis, 
Washington  State  University,  Pullman. 

SussMAN,  L.  1979.  Spode/Copeland  transfer-printed 
patterns  found  at  20  Hudson's  Bay  Company  sites. 
Canadian  Historic  Sites,  Occasional  papers  in  Ar- 
chaeology and  History,  22.  Department  of  Indian  Af- 
fairs and  Northern  Development,  Ottawa. 

U A  [University  of  Alaska].  1974.  The  Bristol  Bay  En- 
vironment. Report  for  the  U.S.  Army  Corps  of  En- 
gineers, Alaska  District.  Arctic  Environmental  and 
Data  Center,  and  Institute  of  Social,  Economic,  Gov- 
ernment Research,  University  of  Alaska,  Fairbanks. 

.    1981.    Wild  Edible  and  Poisonous  Plants  of 

Alaska.  Cooperative  Extension  Service,  Publication, 
no.  28. 

U.S.  Census.  1900.  Census  enumeration  sheets,  Alas- 
ka, Bristol  Bay  enumeration  district.  Manuscripts  in 
the  National  Archives,  Washington,  D.C. 

.     1910.    Census  enumeration  sheets,  Alaska, 

Nushagak  enumeration  district.  Manuscripts  in  the 
National  Archives,  Washington,  D.C. 

VanStone,  J.  W.  1 967.  Eskimos  of  the  Nushagak  Riv- 
er: An  Ethnographic  History.  University  of  Washing- 
ton Press,  Seattle. 

1968.   Tikchik  Village:  A  Nineteenth  Century 


Riverine  Community  in  Southwestern  Alaska.  Field- 
iana:  Anthropology,  56(3):  2 1 5-368. 

1 970.  Akulivikchuk:  A  Nineteenth  Century  Es- 


kimo Village  on  the  Nushagak  River,  Alaska.  Fieldi- 
ana:  Anthropology,  60. 

1972.   Nushagak:  An  Historic  Trading  Center 


in  Southwestern  Alaska.  Fieldiana:  Anthropology,  62. 

VanStone,  J.  W.,  ed.  1973.  V.  S.  Khromchenko's 
Coastal  Explorations  in  Southwestern  Alaska,  1822. 
Introduction  by  J.  W.  VanStone.  [Kraus,  D.  H.,  transl.] 
Fieldiana:  Anthropology,  64. 

.  1988.  Russian  Exploration  in  Southwest  Alas- 
ka: The  Travel  Journals  of  Petr  Korsakovskiy  (1818) 
and  Ivan  Ya.  Vasilev  (1829).  Edited  and  with  an  In- 
troduction by  J.  W.  VanStone.  [Kraus,  D.  H.,  transl.]. 
The  Rasmuson  Library  Historical  Translation  Series, 
4.  University  of  Alaska  Press,  Fairbanks. 

VanStone,  J.  W.,  and  J.  B.  Townsend.    1970.   Kijik: 


104        Literature  Cited 


An  Historic  Tanaina  Indian  Settlement.  Fieldiana: 
Anthropology,  59. 

Veltre,  D.  W.  1979.  Korovinski:  The  Ethnohistorical 
Archaeology  of  an  Aleut  and  Russian  Settlement  on 
Atka,  Alaska.  Ph.D.  diss.,  Department  of  Anthropol- 
ogy, University  of  Connecticut.  University  Micro- 
films, Ann  Arbor,  Michigan. 

Williams,  P.,  and  M.  C.  Weber.  1986.  Staffordshire 
Romantic  Transfer  Patterns  II:  Cup  Plates  and  Early 
Victorian  China.  Fountain  House  East,  Jefferstown, 
Kentucky. 

Woodward,  A.  1965.  Indian  Trade  Goods.  Oregon 
Historical  Society,  no.  2.  Portland. 

Workman,  W.  B.  1969.  Contributions  to  the  Prehis- 
tory of  Chirikov  Island,  Southwestern  Alaska.  M.A. 
thesis.  Department  of  Anthropology,  University  of 
Wisconsin,  Madison. 


Wrangell,  F.  p.  von.  1970.  The  inhabitants  of  the 
northwest  coast  of  America.  [VanStone,  J.  W.,  transl. 
and  ed.]  Arctic  Anthropology,  6(2):  5-20. 

.  1980.  Russian  America:  Statistical  and  Eth- 
nographic Information.  [Sadouski,  M.,  transl.]  Mate- 
rials for  the  Study  of  Alaska  History,  15.  Limestone 
Press,  Kingston,  Ontario.  [Original  edition  1839.] 

Zagoskin,  L.  a.  1967.  Lieutenant  Zagoskin's  Travels 
in  Russian  America,  1842-1844.  [Michael,  H.  N.,  ed.] 
Arctic  Institute  of  North  America.  Translations  from 
Russian  Sources,  no.  7.  University  of  Toronto  Press, 
Toronto. 

ZiMMERLY,  D.  W.  1979.  Hooper  Bay  Kayak  Construc- 
tion. National  Museum  of  Man,  Mercury  Series,  Ca- 
nadian Ethnology  Service,  paper  no.  53.  National  Mu- 
seums of  Canada,  Ottawa. 


Literature  Cited         105 


Appendix:     Fauna  from  Paugvik,  Alaska 


David  S.  Reese'' 


Paugvik  village  is  located  at  the  mouth  of  the 
Naknek  River  in  southwestern  Alaska.  It  was 
occupied  in  the  1 9th  century  until  about  a.d.  1 870. 
Fauna  was  recovered  by  hand  collection  and  dry 
sieving  through  a  1  -cm  mesh. 

The  appended  catalogue  provides  details  on  the 
fauna  recovered  from  Houses  1-6  and  Trenches  1 
and  2.  House  5  and  Trench  1  produced  very  small 
samples. 

Caribou  was  found  in  all  contexts,  with  28  in- 
dividuals. Most  came  from  House  6(11  individ- 
uals) and  House  2  (six  individuals). 

There  are  two  probable  adult  moose  bones,  from 
House  6  and  Trench  4. 

Canids  were  found  in  all  contexts  except  Houses 
1  and  5,  with  most  from  House  2  (six  individuals). 
There  are  a  total  of  27  individuals  (15  fox,  seven 
dog/wolf,  and  six  fox  or  dog/wolf)- 

Beaver  remains  were  found  in  House  1 ,  House 
2,  House  3  (two  individuals).  House  6  (four  in- 
dividuals), and  Trench  1 ,  representing  nine  indi- 
viduals. 

Bear  remains  were  found  in  House  2,  House  3, 
House  6  (two  individuals),  and  Trench  2,  repre- 
senting five  individuals. 

Otter  bones  were  present  in  House  3,  House  6, 
and  Trench  2,  representing  three  individuals. 

Muskrat  bones  were  found  in  two  areas  (House 
1 ,  Trench  2),  representing  two  individuals.  Musk- 
rat  hair  was  found  in  Trench  1 . 

Whale  bones  were  found  in  all  deposits,  with 
four  individuals  from  House  6  and  one  or  two 
from  Trench  1,  for  a  total  of  10  or  11  individuals. 

Seal  remains  were  present  in  House  1,  House  2, 
House  3  (two  individuals).  House  6  (three  indi- 
viduals), and  Trench  4,  representing  eight  indi- 
viduals. 


"  Department  of  Anthropology,  Field  Museum  of  Nat- 
ural History,  Chicago. 


There  are  210  birds  bones  present  from  30  in- 
dividuals. Most  of  these  came  from  House  6(11 
bones,  1 1  individuals).  House  2  (six  individuals), 
and  Trench  2  (56  individuals).  There  were  no  bird 
bones  in  House  5,  and  only  one  bone  was  found 
in  both  House  4  and  Trench  1 . 

Fish  bones  were  found  in  all  contexts  except 
Houses  4  and  5.  There  are  probably  no  more  than 
12-14  individuals  represented.  Salmon  is  the  most 
likely  form  present. 

There  are  55  shells:  45  Macoma,  five  Mytilus, 
four  whelks,  and  one  Clinocardium.  Most  of  the 
shells  came  from  Houses  2  and  3. 

Unmodified  mammoth  tusk  pieces  were  found 
in  Houses  2  and  6. 

All  of  the  fauna  might  have  been  eaten,  but  this 
is  particularly  likely  for  the  caribou  and  rarer  moose 
as  well  as  the  whale,  seal,  birds,  shells,  and  fish. 
Over  30  of  the  terrestrial  mammal  individuals  ( 1 5 
fox,  nine  beavers,  five  bears,  three  otters)  may 
have  been  killed  for  their  fur  rather  than  for  meat. 

These  same  species  were  represented  in  the 
smaller  terrestrial  vertebrate  sample  from  the  ear- 
lier work  at  Paugvik:  six  caribou  individuals,  four 
foxes,  two  or  three  other  canids,  two  beavers,  one 
bear,  one  otter,  four  whales,  five  seals,  and  27  birds 
(mainly  ducks  and  geese).  The  aquatic  faunal  com- 
ponent was  somewhat  larger  than  that  of  the  pres- 
ent sample,  with  37+  fish  individuals  and  248 
shell  valves  (Dumond,  1981,  p.  177). 

The  modem  fauna  in  the  Paugvik  area  has  pre- 
viously been  described  (Dumond,  1981,  pp.  10- 
11). 

Catalogue  of  the  Fauna  from  Paugvik 
Village 

Abbreviations  used:  F  =  fused,  JF  =  just  fused;  L 
==  left;  MNI  =  minimum  number  of  individuals; 
mt  =  metatarsus;  R  =  right;  UF  =  unfused.  Alces 
=  moose;  Canis  familiaris/C.  lupus  —  dog/wolf; 


106        Appendix 


Castor  canadensis  =  beaver;  cetacean  =  whale 
(probably  beluga);  Lutra  canadensis  =  otter;  On- 
datra =  muskrat;  Phoca  vitulina  =  harbor  seal  (rib- 
bon seal  could  also  be  present);  Rangifer  tarandus 
=  caribou;  Ursus  arctos  =  brown  bear;  Vulpusfulva 
=  fox;  Clinocardium  nuttalli  =  Nuttall's  cockle; 
Macoma  balthica  =  Baltic  macoma;  Mytilus  edulis 
=  mussel. 


House  1 

Rangifer:  7  antler  fragments  (7  worked),  skull  frag- 
ment, scapula  fragment  (cut  down  tuber  spinae), 
2  proximal  femora  (2  F,  1  L,  1  R  [butchered  through 
trochanter  majus]),  3  distal  femora  (3  F,  2  L,  1  R, 
2  MNI),  proximal  tibia  (F,  R),  distal  tibia  (F,  R), 
2  pelvis  acetabulum  fragments  (IF,  L),  2  astragali 
(1  L,  1  R,  1  badly  worn,  2  MNI),  calcaneus  (F,  R), 
naviculocuboid,  8  carpi/tarsi/sesmoids,  proximal 
metacarpus,  proximal  metatarsus,  proximal  me- 
tapodial  fragment,  distal  metacarpus  (F),  3  pha- 
langes 1  (3  F),  2  phalanges  2  (2  F),  2  phalanges  3, 
4  vertebrae,  1 4  ribs  (2  MNI). 

Castor.  2  mandibles  (1  L,  1  R),  incisors,  ulna. 

Ondatra:  ulna. 

Cetacean:  4  vertebrae,  3  vertebral  centra  epiph- 
yses, phalanx,  rib. 

Phoca:  pelvis. 

Bird:  6  bones  (1  MNI). 

Fish:  1 7  vertebrae,  no  toothed  elements 

Shells  (MNI):  5  Macoma,  1  Mytilus 


MNI),  10  proximal  tibia  fragments  (3  L  [  2  UF,  1 
F],  2  R  [2  UF],  3  fragments  [1  UF]),  6  distal  tibiae 
(3  L  [1  UF,  2  F],  3  R  [3  F],  4  MNI),  2  patellae  (2 
MNI),  6  astragali  (3  L,  3  R,  2  badly  worn,  probably 
4  MNI),  3  calcaneus  fragments  (1  L  [F],  1  R  [bro- 
ken], 2  MNI),  2  naviculocuboids  (L,  R),  8  carpals/ 
tarsals,  5  distal  metapodials  (5  F,  no  proximal 
ends),  5  phalanges  1  (5  F),  1  phalanx  3,  5  vertebral 
fragments,  32  ribs,  35  fragments  (6  MNI). 

Ursus:  scapula  (F,  L,  very  large),  radius  shaft 
(UF  proximal  and  distal,  L),  radius  shaft  fragment, 
distal  radius/ulna  (F,  R,  proximal  radius  probably 
UF),  sternum,  2  tibia  shafts  (2  UF,  L,  R),  4  carpi/ 
tarsi,  4  metapodials  (2  UF  [  1  mt  IV]),  2  vertebrae. 

Vulpes:  various  bones  (3  MNI  by  mandible  [1 
subadult,  2  adult]). 

Canis:  various  bones  (2  MNI  by  femur,  tibia). 

Canis/Vulpes:  hair  (1  sample). 

Castor:  scapula,  hair  (2  samples). 

Cetacean:  4  teeth,  scapula  (R),  humerus,  ?pelvis 
fragment,  24  metapodials/phalanges,  22  vertebral 
centra,  22  vertebral  epiphyses,  1 5  ribs. 

Phoca:  2  distal  humeri  (?UF),  2  pelvis,  femur 
(UF  distal),  metapodial. 

Bird:  50  bones  and  1  feather  (6  MNI,  4  of  one 
species,  and  one  each  of  two  other  forms). 

Fish:  23  vertebrae,  no  toothed  elements. 

Shells  (MNI):  18  Macoma,  1  Mytilus,  1  Clino- 
cardium, 2  whelks  (1  fragment). 

Mammoth  tusk  fragment. 


House  3 


House  2 

Rangifer:  2 1  antler  fragments  (2 1  worked),  2  skull 
fragments  (1  temporal,  1  occipital),  2  mandibles 
(2  adult,  2  R,  2  MNI),  14  isolated  premolars/mo- 
lars,  atlas,  8  scapulae  (8  F,  6  R,  2  L,  6  MNI),  3 
proximal  humerus  fragments  (2  UF,  L,  R),  8  distal 
humeri  (8  F,  6  R,  2  L  [  1  butchered]),  4  proximal 
radii  (4  F,  2  L  [1  worn],  2  R),  3  distal  radii  (2  R 
[1  UF  epiphysis,  1  F],  1  L  [UF  epiphysis]),  2  distal 
radius  shafts,  5  proximal  ulnae  (3  R  ([1  UF,  2 
broken],  2  L  [1  butchered,  proximal]),  3  pelvis 
fragments  (1  acetabulum,  1  MNI),  sacrum  frag- 
ment, 5  proximal  femora  ( 1  UF  head,  1  UF  tro- 
chanter majus,  1  L  F,  1  R  F,  1  F  head;  3  MNI),  3 
distal  femur  fragments  (1  UF,  1  F,  1  butchered,  2 


Rangifer:  8  antler  fragments  (8  worked),  atlas, 
scapula  fragment,  2  ulnae  (F,  R,  butchered  down 
shaft;  broken,  L;  2  MNI),  distal  radius/ulna  (F,  L, 
worn),  ?ulna  shaft,  proximal  femur  (?UF,  L,  worn), 
distal  tibia  (F,  L),  4  carpi/tarsi,  phalanx  1  (F,  worn), 
5  vertebrae  fragments  (1  caudal),  12  ribs  (2  MNI). 

Ursus:  palate  fragment,  4  metapodials,  vertebra, 
claw  sheath,  cf  Ursus  hair  (1  sample). 

Vulpes:  several  bones. 

Canis:  several  bones. 

Castor:  several  bones  (2  MNI  by  humerus). 

Lutra:  several  bones. 

Cetacean:  skull  fragment,  jaw  fragment,  atlas, 
1 0  metapodials/phalanges,  vertebra  centra,  3  ver- 
tebral epiphyses,  3  other  bones. 

Phoca:  several  bones  (2  MNI  by  pelvis,  ulna). 

Bird:  1 2  bones  (4  MNI  by  humerus,  2  species). 


Appendix        107 


Fish:  57  vertebrae,  1  toothed  element  (2  MNI). 
Shells  (MNI):  9  Macoma.  2  Mytilus.  1  whelk 
(fragment). 


House  4  (tested  only) 

Rangifer.  2  antler  fragments  (2  worked),  atlas 
(adult),  distal  radius  (F),  2  ulnae  (1  L,  1  R,  1  F,  1 
broken  adult;  F  has  butchered  radius  shaft),  prox- 
imal tibia  (UF,  opened  for  marrow),  distal  tibia 
(F,  fresh,  opened  for  marrow),  carpus/tarsus,  pha- 
lanx 1  (F,  worn),  4  vertebral  fragments  (2  UF  cen- 
tra), 1 1  ribs. 

Canis/Vulpes:  mandible  (adult),  scapula  (no  gle- 
noid, young),  humerus  (proximal  UF,  distal  F), 
radius  and  ulna  (articulate,  but  separate),  distal 
tibia  (F),  5  vertebrae  (2  MNI). 

Vulpes:  mandible  (adult),  humerus  (UF  proxi- 
mal), radius  and  ulna  (articulating). 

Cetacean:  skull  fragment,  jaw  fragment,  meta- 
podial/phalanx,  vertebra  centra,  vertebra  epiph- 
ysis. 

Bird:  1  bone. 

Shells:  1  Macoma. 


House  5  (tested  only,  N17/E110) 

Rangifer.  2  antler  fragments  (2  worked),  distal  fe- 
mur (UF),  vertebra  (UF),  rib  (butchered). 

Cetacean:  jaw  (no  teeth). 

Shells  (MNI):  1  Macoma. 


House  6  (excavated  as  Trench  2  and 
Trench  1,  E20-26) 

Rangifer.  20  antler  fragments  (20  worked),  8  skull 
fragments,  2  palate  fragments  ( 1  L,  1  R,  2  MNI), 

4  atlantes  (1  butchered,  4  MNI),  3  axes  (1  butch- 
ered through  and  behind  articular  surface,  1  worn), 
19  mandible  fragments  (all  adult,  7  MNI  L,  6  MNI 
R),  23  isolated  premolars/molars,  1 8  scapula  frag- 
ments (7  L  [7  F],  7  R  [1  smaller  and  broken,  6  F], 
8  MNI),  16  proximal  humeri  (11  R  [4  UF,  4  F], 

5  L  [3  UF,  2  F],  8  MNI),  22  distal  humeri  (12  R 
[1  UF,  10  F],  10  L  [1  UF,  9  F]),  humerus  shaft 
(young,  possibly  UF,  R),  4  proximal  radii  (3  L  [3 
F],  1  R  [F]),  6  ulnae  (5  L  [3  UF,  2  broken],  1  R 
[UF]),  1 1  distal  radii  (7  L  [5  UF,  2  F],  2  R  [1  UF, 
1  F]),  distal  radius  shaft  fragment,  39  pelvis  frag- 
ments with  1 8  acetabulum  fragments  ( 1 0  L  [  1  UF, 


6  F,  3  broken],  8  R  [2  UF,  5  F,  1  broken],  9  MNI), 
1 1  sacrum  fragments  (3  +  MNI),  6  proximal  fem- 
ora (4  R  [2  UF,  2  F],  2  L  [1  JF,  1  F]),  proximal 
femur  epiphysis  (head,  R),  6  distal  femora  (3  UF, 

2  MNI;  3  F,  2  MNI),  3  distal  femoral  epiphyses 
(2  MNI),  1  small  femur  (all  UF),  proximal  tibia 
(1 1  R  [5  UF,  4  F],  7  L  [3  UF,  1  JF,  2  F,  10  MNI], 
13  distal  tibia  fragments  (8  L  [1  UF,  7  F],  5  R  [3 
UF,  2  F],  also  1  shaft  and  2  epiphyses,  7  MNI),  2 
patellae,  9  astragali  (6  L,  3  R,  6  MNI),  8  calcani 
(9  fragments,  5  L  [3  UF,  2  F],  3  R  [3  UF]),  4 
naviculare  (3  MNI),  24  carpi/tarsi,  5  proximal  me- 
tacarpi  (3  MNI),  5  proximal  metatarsi  (2  very  large, 
4  or  5  MNI),  5  metapodial  fragments,  14  distal 
metapodials  (13  F  [1  mt],  1  broken  mt),  6  pha- 
langes 1  (6  F),  4  phalanges  2  (4  F),  102  vertebral 
centra  and  49  fragments,  165  ribs  (11  MNI). 

^Rangifer.  phalanx  1  (UF),  burnt  black. 

lAlces:  proximal  radius  (very  large,  F,  R). 

Ursus:  scapula  (F,  R),  proximal  humerus  (F), 
distal  humerus  epiphysis  (R),  2  radii  (2  all  UF), 
proximal  ulna  (F,  R),  proximal  tibia  epiphysis  (L), 
tibia  (F,  R),  2  astragali  ( 1  L,  1  R),  calcaneus  (UF, 
L),  3  carpi/tarsi,  6  metapodials  (5  F),  1  phalanx  1 , 
1  phalanx  2,  2  phalanx  3,  3  phalanx  3  sheaths,  19 
vertebrae  (2  MNI),  cf.  Ursus  hair  (9  samples). 

Canis:  various  bones,  adult  (3  MNI  tibia;  2  MNI 
mandible,  atlas,  axis),  1  upper  shaft  of  a  femur  has 
an  incised  slit  (3  MNI). 

Vulpes:  various  bones  (9  MNI  mandibles  [2  sub- 
adult,  7  adult],  3  MNI  atlas,  femur;  2  MNI  axis, 
tibia)  (9  MNI). 

Canis/Vulpes:  hair  (8  samples). 

Castor,  various  bones  (4  MNI  by  humerus,  2 
MNI  by  mandible  and  pelvis).  One  individual  is 
very  large  based  on  a  humerus  and  femur  (4  MNI). 

Lutra:  scapula,  femur  (UP). 

Cetacean:  6  teeth,  6  jaw  fragments  (1  looks  burnt, 
4  MNI),  4  scapula  fragments  (1  glenoid  butchered, 

3  MNI),  femur  head,  25  metapodials/phalanges, 
44  vertebrae,  7  vertebral  spine  fragments,  67  ver- 
tebral epiphyses,  29  ribs  (4  MNI). 

Phoca:  8  humeri  and  3  epiphyses  (5  MNI),  3 
ulnae  (3  MNI),  2  pelves,  2  femora  (2  MNI),  20 
metapodials/phalanges,  1  other  bone  (3  MNI),  hair 
(2  samples). 

Bird:  117  bones  and  13  feathers  (11  MNI  by 
humerus). 

Fish:  43  vertebrae,  7  toothed  elements  (3  or  4 
MNI). 

Shells  (MNI):  8  Macoma  (1  burnt),  1  whelk 
(fragment). 

Mammoth  tusk  fragment  (from  Trench  2  back, 
N10/E20). 


108        Appendix 


Trench  1  (E27-36);  mixed  midden 

Rangifer.  5  antler  fragments  (4  worked),  3  molar 
fragments,  3  proximal  humerus  (3  F,  2  L,  1  R,  2 
MNI),  2  distal  humerus  (2  F,  1  L,  1  R,  1  MNI), 
proximal  radius  (F,  R)  attaches  to  proximal  ulna 
(broken),  distal  radius/ulna  (F,  R),  pelvis  frag- 
ment, proximal  femur  (maybe  UF,  R,  worn),  fe- 
mur head  epiphysis,  proximal  tibia  (young  adult/ 
adult,  R,  broken  proximal),  astragalus  (R),  2  cal- 
caneus (1  L  [F],  1  R  [butchered  through  distal 
end]),  naviculocuboid,  7  carpus/tarsus,  2  proximal 
metatarsus  ( 1  butchered),  distal  metapodial  (F,  very 
worn),  phalanx  3  (very  large),  10  vertebrae  [1  UF 
epiphysis],  18  ribs  (2  MNI),  hair  (1  sample). 

Canis:  palate  fragment,  2  mandibles  (1  MNI), 
distal  humerus  (F). 

Canis/Vulpes:  hair  (2  samples). 

Castor:  2  pelvis  (1  L,  1  R,  1  MNI). 

Ondatra:  hair(l  sample). 

Cetacean:  jaw  and  5  jaw  fragments  (no  teeth,  1 
or  2  MNI),  humerus  head,  large  shaft  (UF),  me- 
tapodial/phalanx,  5  vertebral  epiphyses,  3  small 
vertebrae,  2  ribs  (1  or  2  MNI). 

Bird:  1  bone. 

Fish:  23  vertebrae,  no  toothed  elements  (1  or  2 
MNI). 

Shells  (MNI):  2  Macoma. 


Trench  4  (midden  near  the  entrances  of 
Houses  2  and  3) 


L),  2  proximal  radii  (2  F,  1  R,  1  L  [butchered  down 
center  of  shaft]),  3  distal  radii  (1  UF,  2  F  [1  butch- 
ered toward  distal],  3  L,  3  MNI),  9  pelvis  frag- 
ments (2  L,  2  R,  1  butchered  fragment,  2  MNI), 
4  proximal  femora  (2  L  [1  UF  trochanter  majus, 
1  F],  2  R  [F],  3  MNI),  2  distal  femora  (1  UF 
epiphysis,  1  F  (distal,  worn),  2  MNI),  2  distal  tibiae 
(1  R  [UF],  1  L  [F],  2  MNI),  astragalus  (R),  cal- 
caneus (UF,  R),  naviculocuboid,  phalanx  1  (F),  1 3 
vertebrae,  36  ribs  (3  MNI). 

lAlces:  posterior  mandible  (condyle  process). 

Ursus:  axis,  2  carpi/tarsi. 

Canis/Vulpes:  various  bones,  all  adult  (4  MNI 
by  mandibles,  2  MNI  by  scapula  and  pelvis),  1 
burnt  mandible,  hair  ( 1  sample)  (4  MNI). 

Vulpes  (adult):  skull,  2  mandibles,  atlas,  axis, 
pelvis,  sacrum,  1  astragalus,  1  calcaneus,  most  ver- 
tebrae and  ribs;  missing  other  limbs  (Animal  1, 
Feature  14,  N24/E65). 

Lutra:  complete  skeleton  except  for  1  astragalus 
and  1  calcaneus  (second  skeleton  from  Feature  14, 
N24/E65). 

Ondatra:  mandible. 

Cetacean:  tooth,  jaw  lacking  teeth,  scapula,  fe- 
mur, 3  metapodials/phalanges,  limb  bone,  5  ver- 
tebrae, 3  vertebral  centra  epiphyses. 

Phoca:  2  humerus,  2  humeral  epiphyses  (UF), 
ulna  (UF,  L),  pelvis,  metapodial. 

Bird:  32  bones  (6  MNI;  2  each  of  2  species). 

Fish:  largest  sample  41  vertebrae  (4  MNI  by 
skull  bones). 

Shells:  1  Macoma,  1  Mytilns. 


Rangifer:  3  antler  fragments  (3  worked),  2  man- 
dible fragments  (2  L,  2  MNI),  atlas,  scapula  (F, 


'0 


Appendix        109 


A  Selected  Listing  of  Other  fleidiana:  Anthropology  1  itles  Available 


I  Ethnographic  Collect!  -  Sakhalin 

iropolog:^     ■'         o.  8,  l')88.  67  pages,  3;)  iilus 


lidii  Trade  Ornaments  in  the  Colle».iicii)a  oi  i  leid  Museum  ui 
Fieldiana:  Anthropology,  n.s.,  no.  13,  1989.  40  pages,  32  illu: 


Material  Culture  of  the  Blackfoot  (Blood)  Indians  of  Southern  Alberta, 
n.s.,  no.  19,  1992.  80  pages,  53  illus. 


. ; ; , 


Publication  13SJ 


PublicatioD  1404,  $il.00 


Publication  1439,  $19.00 


Material Cultureof the ChilcotinAthanaskansofWest Central Bri.'ish  v'"nlnmhi:i  Rv  l.ir 
Fieldiana:  Anthropology  '■'■  pages,  25  ilhn 

Fui)UCJJK>!l   14  »(^-,  ^iZ.Ut) 

less  and  Warfare  Among  the  Kayenta  Anasazi  of  the  Thirteenth  Century  A.D.  By  Jonathan  Haas  and 
Winifred  Creamer.  Fit'l/iiono-  4>ith>-nnnJn\y\:  n.s    no.  71     iQQ'^    ?M  ngp'^'i   74  illus. 

Publication  1450,  $32.00 

oUection  of  Copper  Inuit  Material  Culture.  By  James  W .  VanStone.  Fieldian  c 
'^94.  71  pages,  44  illus. 

Publication  ir^   -:'  7  00 

chaeological  Research  at  Tumatumani,  Juii,  Peru.  By  Charles  Stanish  and  Lee  Steadman,   .      :    v 
.:ontribution  by  Matthew  T.  Seddon.  Fieldiana:  Anthropology,  n.s.,  no.  23,  1994.  1 1 1  pages,  17o  p  u-, 

Publication  1457,  $23.00 


rder  by  publication  number  and/or  ask  for  a  free  copy  of  our  price  lis 

inois  residents  add  current  destination  tax.  All  foreign  orders  are  payable  m  i_.o.  <.il  n-rt/cii^^^RS  v^jiavwi 
1  any  U.S.  bank  or  the  U.S.  subsidiary  of  any  foreign  bank.  Prices  and  terms  subject  to  change  without 
Address  all  request'    '^ 

FIELD  MUSEUM  OF  NATURAL  Hie 
Library— Publications  Division 
Roosevelt  Road  at  Lake  Shore  Dri^  c 
Chicago,  Illinois  60605-2498,  ' 


seum  of  Natural  History 


CENTRAL  GRCULATION  BOOKSTACKS 

The  person  charging  this  material  is  re- 
sponsible for  its  renewal  or  its  return  to 
the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed 
on  or  before  the  Latest  Date  stamped 
below.  You  may  be  charged  a  minimum 
fee  of  $75.00  for  each  lost  book. 

Ifcsft/  mvHlotten,  and  WHii»rtltilnfl  mi  books  oro  rooaom 
for  disciplinary  actloa  and  may  rwoit  in  dJindiioi  froa 
tlM  Unlvorslty. 
TO  RENEW  CALL  TELEPHONE  CENTER,  33>.»400 

UNIVERSITY  Of   ILLINOIS    LIBRARY  AT   URBANA-CHAAAPAION 


FEB  1  9  1997 


When  renewing  1^  phone,  write  new  due  date  bdow 
previous  due  date.  Ll^ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS-URBANA 


3  0112  028183785